Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 603

<font face=arial size=3><strong>SAP ERP Functional Enhancements</strong></font><br ><br><table width=100% border=0 cellpadding=1 cellspacing=1> <tr bgcolor='#003366'> <th align=left

valign=top><font face=arial size=2 color=white>Release Available< /th> <th align=left valign=top><font face=arial size=2 color=white>SAP ERP Solution A rea</th> <th align=left valign=top><font size=2 face=arial color=white>Module(s)</th> <th align=left valign=top><font face=arial size=2 color=white>Delta Functionalit y</th> <th align=left size=2 valign=top><font face=arial size=2 color=white>Functionali ty Description</th> <th align=left valign=top><font size=2 face=arial color=white>Business Benefits< /th> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Materials management revaluation of settled deliveries and activities</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following options are available in SAP R/3 release 4.5B: - You can select purchasing documents for the revaluation by manually entering s election criteria. You can also enter the retroactive period of examination manu ally. Retroactive condition changes are not linked to the revaluation work list. - You can determine difference values per delivery item (material document item) at net item value level, without analyzing individual conditions. - You can create a settlement invoice (materials management invoice receipt docu ment as subsequent debit posting). - You can create a message record for print and electronic data interchange (EDI ) output. - You can post expenses and incomes from revaluation to neutral accounts. No cha nge is made to stock values or material valuation prices. The software creates a log of the settlement. You can, however, carry out the se ttlement in simulation mode.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality allows revaluation of settled deliv eries and activities to ensure appliance of prices decrease for all locations. In the constant flow of materials between customer and supplier (for example, in the component supplier industry), deliveries are settled even if the purchase p rices are not fixed in the outline agreements. The results of price negotiations may then be retroactively valid, so that operations already settled must be set tled again later. The prices of the deliveries are recalculated and the differen ce values determined. The difference values are then debited or credited to the supplier. With this situation accounted for, SAP R/3 release 4.5B supports revaluation of settled deliveries. These revaluations allow you to determine the difference val ues for previous settlements cumulatively and to create settlement invoices. To use revaluations, you must have activated goods receipt based invoice verifica tion for the purchase order or scheduling agreement items in question.</span></t d> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Global percentage bids and conditions at different out

line levels of service specifications</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To enter conditions at higher outline levels, you use header conditions. SAP R/3 release 4.5B supports the following functions: - You can enter header conditions at different outline levels or for the entire set of service specifications in all purchasing documents except the entry sheet . - When you enter header conditions for an outline level, you can choose whether the software is to copy these conditions down to the outline levels below. - You can stipulate that prices and further conditions can also be stored in ser vice specifications belonging to a request-for-quotation (RFQ) item. In this way , you can realize the functions of a global percentage bid.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you enter conditions at sev eral outline levels of service specifications. When calling for bids from external services, many companies like to indicate th eir own estimated prices for the individual services (tasks, jobs, or activities ) involved, in addition to providing descriptions of the work to be performed (i n the form of service specifications). In this case, service providers taking pa rt in the competitive bidding process do not quote for each individual service. Instead, they indicate the rates at which they are prepared to carry out the wor k by specifying percentage additions to or deductions from the prices set out in the bid invitation for groups of services. (For example, a group of services ma y comprise all work belonging to a certain trade.) This approach simplifies the process of recording bidding data particularly whe n bids are received in written form because only minimal data entry effort is r equired (entry of the percentage additions or deductions). Furthermore, it is ea sier to compare the bids submitted by individual suppliers by comparing these pe rcentage figures. Bids submitted on this basis are termed "global percentage" bi ds. The global percentage bid is an example of how you can enter conditions not only at the level of the individual service line but also at various outline levels of a set of service specifications. You can then copy conditions entered at a hi gher outline level down to lower levels in the hierarchy.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in the time sheet</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Developments in the cost accounting area include the f ollowing: - Assigning personnel costs In addition to the current option of posting working times assigned to a control ling object (for example, an order or a project) as costs by using an activity a llocation in the controlling component, you can transfer the working times toget her with their controlling object assignment to the human resources software. Th e working times are thus available in the payroll accounting component, which th en determines the proportionate personnel costs according to customer-specific r egulations. The personnel costs are debited to the controlling object as primary costs. - Taking account of the master cost center Employees have a master cost center that is debited with their personnel costs a nd for which they perform work. The work performed is settled in the controlling component, and the master cost center is credited again. This process enables y ou to trace and analyze costs. If an employee performs work for another cost ce nter (either as an exception or regularly) and the other cost center is credited for his or her work in the controlling component, the master and other cost cen

ters are unbalanced. However, this imbalance is settled automatically if you rec ord the data in the time sheet function and either assign the employee to the ot her cost center or carry out an activity allocation from the master cost center to the other cost center. - Distributing the time sheet function and the human resources software In different components of SAP R/3, such distribution not only ensures better pe rformance of the global system but also allows you to have separate human resour ces software in which you can store confidential personal data for example, inf ormation on employees' salaries. You do not need this information to implement t he time sheet function. The distribution is performed with the use of application link-enabling (ALE) an d BAPI technologies. A synchronous link to the human resources software system a llows you to use all the time sheet functions. Even during down times in the hum an resources software, asynchronous linking techniques allow you to use the time sheet function with reduced functionality. <br>You can use the cross-application time sheet component for standardized, cro ss-application time recording. The following major developments are new to SAP R /3 release 4.5B.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality allows transparency and improves co st control on employees. Developments in the cost accounting area to allow you greater control over recor ded working times. With this aim in view, methods that include data and function ality from the human resources software, particularly the payroll accounting fun ction, are supported. You can distribute the time sheet component and the human resources software in different functionalities in SAP R/3. This allows you to divide the global softw are into one part human resources and another part that includes logistics, acco unting, and the time sheet functionality for example, to protect confidential p ersonal data. If you want only to record times for human resources activities, y ou can use the time sheet function in stand-alone human resources software, with out any further components.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Distribution of service contracts</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are supported: - Transmission of contract data to local software In the case of direct transmission, you can choose contract items. The latter ar e transmitted complete. In the event of a change, only the changed data can be t ransmitted through evaluation of the change document. - Receipt of contract data When the contract data from the central software is received, either a new contr act is created or an existing one is changed. <br>- Transmission of release orde r data The release order documentation is transmitted to the central software in the fo llowing cases: > When a release order is created against the contract > When unplanned services are entered with reference to a contract - Receipt of release order documentation The release order documentation and the quantity released are updated for each s ervice line in the central software on the basis of the incoming information. - Treatment of errors that occur when receiving data If an error occurs during the posting of an incoming message, a workflow is star ted to rectify it.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality encourages use of corporate contrac

ts at the local level to reduce global costs. As a result of the increasing globalization of business activities, many firms a re considering whether and to what extent a centralized purchasing structure is likely to improve the quality of procured materials and reduce the costs of proc urement. In firms with centralized purchasing, contracts concluded by the centra l purchasing department are often valid for different regions. With SAP R/3 rele ase 3.0, if the individual locations of a company employ separate, independent S AP R/3 software components, a contract for materials set up in the central SAP R /3 software can be distributed to the local software. When release orders are cr eated in the local software, the release order documentation is updated in the c entral software. The central software thereby recognizes the release orders that have been issued by all local software and can monitor the degree of fulfillmen t of the contract.<br><br>Comparison of the data stored in the central and local systems is carried out through application link enabling (ALE).<br><br>SAP R/3 4.5B also supports distributed contracts for externally procured services. If th e central purchasing department has entered into a contract for services and cre ated it in the central SAP R/3 software, this contract is transmitted to the loc al software. There you can create release orders and enter unplanned services ag ainst the contract. The release order documentation is updated in the central so ftware in exactly the same way as with materials.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Configuration with model service specifications</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>You can maintain the service lines of a set of model s ervice specifications on a configurable basis. In doing so, you can store the fo llowing types of object dependency: - Preconditions for the control of characteristics - Conditions for the selection of services - Procedures for setting the attributes of services When a service (in a requisition, a request for quotation [RFQ], or a purchase o rder) is planned and entering services are actually performed, you can choose a set of model specifications for referencing purposes. If this set of model servi ce specifications is configurable, the software determines the relevant services and attributes of services through the configuration, by assigning values to th e characteristics.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you to enter services that are procured. In many cases (such as energy supply or public utilities), services are procured on a very standardized basis. This applies to, for example, cable laying in roa d construction, to the maintenance of overhead transmission lines, or to house s ervice connections provided by the electric companies.<br><br>To aid in such ins tances, model service specifications were introduced in SAP R/3 release 4.0B. A set of model service specifications comprises frequently used specifications, wh ich can be employed as a simple, single-level copying template for the various p rocurement transactions.<br><br>With SAP R/3 4.0B, you can describe internal ser vices on a configurable basis for example, in maintenance instructions by usin g the variant configuration component. When incorporating such maintenance instr uctions in a maintenance order, you assign values to the characteristics of the configuration.<br><br>With SAP R/3 4.5B, you can also describe external services in model specifications with the aid of the configuration component. In this wa y, you can easily and quickly enter services that are procured in the materials management component of SAP R/3 by specifying values for the characteristics.</s pan></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Delivery scheduling in stock transport orders</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>For stock transport orders and scheduling agreements, you can use delivery scheduling instead of the previous scheduling method. Deliv ery scheduling produces the following dates: Materials staging date Transportation planning date Loading date Goods issue date

With regard to the materials staging date and transportation planning date, the earlier date is used as the date of performance for shipping. You specify whether you want to use delivery scheduling or conventional scheduli ng for stock transfer processes. If you do not use delivery scheduling, the soft ware converts the materials staging date determined by conventional scheduling t o the last available working day. It also takes the factory calendar of the issu ing plant into account. Until this release, the SAP R/3 software calculated as follows the date on which material in purchase orders and scheduling agreements is to be staged: Materials staging date = planned delivery date " planned delivery time The software uses the planned delivery time specified in the material master rec ord. It uses this formula both when you procure the material from an external su pplier and when you transfer the material from one of your own plants. In stock transfer processes, the SAP R/3 software not only models the goods rece ipt but, in contrast to procurement from an external supplier, also models the o utbound shipment of the goods in the issuing plant. In sales order processing, a method of scheduling for shipping activities whereby the system takes various lead times into account and determines specific times for the places involved in shipping in the issuing plant has proved worthwhile. With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can activate delivery scheduling for the issuing plant instead of the previous scheduling method for stock transport orders. Enha ncements are also being made to the previous scheduling method. For example, the software now takes the factory calendar of the issuing plant into account when it determines the materials staging date.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves customer service level by providing more flexibility in delivery scheduling.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Delivery for all relevant movement types</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can now create a delivery to carry out a return de livery to a vendor instead of using movement type 122 as previously. To do so, y ou must have maintained the master data for the vendor and the material. When you create a delivery, you choose the purchase order items you want to retu rn and enter the goods issue for this delivery. For some stock transfers and return deliveries, you require detailed accompanyin

g documents (for example, delivery notes or bills of lading). Often a printout o f the standard accompanying slip is not sufficient for removing goods from stora ge. Instead, you need detailed shipping documents, such as those that you create for a delivery. Until this release, you have been able to create a delivery to remove goods from storage for a stock transport order. With SAP R/3 release 4.0B, you can also cr eate deliveries to transfer components to a subcontractor and carry out return d eliveries of material for a returns order. With SAP R/3 4.5B, you can also create deliveries to carry out return deliveries to a vendor. This means that you can decide whether you want to enter the most important movements with or without a delivery. In this way, you can make use of delivery functions as and when you require them (for example, the creation of m ore detailed shipping documents, picking, or packing).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides more flexiblity by enrichi ng the different types of deliveries covered.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analysis of conversion differences</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can start the analysis report periodically. This r eport evaluates the goods movements and the materials stock situation, determine s the materials for which differences occurred, and displays these differences. This helps you to decide whether you have to take subsequent measures (for examp le, transfer postings) to prevent the differences from having a negative effect. <br><br>You can use various units of measure for a material. For example, you ca n enter a purchase order in a unit of measure with which the vendor is familiar, even if it is different from the unit you use to manage your own stocks of this material. Differences can occur in converting the values between various units of measure. These conversion errors occur particularly when you convert small qu antities or if your company uses the metric and imperial systems simultaneously. <br><br>From a business point of view, these conversion differences do not usual ly affect the individual transaction. However, these differences can accumulate over several transactions, particularly if the same type of conversion error rec urs for systematic reasons (for example, if values are always rounded up). As a result, the numbers in the displays might not be clear, and the conversion can s eem implausible. For example, 6,096 cm is displayed as 200 feet, but 3,048 cm is displayed as 100.1 feet (in an example like this, it s not always clear where th e fractional value after the decimal point comes from). Such conversion differen ces can also result in a complete reduction of stock or requirements (that is, t o the value of zero) in one unit of measure, whereas partial stock or requiremen ts are left over in the other unit of measure. This can lead to problems in foll ow-on applications if the material requirements planning (MRP) program creates p rocurement proposals on the basis of stock or requirement quantities that do not have the same number of places after the decimal point.<br><br>You cannot rule out the possibility that conversion differences occur when you enter goods movem ents. However, we provide a report with which you can analyze differences that a rise. By making the appropriate postings, you can then adjust the stock values s o that any differences do not disrupt follow-on applications.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides accurate analysis that int egrates conversion differences to improve decision making.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>"Enjoy MM"</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>We want you to find a typical, complete procurement pr ocess for a stock material in the new design.<br><br>Therefore, the first releas

e of "Enjoy MM" contains the following functions:<br><br>- Create and change pur chase order (materials management purchasing)<br>- Post goods receipt (materials management inventory management)<br>- Post incoming invoice (materials manageme nt invoice verification)<br>- Create service master record, enter services perfo rmed (materials management external services management)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>"Enjoy MM" focuses on the interests of SAP's users. Fu nctionality alone is not everything. SAP's main concern is people: the individua l buyer, for example, or the individual accounts payable clerk. SAP wants its so ftware to give such people the maximum possible support in performing their dail y tasks, improving their productivity and efficiency.<br><br>During visits to cu stomers, SAP representatives have spoken to materials management users and obser ved them in their everyday environment, procuring materials and services. The kn owledge acquired through such observations is incorporated into the new design. The revamped software reflects users work processes more closely, being more int uitive and easier to use. Together with specialists in the field of ergonomics a nd internationally acclaimed design experts such as Alan Cooper Interaction Desi gn or Frog Design, the materials management team is working on new solutions wit hin the framework of SAP R/3. To check that it is on the right path, SAP obtains user feedback as early as possible.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Invoice release</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The function for releasing blocked invoices is being r edeveloped. It is carried out as a report that you can start in the background, as well as online. The following new features are being added to the current rel ease function:<br><br>- More flexible and quicker selection of blocked invoices Other selection criteria, such as the name of the accounts payable clerk, are be ing added. In addition to individual values, you can also specify intervals for the selection criteria.<br>- Ergonomically designed and configurable list displa y The list of the blocked invoices selected is issued through the ABAP list viewer and is therefore standardized, as in other applications. You can make the list user specific. The list supports functions such as sort, search, and filter thro ugh selected columns. From the list, you can display objects, such as purchase o rder histories or vendor data, that are relevant to whether the invoice is relea sed. It is helpful if the user can see immediately which blocking reasons are no longer valid in the list of blocked invoices. Therefore, blocking reasons that are invalid are displayed in a different color.<br>- Enhanced automatic release Until this release, you could release invoices automatically only if all the blo cking reasons were invalid. You can now automatically delete blocking reasons th at are invalid, even if other blocking reasons exist. If all the blocking reason s in an invoice are deleted, the whole invoice is automatically released.</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you, when you start the fun ction for releasing blocked invoices, to select the invoices to be listed by ent ering a company code, fiscal year, vendor, purchasing group, and blocking reason s.<br><br>It is advantageous to be able to check selected invoices. There are al so requests to make the interface of the release function more convenient to use and to make functional enhancements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Late calculation of value and financials update</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>The following activities can be accomplished: - Activation of late calculation of value

You can activate or deactivate the calculation of value process at any time. You can therefore choose a time when the database is not very full and blocks in ot her applications (for example, invoice entry) do not impede the calculation of v alue process.<br>- Entry of goods movements You can enter the goods movements as before by using an inventory management fun ction or with an interface. The same parts of the program are run as before, exc ept for the parts of the program or the function calls required for the calculat ion of value.<br>- Interface for calculation of value The update functions provide the calculation of value process with the data requ ired for separate calculation of value. The material document is posted at first without valuation data. The valuation data is not added to the material documen t until the value is calculated. The purchase order and the purchase order histo ry are also updated when the goods movement is entered and the valuation data is later added. After you enter the goods receipt, and before the invoices pertain ing to the goods receipt are valuated, the system acts as if the invoice receipt was posted before the goods receipt. You cannot carry out goods receipt based in voice verification until the value has been calculated. Orders are handled in th e same way as purchase orders.<br>- Calculation of value A user-defined program carries out calculation of value for the posting date on the material document. It processes the material documents in the order that the y are posted. As soon as the calculation of value for a goods movement is comple ted, you can carry out material valuation as before by analyzing the single mate rial items. The program indicates material documents as incorrect if it cannot v aluate them. You can process these subsequently through an error monitor.<br>- A rchiving Before archiving a material document, a purchase order, or other similar items, you have to carry out calculation of value.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves performance during update and optimizes the required blocking times. In some industry sectors, many goods movements must be posted within a short spa cA e t oy fpi tc ia ml e pro fb ol rem exi an mpp lo es ,ti dn ug ria ngla pr og ie ntn -u om fb -e sr alo efug po lod as d m io nve tm hent rs etw ait lhinda uss th ro yr .t s pace of time is that various transactions are posted for the same material. To p revent database inconsistencies, the data records had to be blocked just after t hey have been processed. This problem was solved when the late material block wa s introduced, as this lets you work simultaneously on several records for one ma terial.<br><br>Despite this, some SAP software users still report performance pr oblems with everyday mass transactions, because the posting of goods movements t akes too long and thus impedes other business processes. Therefore, performance during update has been improved and the required blocking times optimized. For t his purpose, you can separate the posting of goods movements from the calculatio n of value.<br><br>Updating value and quantities separately increases the throug hput of goods movements. Because the value is calculated in a separate step, you do not have to set value blocks when the goods movement is entered, and certain verifications and updates can be dropped. Of course, separating the update step s means that extra effort is necessary to manage the value postings that have st ill to be carried out. However, you can enter the goods movement and calculate t he value independently on different computers, and you can even choose a suitabl e time to post the values.<br><br>Finally, the late calculation of value functio n helps to separate (or decouple) logistics from financial accounting. Separatin g the calculation of value from the entry of the goods movement maintains the co nsistency between a material s total valuated stock and the data in financial acc ounting. Once you have completed the calculation of value for a material, the va luated stock corresponds with the stock situation from a logistics perspective; that is, you can reconstruct the calculation of value for a material from the pl ant stock, the storage location stock, and the special stocks.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Volume notation of foreign exchange rate</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>If you are using volume and price notation simultaneou sly, a number of new developments on the GUI help you keep track of the differen t options:<br><br>- New, user-friendly input help for exchange rates<br>- Config urable input conventions for differentiating between exchange rates quoted in te rms of price or volume<br>- Improved maintenance of exchange-rate tables<br><br> Interfaces usually provide a second exchange rate field for volume notation.</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>The use of volume notation impacts the GUI (manual ent ry and batch input), internal and external interfaces, customizing, and the stor age and retrieval of all data structures. This evolution also guarantees maximum compatibility, particularly for communication with other software. With the dual-currency phase of the European Monetary Union (EMU) now well under way, exchange rates in Europe are being increasingly used and published as volu me notations 1 rather than as price notations. Volume notation of exchange rates is already a widely used standard in countries outside Europe, such as the Unit ed States. Whether exchange rates are fixed and published as volume or price not ations depends on the respective market standard and might even depend on indiv idual business transactions.<br><br>In line with market requirements, all the fu nctions and applications of the SAP R/3 software can now handle exchange rates q uoted in terms of volumes. This was not always possible in previous SAP R/3 rele ases.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Inventory management: storekeeper's workplace</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>The functional enhancement in the transaction MIGO rep laces the following existing transactions: <br><br>- Goods issues (transaction c ode MB1A) You can now post goods issues with the transaction MIGO. All relevant goods move ments are entered on the same familiar screen. Therefore, the MIGO transaction h as changed from a goods receipt transaction to a goods movement transaction. <br >- Other goods receipts (transaction code MB1C) Use MIGO to enter other goods receipts (for example, deliveries free of charge f rom a vendor), as well as goods receipts from external procurement.<br>- Goods r eceipts for production orders (transaction code MB31) You can also use MIGO to post goods receipts for internally produced materials f rom production orders.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves efficiency and productivit y through the personalization of the information. SAP is continuing to concentrate its efforts on the requirements of the user. Th is includes the concept of a storekeeper's workplace, at which the storekeeper c an enter all store activities on a single interface that allows productivity imp rovement. <br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.6B, development focused on the transactio n of goods receipts from external procurement (transaction MIGO). With SAP R/3 r elease 4.6C, when a storekeeper calls up the transaction MIGO from his or her wo rkplace, he or she can enter other goods movements.<br><br>Until this release, y ou had to call up various transactions, each with several screens. Now everythin g is contained on one screen and in one transaction. The transaction MIGO can be adapted for each storekeeper to meet his or her specific needs. For example, if a storekeeper posts only goods issues, you can configure the transaction so tha t only the transactions relevant to this storekeeper are visible. This is consid ered as that storekeeper s personal workplace. <br><br>The integrated storekeeper 's workplace has become a reality. This development is based on the latest knowl edge from ergonomics and the experience of leading software designers, which wil l benefit all users. SAP has also given thorough consideration to the knowledge

gained from customer visits and the positive feedback received from customers wh o have been using the transaction MIGO successfully in SAP R/3 4.6B.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Invoice verification: the new generation featuring XML </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following new functions are integrated in logistic s invoice verification:<br><br>- The new logistics invoice verification design a llows you to park invoices. Therefore, you can use the preliminary posting funct ion on the familiar logistics invoice verification interface. You use preliminar y posting when you park an invoice first and then verify and post it in a second step.<br>- You can display, change, and delete parked invoice documents. You ca n choose the documents that you want to process from your personal work list. Du ring all tasks, you can display information from logistics invoice verification, such as the purchase order history, the previous processors, or notes on the in voice.<br>- Another important task is direct posting to a general ledger account , a material account, or an asset account. For example, expenses or revenue for raw materials that are not to flow into the operating results can be posted to a general ledger account.<br>- In the new logistics invoice verification design, you can manually process invoices that were verified in the background.<br><br>I mplementing logistics invoice verification has numerous benefits the functions of conventional invoice verification are integrated, many new functions are avai lable, and by using Extensible Markup Language (XML), you are on the way to a ne w generation of invoice verification functionality.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>One-invoice verification covers all functions.<br><br> With the new generation of logistics invoice verification, SAP is continuing to focus its efforts on the needs of users. In SAP R/3 release 4.6B, it redesigned the most important applications in materials management, including creating or c hanging purchase order, posting goods receipt, and entering invoice.<br><br>On t he strength of positive customer feedback, the guidelines in SAP R/3 release 4.6 B are being followed as well. The knowledge gained from numerous visits to custo mers and the expertise of our ergonomics and design specialists is being applied to the further development of logistics invoice verification. <br><br>The inten tion is to integrate more work processes into the new logistics invoice verifica tion design and cover all the functions available in conventional invoice verifi cation. This means that you no longer need to use conventional invoice verificat ion (transaction MR01) for functions not previously available in logistics invoi ce verification. You can now process all tasks in invoice verification by using the familiar single-screen transaction. The simple and intuitive navigation to a ll relevant data makes the day-to-day work in invoice verification easier. <br>< br>Extensible Markup Language (XML) enables online business transactions between different computer systems. <br><br>Increasingly, invoice verification involves processing business transactions through the Internet. XML is being used to exc hange information on the invoice documents entered or posted. <br><br>This metalanguage was specifically developed to enable the exchange of documents between different computer systems. XML is context based, easy to understand, and legibl e. It is particularly suitable for fast transmission of standardized documents, such as purchase orders or invoices. It also provides a complete, integrated, an d open environment for the invoicing process.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>A new look for purchase requisitions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The purchase requisition constitutes a single-screen t ransaction. As in the case of the purchase order, the screen consists of a numbe r of different subareas, each of which can be expanded or collapsed as needed. Y ou can maintain the necessary data on the central screen and can access all rele

vant data without laborious and time-consuming navigation. What's different about the new design? - Interaction with SAP software is easier and faster. You are spared from the te dious switching back and forth between different windows and from a considerable number of mouse clicks. - When you next log on to the SAP software (for example, the next morning), you find yourself exactly at the point you exited the application (for example, the previous evening). You don t have to enter data on an initial screen before you c an carry out a certain task. - You can access the most important functions relating to a purchase requisition from this one central screen. - You don t have to search for the requisitions you started but didn t complete t hey are immediately accessible. - If you are bothered by messages issued by the SAP software while you work on a requisition, you have the option of having them logged for consideration and an y necessary processing at some later time. - The SAP software notes your user-specific settings (for example, a certain scr een column arrangement). - Materials management purchasing is more appealing visually because of new colo r schemes and an ergonomic layout.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The revamping of the purchase requisition is a further step toward the SAP goal of presenting users with a typical procurement process for a stock material in a completely new design. SAP R/3 release 4.6B started by redesigning the most frequently used functions i n materials management: create/change purchase order, post goods receipt, post i ncoming invoice, create service master, and maintain service entry sheet. The integration of the purchase requisition was the next stage. As in the case o f the purchase order, in the redesigning of the purchase requisition, the prime focus was on the interests of users. The revamped purchase requisition has benefited from both the knowledge gained t hrough observing materials management users in everyday situations and the knowhow of experts in ergonomics and design. In addition, the materials management team took the feedback from the purchase o rder software into consideration. This indicates that SAP is on the right track: the new software is more intuitive and easier to use. The new design means that the software works the way you do, providing full support in the performance of day-to-day tasks. When working with purchase requisitions, you are presented with a screen design that is already familiar from the purchase order software. Different business tr ansactions can now be processed with a uniform user interface, which improves ef ficiency and productivity through the personalization of the information.</span> </td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cross-system flow of goods</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cross-system flow of goods covers the following scenar ios:<br><br>- Cross-system stock transfers Stock transport orders are created for the ordering plant and then transmitted t o the supplying plant. The supplying plant is located in a different component o f SAP R/3. A purchase order can contain items with plants belonging to the same company code as the supplying plant, as well as items from another company code.

<br>- Cross-system deliveries In cross-system deliveries, your plant does not deliver the desired goods. Inste ad, you pass the order on to another plant within your business group; that plan t sends the articles directly to the customer and invoices you accordingly. Cros s-system deliveries involve sales order processing in regard to goods sold from stock. There is no direct relationship between the sales order and procurement a ctivities.<br>- Batch management In cross-system flow of goods involving batch-managed materials, the batch data (and any changes made to it) is transmitted from the source system to the target system. When the batch data is distributed, the uniqueness of the data relevant to batch homogeneity (such as batch number, batch status, batch specifications) is ensured. You can create batch where-used lists in both directions by using r emote function call (bottom up in the receiving systems, top down in the distrib uting systems).<br><br>Cross-system flows facilitate the management of goods mov ements relating to sales and purchase orders within a business system group cons isting of several logical systems. The purpose of a cross-system flow of goods i s to effect a delivery for a sales or purchase order originating from another sy stem (that is, in cases in which the sales or purchase order system differs from the delivery system). You can use SAP Advanced Planning & Optimization for the global available-to-promise check.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cross-system flow of goods adds business value by acco mplishing the following:<br><br>- It supports cross-system stock transfers and c ross-system deliveries.<br>- It requires minimal entry effort to manage cross-sy stem business processes across several logical systems, clients, and company cod es. <br>- It supports all the familiar functions available for an integrated pro cess within a single system (order monitoring, purchase order monitoring, availa ble-to-promise check, document flow, and so on). <br>- It enables global availab le-to-promise checking with SAP Advanced Planning & Optimization or local availa ble-to-promise checking.<br>- It enables batch management.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Version management for purchasing documents</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>Version management creates versions of purchase requis itions, requests for quotations, purchase orders, contracts, and scheduling agre ements. (You cannot create versions of quotations or scheduling agreement delive ry schedules.)<br><br>The SAP R/3 software generates a first version when you cr eate a purchase requisition or an external purchasing document. From then on, ch anges and newly entered data are collected in the current version in each case. The software creates a new version as soon as the document has reached a final s tate. The version indicates the edition of the purchasing document and provides an overview of the various changes. (Although you can display only the current v ersion of a purchasing document at any time, you can display the "message" outp ut format of the document for an earlier version that has already been printed or transmitted.)<br><br>If you use version management, texts such as the deliver y text or the material master purchase order text are also managed within versio ns. As a result, older editions of texts are available, as well as the current t ext. You can display these texts individually and compare them. You can now also block a purchase requisition or external purchasing document from further proce ssing (for example, conversion into another document or output). Thus, for examp le, a purchase requisition item can be converted into a purchase order only when you complete the current version of the relevant item. <br><br>In procurement t ransactions, it may be necessary to distinguish between different versions of th e relevant purchasing document; for example, you may need to refer to a certain version when communicating with the vendor. A version management facility is now available in purchasing, in which the SAP R/3 software documents and administer s changes to purchase requisitions and external purchasing documents.<br><br>Ver sion management is an extension of the existing change documentation for purchas

ing documents.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Version management adds business value by accomplishin g the following:<br><br>- It enables you to check what data has been passed on t o the vendor in a document version<br>- It facilitates communication with the ve ndor<br>- It enables you to compare different editions of a text<br>- It records changes to long texts (for example, the delivery text)<br>- It makes it easier to see where changes have been made to purchase requisitions and external purcha sing documents</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order processing with radio frequency identification</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order processing with radio frequency identification ( RFID) provides comprehensive and integrated portfolio of autoidentification-enab led applications and infrastructure functions:<br><br>- Receiving and processing RFID/autoidentification data streams from readers<br>- Writing data to RFID tag s<br>- Enabling RFID data processing in shipping, receiving, and packing<br>- Ha ndling RFID automatically<br><br>RFID-enabled outbound processing provides a gen eric outbound processing solution to industries. The automatic identification de velopment enhances the efficiency and quality of outbound processing operations by enabling the following:<br><br>- Automated hands-free goods issue/loading con firmation<br>- Verification of physical goods issued against the fulfillment req uirements stipulated by the back-end software in the form of a delivery document , presenting a real-time quality control function at source for correct issuing of goods ordered<br>- Nearly instantaneous communication of pallet and case-lev el electronic product code (EPC) information to business partners and enterprise back-end software upon goods issue, which means that the roles impacted by this development extend well beyond the warehouse worker and manager: they apply to sales executives, as well as business partners<br><br>In conjunction with the SA P Event Management application, RFID-enabled outbound processing allows visibili ty at delivery and handling unit levels inside the company and also between busi ness partners.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order processing with radio frequency identification ( RFID) provides the following benefits: - It automates the identification and tracking of physical objects (pallets, goo ds, and so on).<br>- It improves transparency through real-time connection betwe en the real world and business applications to optimize all kind of activities ( supply chain, maintenance, and so on).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Purchasing agent role</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The purchasing agent role accomplishes the following: - It provides overview of the actual workload. - It provides decision support. - It executes corresponding functions such as source determination, purchase req uisition conversion, and creation of requests for quotation (RFQs). - It offers access to reporting functions.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The purchasing agent role provides these benefits: - It tion - It - It - It improves efficiency and effectiveness of purchasers through the personaliza of information, as well as a single point of entry. enhances visibility of daily issues and figures. increases speed in routine work. increases demand visibility and order responsiveness.</span></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SRM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Service procurement</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Service procurement accomplishes the following: - Request for external staff A manager can send a request to the supplier before actually ordering the servic e or external staff, and can request further information for example, on availa bility, skills information, or curriculum vitae. The request can be based on exi sting contracts.<br>- Order management This includes the standard purchase order management functionality offered by th e SAP Supplier Relationship Management application, including purchase order pro cessing and purchase order responses by the supplier, as well as monitoring<br>Confirmation and service entry Once the services have been performed, the supplier records times worked and add itional costs. These must be approved by the requesting manager.<br>- Invoice ha ndling An invoice can be sent in electronically by the supplier and must then be approv ed by the requesting manager. <br><br>This situation supports line managers or p roject managers in finding temporary staff as required. Although situations such as this were in the past routed through the procurement department with various iteration loops, procurement was in most cases not involved in line or project activities. This situation empowers the employees who have the knowledge about w hat to order or from where to source it, by providing professional sourcing func tionality together with workflow enablement to line or project managers.</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality automates the procure-to-pay busine ss scenario for temporary labor and consulting services by accomplishing the fol lowing: - It provides easy-to-use self-service for managing the procurement of external resources.<br>- It offers seamless integration of suppliers into the service pro curement process.<br>- It enhances shift operation.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SRM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Invoice Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP Invoice Management application provides a sing le point of access for all invoices. Invoices can be entered manually, through E xtensible Markup Language (XML), or through electronic data interchange (EDI). T here is also an option to receive scanned invoices based on optical character re cognition (OCR). If an error occurs when the invoice is posted, they can be view ed by various exception types and statuses with the invoice monitor software. Th e clarification of incorrect invoices is based on SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe and e-mail, which the software monitors.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The invoice management functionality provides preproce ssing of incoming invoices on top of existing invoice verification. If there are no exceptions, the invoices are automatically posted. In the case of exceptions , various workflow and monitoring activities, including notification of vendors about exceptions, are triggered and tracked. <br><br>Predefined exceptions are a s follows: - Missing or incorrect internal or external information The invoicing party or internal user can change or add missing or wrong informat ion in an Adobe interactive form. Changes are transferred into the invoice docum ent.<br>- Duplicate invoice Tthe invoicing party or internal user is asked to check whether an invoice reall

y is a duplicate. If the answer is yes, the invoice is deleted automatically. If the answer is no, the invoice can be posted automatically (if answer was sent b y internal user) or the status is updated to "in clarification (if the answer wa s sent from invoicing party). <br>- Price, quantity, or tax differences The e-mail recipient can accept or reject differences within the SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe application. If the acceptance by an e-mail recipient is suffici ent, the invoice can automatically be posted or deleted; otherwise, the answer i s recorded in the protocol.<br>- Missing goods receipt The invoice arrives before the goods receipt is posted. You can clarify with the goods receipient whether the goods already arrived at the loading ramp or ask t he supplier directly why the goods have not arrived yet.<br>- Wrong reference The e-mail recipient can correct a purchase order in the SAP Interactive Forms b y Adobe application. The new purchase order is transferred into the invoice and then posted.<br>- Invoice in approval All invoices that are awaiting approval for more than a certain number of days a re displayed.<br>- Other error This refers to other error messages.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Procurement and Logistics Execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Design collaboration with suppliers, based on cFolders </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Exchanging product documentation with suppliers and pa rtners is supported by the collaboration on product structure data (such as bill s of material or product variant structures) and product-related documents (such as technical drawings and computer-aided design models).<br><br>See also the de scription "Development collaboration with partners and suppliers (cFolders)."</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves productivity and collabora tion with partners and suppliers during the product design phase.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>MM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP role: buyer</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This role supports buyers in their day-to-day purchase s (operational procurement) as it provides for both materials and services procu rement.<br> <br>The main target group is operational buyers who are involved mos tly in ordering activities (operational procurement), as well as reporting. Targ eted purchasers may operate in several industries (cross-industry role) and buy direct materials and maintenance, repair, and operations (MROs), as well as serv ices:<br> - In work overview, you obtain an overview of your daily work. The purchasing wo rk list is the point of entry for the processing of current workflow tasks, such as the release of purchase requisitions and purchase orders or the processing o f faulty vendor confirmations. You can obtain information about forwarded workfl ow tasks and obtain an overview of the tasks you have completed. The purchasing group analysis provides an overview of the workloads of the individual buyers an d buyer groups within your enterprise. For this purpose, the software accesses e nterprise-wide consolidated data of the former SAP Business Information Warehous e component (now included in SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence). The purchasin g group analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of t he data. <br> - In transaction processing, you obtain an overview of your purchasing documents (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions). With the aid of queries, y ou can assemble your transactions to be processed in any number of work lists. Y ou therefore have the opportunity to structure and perform your daily work in ac cordance with your own needs. The integration of the SAP document storage applic ation Collaborative Folders (cFolders) allows you to display the attachments to

your purchase transactions directly in the portal.<br> - In vendor information, you obtain an overview of your vendors. You can display the contact data and partner roles of your vendors. You can use a source-of-sup ply overview to obtain an overview of the assortment of products offered by your vendors. The vendor analysis informs you of the goods supplied and services per formed by your vendors. In the process, the system accesses enterprise-wide cons olidated data stored in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component. The vendor analysis gives you the option of defining and saving your own views of the data.<br> - With information on material, you obtain an overview of your materials. You ca n display master data for, and stocks information about, your materials, or you can obtain information on the possible sources of supply of these materials. The material analysis informs you about the materials that you procured. In the pro cess, the software accesses enterprise-wide consolidated data stored in the form er SAP Business Information Warehouse component. The materials analysis gives yo u the option of defining and saving your own views of the data.<br> - With service procurement, you can perform all tasks and access all documents i nvolved in the procurement of external services. You can start the sourcing appl ication, or you can process documents of all types. Alternatively, you can open the work lists for different documents, which are based on prespecified selectio n criteria. If you know the document number, you can also open documents directl y.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables you to react to questions and problems immediately.<br>- It provide s quick access to personalized work lists.<br>- It helps you achieve analytical insight.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top></span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP role: invoicing clerk</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This role provides access to the invoice management fu nction. The main target group of this role is invoicing clerks, who are responsi ble for the incoming invoices in the logistics department. The invoice managemen t function allows the processing of incoming electronic invoices (with and witho ut purchase order reference) on an exception basis. The invoicing clerk role con tains one work center for processing invoices and monitoring the complete except ion handling process. It can be enhanced with additional work centers, especiall y in companies in which single individuals often have various different jobs. <b r> <br>In work overview, the invoicing clerk can start all tasks and get access to all documents involved in the invoice management process. He or she can searc h for related invoices and invoice exceptions. Alternatively, the clerk can crea te a document or start the related service without any previous selections.<br> The work center provides preprocessing of incoming invoices on top of existing i nvoice verification. If there are no exceptions, the invoices are automatically posted. In the case of exceptions, various workflow and monitoring activities ar e triggered and tracked, including notification of vendors about exceptions. <br > A work list enables the invoicing clerk to monitor the incoming invoices quickly and also shows all invoice exceptions. In the case of exceptions, various workf low and other activities are offered, including informing suppliers and noninvoi ce specialist users.<br> With regard to analytics, appropriate reports and queries on every work center s upport relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, su ch as excessive invoice documents or invoice document overview.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It streamlines invoice verification by delivering a high degree of process aut omation.<br>- It improves efficiency and effectiveness through the personalizati

on of the information.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top></span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP role: supplier</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This role provides suppliers with a single point of ac cess to data and transactions in the SAP Supplier Self-Service component, theref ore integrating self-service capabilities as part of the end-to-end procurement process. Extending the capabilities of SAP ERP to business partners, specifically to a co mpany s supplier base, is one of the next logical steps in the evolution of the S AP ERP application. The introduction of accessibility to information and transac tions for suppliers brings self-service functionalities to SAP ERP, which allow companies to further streamline their processes and information exchange and, th erefore, to further capitalize on their investments. Work centers support various activities associated with orders, purchase order r esponses, and invoices, as well as reporting activities. The main target group is small suppliers without their own enterprise resource p lanning (ERP) software. Usually these are small to middle-sized businesses in wh ich individual employees take on a variety of tasks. The employee working with t he supplier role accesses data in the customer s system and uses this data to sta rt both internal ands collaborative processes. - In work overview, you can start all tasks and get access to all documents invo lved in the collaboration process with your customer. You can see a status-relat ed overview of all documents, as well as incoming alerts that need your immediat e attention. - You can search for information on requests, purchase order responses, or invoi ces. The document overview provides quick access to documents, such as requests for quotation, purchase orders, shipping notifications, confirmations, goods rec eipt confirmations, and invoices. - You can create shipping notifications, confirmations, or invoices. - With administration, you can administer your company s access to the portal by requesting user access rights, and administer your own or your company s master d ata in the portal. - With regard to analytics, appropriate reports and queries on every work center support relevant user scenarios with respective business intelligence queries, such as sales value reporting or evaluations.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It improves productivity and collaboration with suppliers. - It speeds up the procurement process. - It reduces costs. - It expands value proposition by linking any kind of suppliers through appropri ate and cost effective channels.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Periodic controlling at the product level</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The order itself is relevant only in production planni ng. The costs incurred by the order are assigned directly to a product cost coll ector. This means that the costs of multiple orders are assigned to the same pro duct cost collector and settled to stock at the end of the period. <br><br>In pr oduction planning, SAP R/3 release 4.5B enables you to either create one product cost collector at the material level or separate cost collectors for each produ

ction version or for each bill of materials (BOM)/routing combination. If you cr eate one product cost collector at the material level, the costs for all product ion orders for the product are collected on one product cost collector.<br> <br> If you are manufacturing the same product through different methods, you can def ine a number of different production versions in production planning and then cr eate a separate product cost collector for each version. Creating a separate pro duct cost collector for each production version or for each BOM/routing combinat ion enables you to analyze the costs for each of the individual production metho ds. <br><br>In the production planning component, goods movements, confirmations , and so on are entered with reference to the order. The costs that arise from t hese transactions are shown on the product cost collector. Instead of the postin gs' being made with each transaction, they can be accumulated and made later.<br ><br>You can also use the product-cost-by-period functions with sales order relat ed production in conjunction with repetitive manufacturing. This is recommended in sales order related production when the focus is on the cost of the product an d not on the cost of the individual sales orders, such as in mass production env ironments on the basis of sales orders. A requirement for the use of product cos t collectors in sales order related production is that the sales order stock is v aluated. <br><br>The product-cost-by-period component with product cost collecto rs provides the following benefits:<br><br>- A focus on the product as the cost object <br>- Improved performance in the calculation of work in process, in calc ulation of variances, and in reporting, as a result of the reduced number of cos t objects <br>- The same procedure for all types of production in cost object co ntrolling, all costs being planned with the standard cost estimate for the mater ial<br>- Fewer cost objects to be processed at the end of the period, the activi ties at period-end closing being identical for all types of production</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>The new functions for periodic controlling at the prod uct level enable the production planning functions to be separated from the cost object controlling functions. In production planning, you continue to use produ ction orders, run schedule headers, and process orders in the SAP R/3 software. However, the costs incurred during production are assigned to a product cost col lector rather than to the individual orders. The cost object, rather than the in dividual production order, is therefore the product itself.<br><br>The productio n planning functions (availability check, scheduling, order release, status mana gement, and so on) are still performed with reference to the order. However, the cost object controlling functions are performed separately for each product, an d the target costs, actual costs, work in process, and variances for the product are reported separately for each period. This streamlines the cost management a ctivities for all types of production and places the focus on the product costs rather than on the order costs.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product cost controlling in the production process ind ustries</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the following functions are a vailable for campaign management in cost object controlling:<br><br>- The alloca tion of the fixed costs of campaigns (such as setup costs, cleanout costs, and t eardown costs) to the cost origins (plant materials within the campaign) <br>- P reliminary costing for the entire production campaign, by summarizing the prelim inary cost estimates of all the planned and process orders in the campaign <br>Comparison of target and actual campaign costs, or of planned and actual costs, in a cost report, and the analysis of information relating to the process order s with and without materials <br><br>You can calculate the costs for the complet e production campaign and the related individual orders. Also, you can perform p reliminary costing and final costing; enter actual costs; calculate work in proc ess and variances for process orders and campaign service orders in a production campaign; and display these in reporting.<br><br>To cost production campaigns,

you require activity-based costing.<br> <br>In joint production, the actual cost s are reported for the process material, or for the leading primary product. The refore, before variances are calculated, the actual costs have to be distributed to the coproducts or to the items of the production order or process. This dist ribution is performed before variance calculation in accordance with the distrib ution rules specified.<br><br>The calculation of variances for coproducts is per formed on the order items, because goods receipts and the calculation of target costs are also involved. The work in process for actual costs is also calculated on the order items. You can calculate variances on order items either cumulativ ely or by period. <br><br>The variances calculated on the coproducts can be disp layed in summarized form in reporting. After variance calculation, the order ite ms are settled to inventory and in profitability analysis costing recursive stru ctures.<br><br>You can cost recursive structures for separate materials (cost es timate with quantity structure) and for multiple materials (costing run).<br><br >The materials to be costed are determined by selection and, if necessary, by "e xploding" the bill of materials (BOM) in the costing run or by exploding the BOM automatically within the material cost estimate with quantity structure. The sy stem then searches for cycles and allocates costing levels. In doing so, the sys tem does not interpret the recursivity indicator from the BOM; instead, it valua tes the cost estimates that were previously created.<br><br>Materials in one cyc le, or intercycle materials, are costed iteratively. Iteration ends when the con vergence criterion Total of all price changes equals zero is reached.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>This functionality results in improved cost control in the process industry.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Profitability analysis based on transfer prices</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can customize profitabili ty analysis so that the profit center view is stored along with the legal view. The prerequisite for this is that you use transfer prices and thus multiple val uation approaches in your financials applications.<br><br>These settings change the way data is updated in profitability analysis:<br><br>- External billing do cuments are valuated from both viewpoints and stored in parallel in the database . <br>- Internal transfers of goods and services are passed to profitability ana lysis in real time and valuated there from the profit center view. <br>- Interna l orders, sales orders, and projects are valuated from both the legal and profit center viewpoints when they are transferred to profitability analysis. <br><br> The same applies for production orders: the production variances are calculated from both the legal and profit center viewpoints when they are transferred to pr ofitability analysis. <br><br>The only exception is the transfer of overhead fro m cost center accounting. The influence of transfer prices on this overhead is s een as negligible. Consequently, the period costs are calculated only through th e approach you defined as your operational valuation approach in controlling, an d then they are passed on to profitability analysis. <br><br>In the information system, you can choose whether you want to analyze your data from the legal or p rofit center viewpoint.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B offers you extended analysis poss ibilities for profit centers (in addition to the legal viewpoint) in profitabili ty analysis. You can analyze the profitability of your products from the legal a nd individual profit centers viewpoint concurrently. Until this release, profitability analysis represented external sales with custo mers outside the group and other companies within the group. Consequently, only the external sales could be analyzed. These sales were valuated with the cost of goods manufactured from a legal or group standpoint.<br><br>Although all these external sales are reflected as sales for the responsible profit center, many pr

ofit center managers want to go beyond this view. This is particularly the case with managers who utilize transfer pricing to manage their profit centers like i ndependent companies.<br><br>To analyze profit centers correctly in this environ ment, you need to see not only external sales but also internal sales between pr ofit centers (exchanges of goods, goods issues and receipts in stock, and so on) . Moreover, it may be necessary to valuate these external and internal sales wit h valuation approaches other than the legal one (for example, costs of goods man ufactured on the basis of transfer prices).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Sample operating concerns</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B provides all the technical prereq uisites so that you can define your own operating concern on the basis of an exi sting one. The sample operating concerns include the following:<br><br>- Sample data structures, including characteristics and value fields <br>- Sample customi zing objects such as planning layouts, forms, and reports<br><br>The standard op erating systems are defined technically as SAP-owned operating concerns. This me ans that all the objects belonging to these operating concerns (data structures, data elements, domains, check tables, and so on) have names that lie in a range reserved for SAP. These standard objects may be modified or enhanced by SAP any time you upgrade your system with a new release.<br><br>Using these SAP operati ng concerns, you can set up functional demonstrations with just a few additional settings. This means that you can quickly get a first look at the functions and possibilities that profitability analysis offers.<br><br>When you want to set u p profitability analysis before going live, you can copy these samples to create your own operating concerns and then adapt them to meet your organization s requ irements.<br><br>In additional projects, SAP is defining further sample operatin g concerns designed to meet the needs of specific industries. These sample opera ting concerns are contained either in the standard SAP R/3 software or in SAP in dustry solutions to provide you with an operating concern that meets your needs or with ideas on how you can structure your operating concern. This development reduces considerably the number of customizing steps that you need to carry out to implement profitability analysis, and thus it reduces costs as well.</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B provides you with tools that enab le you to copy fully customized operating concerns as templates for your own ope rating concern. These examples include general examples in the standard software for use in any industry, as well as industry-specific proposals. A good portion of the time required to implement profitability analysis is spent trying to decide which characteristics (objects for analysis) and value fields (analyzed figures) the organization needs to define in order to meet its informa tion requirements. This decision is usually a protracted process because differe nt departments must be involved and must reach a consensus on how to define the objects of analysis (product groups, distribution channels, or strategic busines s units).<br><br>Although you cannot avoid going through this process if you wan t to be successful, you can now accelerate it by benefiting from the wealth of k nowledge gained by other customers of profitability analysis.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Implementation support functions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B lets you more easily define the f ollowing characteristics:<br><br>- Product hierarchy Until this release, it was difficult to use the multileveled product hierarchy s tored in material masters as a profitability analysis characteristic because you needed to define each level as a separate user-defined characteristic in profit

ability analysis. In SAP R/3 4.5B, you can reference these levels of the product hierarchy directly. Consequently, derivation and validity checks are carried ou t automatically. <br>- Region Until this release, the region characteristic from the customer master table cou ld not be used in an integrated way because of its technical attributes, and thu s additional customizing steps were required. In SAP R/3 4.5B, you can also refe rence this characteristic directly from the customer master table. The software thus also automatically checks validity and derives characteristic values. <br>< br>In SAP R/3 4.5B, the customizing monitor provides you with a complete overvie w of all the value flows that lead into profitability analysis and thus makes it easier to evaluate the customizing settings already made. This feature includes the following possibilities:<br><br>- You can formally check your customizing s ettings to try to detect errors early. These errors can result from incomplete o r inconsistent customizing settings. <br>- You can analyze individual value fiel ds to determine which value flows fill them (such as billing document transfers) and how they do so (original condition type or cost element). This gives you an overall view of the settings you make. <br><br>In addition, you can use valuati on analysis to obtain an overview of how values are calculated in valuation. Bot h these functions give you a complete view of the business processes that affect the results you see in your profitability reports.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B helps you reduce the time and wor k needed to implement the system with functions that simplify and automate the a bove steps. One of these functions makes it easier to define various characteris tics. In addition, the new customizing monitor gives you a complete overview of different value flows that lead into profitability analysis. When you implement profitability analysis, you first need to define the data str uctures in profitability analysis by selecting the analysis characteristics and the value fields that you want to use to meet your organization s information req uirements and aims. Then you define the value flows relevant for your organizati on s processes, so that the business transactions that are relevant for profitabi lity can be reflected correctly in the value fields in profitability analysis.<b r><br>You can simplify implementation even further by copying the sample operati ng systems delivered with the standard SAP R/3 software. This idea is explained in "Sample Operating Concerns" in Development News.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Allocation structure</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can use an allocation str ucture (similar to the settlement structure for internal orders) to determine wh ich cost elements to assign to which assessment cost elements. With the allocati on structure, you can assign individual cost elements, cost element intervals, o r cost element groups to an assessment cost element. You can save the allocation structure in segment maintenance and thus avoid the need to create segments sim ply to document the composition of costs.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is easy to maintain and entails sho rter running times. To allocate costs, you must choose between distribution and assessment. In distr ibution, you assign primary costs by using the original cost element, and the re ceiver information thus includes the breakdown of the debited costs. In assessme nt, in contrast, you gather all the cost elements in a single assessment cost el ement, and the receiver thereby loses the cost breakdown information.<br><br>Som e users wanted to retain the cost composition information in a summarized form. Until this release, to do so, they needed to create a great number of segments, all with the same senders and receivers, that classified the assignments of the allocation cost elements to the assessment cost elements. Not only was this diff icult to maintain but also lengthy running times resulted, their length in direc

t proportion to the number of segments.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Business process allocation on service orders</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use these functions to assign business process costs to service orders, in addition to material costs and internal activities. This allows activity quantity oriented allocation of overhead on service orders with the use of the relevant processes. With the aid of the process template, yo u can assign service-related overhead on the basis of the utilization of specifi c overhead business processes by the relevant cost objects.<br><br>For example, you can identify the business processes required to complete a service action st arted by a service order, such as customer callback or creation of a cost estima te.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can use the process templ ate to allocate business process costs on service orders as part of product cost ing. Previously, the process template applied only to the following cost objects :<br><br>- Production order <br>- Run schedule header <br>- Internal order <br>Sales order <br>- Work breakdown structure element network <br>- General cost object</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cumulative assessment distribution and periodic repost ing in actual</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cumulative processing includes the following subfuncti ons:<br><br>- Cycle processing You determine in the cycle header during cycle maintenance, regardless of whethe r it runs on a cumulative basis.<br>- Cycle execution When you start a cycle with the indicator for cumulative processing active, the SAP R/3 software allocates the posted sender amounts up to and including the cur rent period on the basis of the tracing factors accumulated since the first peri od. The amounts to be allocated are also accumulated. The difference between the accumulated amount and the amounts posted in previous periods is posted in the current period. The postings in previous periods remain unchanged.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The cumulative approach averages the allocations for a ll periods involved. Assessments, distributions, and periodic repostings typically take place as part of a period-based approach; that is, the values posted on a sender in a given p eriod are allocated on the basis of the tracing factors applying to that period. <br><br>If the tracing factors or the amounts allocated by the sender are subjec t to large fluctuations, period-based processing cannot guarantee correct, origi n-appropriate assignments of allocated costs. However, cumulative processing of tracing factors and sender values can smooth out these fluctuations.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Formula planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Formula planning consists of two components:<br><br>Co mponent 1 allows you to define the formulas to be valuated in a planning structu re. SAP R/3 makes row-for-row calculations for a single object (a cost element, statistical key figure, or calculation row) by connecting functions that read pl an values with simple formulas. Using subtotals (with the aid of calculation row s), you can create formulas of any complexity. Also, you can define activation c onditions to evaluate if-then queries in the formulas. You maintain the planning

structure as part of customizing. <br><br>Component 2 allows you to valuate the one or more planning structures assigned to a cost center or a cost center grou p. For each corresponding cost center, the SAP R/3 software evaluates each row i n the planning structure. If the object is a cost element or statistical key fig ure, the software creates a plan posting on the cost center for the cost element or key figure.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With formula planning, you can plan transaction data a utomatically for cost centers on the basis of formulaic relationships. You save these relationships in planning structures independent of cost centers, so you c an use the same formulas for structurally similar cost centers. Initially, you c an plan only primary cost elements and statistical key figures. These can be bas ed on any existing values, as required.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New functions in the information system</span></td> <tl , din ae lii gt ne =m ls efi tnvp ar lo if gi nt =a tb oi pl >i Wt iy than ra el gy as ri dstn oor lm ia nl el -y itc eo mnt ba i sn edad rd ei pt oi ro tn sal information t hat is often used for special types of analysis. Up to now, you could analyze th is information only by using the functions of line-item reporting, which is rela tively limited in its navigation functions.<br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can define costing-based profitability analysis reports that are based on line i tems and thus obtain all the additional information available in the line items (such as the sales campaign number, promotion number, and sender cost center). T his has the following advantages:<br><br>- You can use the familiar navigation a nd analysis functions of drill-down reporting to analyze your line items. These functions include drilling down through characteristics of the line item and the use of key figure schemes to display contribution margins in your report. <br>Because these reports are based on the characteristics in the line items, you c an also analyze your data according to the organizational structure that applied when the line item was posted. The other reports are still displayed on the bas is of the current structure, with all realignments taken into account. This new function offers you both views of your profitability data. Whereas your other re ports show the data according to the most current hierarchies, your "line-item ba sed reports" show the data according to past hierarchies ("as posted"). This fun ction is available for line items that are posted from SAP R/3 4.5B onward. <br> - In customizing, you need to define special forms and reports for this type of reporting. In a future release, it will be possible to use summarization levels and the report/report interface for these reports as well. <br><br>Options for s electing report data are enhanced. Until now, you could enter either a single va lue or an interval as selection criteria for one characteristic. In SAP R/3 4.5B , you can also use multiple values as well as multiple intervals for a character istic. <br><br>With regard to attributes in lead columns, until now, you could c hoose whether you wanted to see the key and/or text of the respective characteri stic value in each line of the lead column in your drilldown lists. In SAP R/3 4 .5B, you can also choose to display so-called attributes.<br><br>With this funct ion, you can select additional information from the master data tables and displ ay this in the lead columns. This new function is not limited to drill-down list s. You can also display a new dialog box containing all the attributes for a cha racteristic in the detail list.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>These new functions enhance reporting capabilities and provide more flexibility.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Application link enabling for internal orders</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>The software in which an internal order is created is described as the home software. From here, the order master data can be distribu

ted to any other software, as required.<br><br>Changes to the order master data are made in the home software, but the order can be displayed in all other softw are in which the order exists.<br><br>Planning and budgeting are performed in th e home software of the order.<br><br>Primary postings from other SAP R/3 compone nts, such as financial accounting or materials management, as well as allocation s within controlling, can be assigned to an account in any software in which the order exists. For postings not made in the home software, the software, through application link enabling (ALE), passes on the appropriate controlling document rows to the home software of the order. This ensures that the complete data is available in the home software for evaluations entailing the use of reporting.</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Many corporations are subdivided organizationally or p hysically into relatively independent smaller units (for example, plants or prof it centers). Not all data in these organizational units, however, is of interest in detailed form for the central management control. In centralized data proces sing software, these organizational units compete with each other for the same d atabase resources.<br><br>The application link enabling (ALE) concept enables a c ontrolled, business-oriented exchange of information between distributed, loosel y connected systems running SAP R/3 software.<br><br>In the controlling componen t in SAP R/3, internal orders can now be distributed on different systems runnin g SAP R/3 software.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collective orders in cost object controlling</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>In make-to-stock production, and in sales order related production with a valuated sales order stock, the software generates a settleme nt rule with the receiver material for each order in a collective order. <br><br >A goods receipt and a goods issue are posted simultaneously between the levels of a collective order. This means that all production orders in a collective ord er deliver to stock. The higher level order withdraws the goods from stock at th e same time that the goods receipt is produced. The lower level production order is credited by the goods receipt and the higher level order is debited, in acco rdance with the price control of the material that was withdrawn from stock. As a result, each production order carries the total production costs of a given ma nufacturing level.<br><br>This enables the following functions at each manufactu ring level:<br><br>- Calculation of work in process <br>- Reliable variance calc ulation <br>- Settlement of price differences to the financial accounting compon ent</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3, a collective order represents a logistical link between planned orders, production orders, or process orders across manufa cturing levels.<br><br>Integrated processing of collective orders in controlling is possible from SAP R/3 release 4.5B. This means that all functions of product cost controlling are now available for collective orders (for example, those yo u already use with make-to-stock production and sales order related production wi th a valuated sales order stock but without collective orders).<br><br>You can u tilize the following functions for collective orders from SAP R/3 4.5B:<br><br>Calculation and settlement of work in process, by using the standard procedures in the period-end closing process of cost object controlling <br>- Periodic set tlement of the orders that are part of a collective order, including calculation of work in process at target costs <br>- Cumulative or periodic variance calcul ation, by using the standard procedures in the period-end closing activities of cost object controlling for all production orders that are part of a collective order and that deliver to the normal warehouse stock or to a valuated sales orde r stock <br>- Settlement of the variances to the profitability analysis componen t <br><br>A hierarchy report for collective orders is now available that shows y ou the total planned costs, the total target costs, and the total actual costs f or each collective order level, which also enables you to access detailed report

s for the individual orders.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhanced integration of activity-based costing and act ivity quantity calculation with profitability analysis</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Indirect allocation of internal activities and busines s processes is now possible. SAP R/3 release 4.5B supports indirect activity all ocation to the profitability analysis component by using activity quantities fro m business processes and internal activities, valuated with prices. The existing activity quantity and valuation information in the profitability analysis compo nent serves as the basis for tracing factors.<br><br>In this way, you can debit profitability segments with costs that you can then display in the corresponding reports as part of a detailed contribution margin analysis. This indirect alloc ation function is available for actual postings and (potentially) for planning.< br><br>Activity allocation through the process template is also now possible. Yo u can use the process template to determine the utilization of business processe s by profitability segments, to valuate quantities consumption, and to post the results on the corresponding segments. To do so, you assign process templates to the relevant segments. In the templates, you can calculate the consumption of a ctivity quantities by creating formulas that use the existing information from t he profitability analysis component. This profitability segment information typi cally comes from external sources through data transfers or from internal source s through the logistics information system. You can valuate the process quantiti es with prices and debit them as process costs on the profitability segments.</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP R/3 software includes enhancements in the allo cation techniques used to assign costs and activity quantities from cost centers or business processes to the profitability analysis component.<br><br>Previousl y, the following activities were possible:<br><br>- Assigning cost center and bu siness process costs to profitability segments by using assessment<br>- Assignin g business process or cost center activity quantities to profitability segments by using manual postings <br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the integration of the overhead cost controlling component and the profitability analysis component is enhanced with the following allocation techniques:<br><br>- Indirect allocation of business process and cost center activity quantities with tracing factors <b r>- Calculation of process utilization by profitability segments and posting of the relevant activity quantities and costs <br><br>Whereas traditional cost acco unting approaches spread overhead costs by using machine hours or equivalent ove rhead rates, activity-based costing and activity quantity calculations allow you to assign business processes and activities on the basis of the demand from cos t objects or profitability segments. The integrated SAP R/3 software allows you to determine real-time consumption on the basis of the current cost drivers for example, the number of purchase orders or sales orders processed.<br><br>Produc tion-related overhead flows into the relevant valuations of cost of products man ufactured. You can assign other business processes (for example, sales processes ) directly to profitability analysis (for example, analysis of customer groups). <br><br>Although SAP R/3 already offered cost objects in production areas to whi ch you could settle business process costs by using the process template (for ex ample, production or internal orders), this was not the case in service areas. I n SAP R/3 4.5B, you can allocate business process costs to a profitability segme nt and thereby to the profitability analysis component. You can use the activity quantities from business processes, calculated on the basis of the relevant cos t driver information, to determine the resource consumption inversely (using, fo r example, structured processes) back to the cost center level.<br><br>This ensu res an uninterrupted quantity and value flow for service providers as well, star ting with cost elements and continuing through cost centers and business process to profitability segments and profitability analysis.<br><br>With the aid of th e profitability analysis component, you can display the chain of business proces

ses and internal activities for individual products, customer groups, or other s egments. This allows you to identify and judge even the profitability segments t hat (for whatever reason) require a great deal of administrative effort for exa mple, complex products or small purchase order quantities.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in integrated planning<br><br></span></td > <td align=left valign=top>Integrated transfer of order and project plans to prof itability analysis is now possible. Until this release, you could use the assess ment functions to transfer planned period costs to different areas of your organ ization in your sales and profit plan. It was not possible to transfer plan data from orders or projects to the profitability analysis component.<br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, a function similar to the function for settling actual data no w lets you settle plan data from orders to profitability analysis. As with actua l data, a settlement rule determines the assignment of this plan data to profita bility segments, and a profitability analysis transfer structure determines the assignment of the cost elements to your value fields.<br><br>Integrated transfer of sales and profit plans to profit center accounting is also now possible. man y companies use both profitability analysis and profit center accounting concurr ently. They use profit center accounting as a profitability-controlling instrume nt for internal areas of responsibility, while planning and calculating their re sults from a sales-oriented view by profitability segments in the profitability analysis component.<br><br>In SAP R/3 4.5B, you can transfer your sales and prof it plans from profitability analysis automatically to profit center accounting. In profitability analysis, you can use characteristic derivation to assign your profit plans for profitability segments, such as individual customers or product s, automatically to a profit center. By assigning your value fields to cost and revenue elements, you can have the system transfer this plan data automatically to profit center accounting.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the following new functions a re available in profitability analysis to support integrated planning:<br><br>Integrated transfer of order and project plans to the profitability analysis com ponent <br>- Integrated transfer of sales and profit plans to the profit center accounting component</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in the time sheet</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Developments in the cost accounting area include the f ollowing: <br><br>- Assigning personnel costs In addition to the current option of posting working times assigned to a control ling object (for example, an order or a project) as costs by using an activity a llocation in the controlling component, you can transfer the working times toget her with their controlling object assignment to human resources. The working tim es are then available in the payroll accounting functionality, which then determ ines the proportionate personnel costs according to customer-specific regulation s. The personnel costs are debited to the controlling object as primary costs.<b r>- Taking account of the master cost center Employees have a master cost center that is debited with their personnel costs a nd for which they perform work. The work performed is settled in controlling, an d the master cost center is credited again. This process enables you to trace an d analyze costs. If an employee performs work for another cost center (either as an exception or regularly) and the other cost center is credited for his or her work in controlling, the master and other cost center are unbalanced. However, this imbalance is settled automatically if you record the data on the time sheet and either assign the employee to the other cost center or carry out an activit

y allocation from the master cost center to the other cost center.<br>- Distribu ting the time sheet and the human resources functionality: Distributing the time sheet and human resources in different SAP R/3 software sy stems not only ensures a better performance of the global system but also allows you to have a separate human resources system in which you can store confidenti al personal data (for example, information on employees' salaries). You do not n eed this information to implement the time sheet. The distribution is performed through application link enabling (ALE) and BAPI technologies. A synchronous lin k to the human resources system allows you to use all the time sheet functions. Even during human resources system downtimes, asynchronous linking techniques al low you to use the time sheet with reduced functionality.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use the cross-application time sheet component for standardized, cross-application time recording. The following major develop ments are new in SAP R/3 release 4.5B: <br><br>- Developments in the cost accoun ting area allow you greater control over recorded working times. With this aim i n view, methods that include data and functionality from the human resources sys tem, particularly the payroll accounting component, are supported. <br>- You can distribute the time sheet component and the human resources system in different systems running SAP R/3 software. This allows you to divide the global software into one part human resources and another part that includes logistics, account ing, and the time sheet for example, to protect confidential personal data. If you want to record times only for human resources, you can use the time sheet in stand-alone human resources software without any further components.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multilevel actual costing for materials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multilevel material settlement is performed each posti ng period after single-level material settlement. Using multilevel material sett lement, you can assign follow-up costs to the semifinished and finished products . The software calculates the actual costs over multiple manufacturing levels wi th the information from the actual quantity structure, which is updated with eac h particular posting.<br><br>After a posting period is closed, the price differe nces and exchange rate differences from the valuation price are dealt with throu gh single-level material settlement. Next, with the help of the actual quantity structure, the differences that are allocated to the consumption of a material a re passed on to the materials in the higher manufacturing levels.<br><br>Multile vel material settlement results in actual prices that you can analyze. Subsequen tly, upon closing entries, you can perform a multilevel resolution of price diff erences on the basis of these actual costs. You can then use these actual costs to revaluate the ending inventory of all materials.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multilevel actual costing solves the problem of incurr ing follow-up costs for raw materials, finished products, and semifinished produ cts within the context of the actual costing/material ledger component. Follow-u p costs occur when the quantity of a material consumed is entered into the softw are before the associated actual costs are known. Therefore, the finished good i s valuated through the temporary valuations of the raw materials and semifinishe d goods that it contains.<br><br>The goal of multilevel actual costing is to ass ign (for each period) the difference between the actual cost and the valuation p rice of a material to the respective inventories and consumption over multiple m anufacturing levels.<br><br>With multilevel actual costing, you can carry the va lues in multiple currencies. The conversion takes place at historical exchange r ates.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mixed costing</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>To perform mixed costing, you need to define different procurement alternatives for each plant material. You can define equivalence nu mbers for each procurement alternative. You perform both these actions manually. <br><br>The procurement alternatives are read and costed. These cost estimates a re then mixed according to the mixing ratio for the procurement alternatives.<br ><br>You can create multiple mixed cost estimates for one material. Costing vers ions differentiate the individual mixed cost estimates for a material.<br><br>Fo r all mixed cost estimates, there is a cost component split, a special type of i temization, and a costed multilevel bill of materials (BOM). Each line of the it emization corresponds to a procurement alternative with the equivalence number w ith which the procurement alternative is weighted. You can transfer the cost com ponent split for the mixed cost estimate to the profitability analysis component .<br><br>Mixed costing enables the standard price to be updated. It can be used for the inventory valuation of materials with standard price control with the mi xed price. <br><br>You can also calculate mixed price variances between the stan dard price obtained from mixed costing and the price calculated for the procurem ent alternative. The mixed price variance is a separate variance category of the output side of a production order or process. The calculation of target costs a nd target credit is based on the cost estimate created for the respective procur ement alternative. The actual credit of the order is calculated with the standar d price from the mixed cost estimate. <br><br>The mixed price variance is calcul ated from the difference between the target credit based on the mixed cost estim ate and the target credit based on the procurement alternative.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The result of this functionality is a mixed-cost estim ate that can be used to update the standard price. In manufacturing companies, materials are often manufactured through different p roduction alternatives or procured from difference sources. In estimating the co st of these procurement versions, different costs of goods manufactured or diffe rent purchase prices are calculated. However, to valuate inventories in the comp any, it is necessary to have a standard price for the material.<br><br>Establish ing the standard price simply by costing one of the procurement versions is not a satisfactory solution. Instead, it should be possible to calculate a mixed pri ce. In mixed costing, the mixed price is obtained by applying weighting factors to each of the cost estimates and adjusting the results of these cost estimates to a single costing lot size.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integration of Microsoft Excel in planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>When you call up sales and profit planning, you can de fine in your planner profile whether you want to enter your plan data in a tradi tional planning layout as before or in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. If you cho ose the latter, the SAP R/3 software integrates this Excel spreadsheet directly in the user interface of SAP R/3 (the GUI).<br><br>You can define an Excel maste r spreadsheet in the customizing component to determine the layout of this sprea dsheet. This master spreadsheet forms the link to your plan data in probability analysis and can contain special formatting, graphics, or other macros.<br><br>O nce your plan data appears on the screen, you can process it by using both the p lanning functions of profitability analysis and the flexible functions of Micros oft Excel. Moreover, you can save the planning documents that you process withg Excel on your local hard drive, and you can process them again later there by us ing Excel. Once you have finished entering that plan data, you can then upload i t into the SAP R/3 software by using the flexible upload functions and then proc ess the data further by using the functions of profitability analysis planning.< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B helps you enjoy the advantages of centralized profit planning without sacrificing the freedom in planning offered by Microsoft Excel. You can now use Excel, integrated with sales and profit pla

nning. You can enter your plan data in Excel, display it with Excel s graphic fun ctions, use your plan data to calculate additional values, and perform more acti vities with Excel. When it comes to saving, merging, and valuating this data, yo u still have the powerful functions of a centralized planning tool at your dispo sal. Many companies are torn between the flexibility of PC-supported and decentralize d planning tools such as Microsoft Excel and central control in the form of fixe d planning screens and limited authorizations.<br><br>Despite all the limitation s that come with centralized planning, experience has shown that very few custom ers are willing to sacrifice central authorization control, common master data, and valuation guidelines for large-scale planning activities..</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Event planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can use "events" in plann ing. Events are one-time occurrences that influence sales figures over a limited period of time, such as a promotional campaign. In planning, you can take into account the effects of these events on your values and quantities.<br><br>To do so, you define assumptions in your software regarding the duration and effect of these events in a revaluation factor that is valid for a certain period of time . You can define and apply these events to individual profitability segments.<br ><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can assign all your planning aids to specific profitability segments or to combinations of characteristic values. This option is available for the following planning aids:<br><br>- Revaluation factors <br>Distribution keys <br>- Forecast profiles <br>- Events</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function entails new planning aids. Until this release, special planning functions such as revaluation factors, fore cast profiles, and distribution keys have been available in sales and profit pla nning. These planning aids let you make assumptions (regarding price increases o r sales trends, for example) in manual or automatic planning, and then automatic ally apply these assumptions to your plan.<br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the f ollowing new planning aids have been added:<br><br>- Events or time-dependent re valuation factors that represent how planning is influenced over time <br>- Plan ning aids assigned to characteristics (revaluation factors, forecast profiles, a nd so on) that are applied to a specific profitability segment; this function is available in both online planning and automatic planning</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Natural language retrievel for reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>All information needed for the retrieval process is ac quired automatically:<br><br>- The retrieval function can handle more than keywo rds it allows for grammatically incorrect statements.<br>- Wildcards, logical o perators, and brackets are not necessary.<br>- The results are displayed in rank ed hit lists, according to the importance of the documents (or parts of document s).<br>- Most Indo-European based languages can be used for example, English, Ge rman, French, and Russian (Finnish and Hungarian are not supported).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP R/3 software contains a large number of report s. As a user, you can ask yourself the following questions:<br><br>- Which repor t best meets my requirements?<br>- Which reports interest me?<br><br>The new ret rieval function answers these questions. You enter a question in your own langua ge on the keyboard. The search function then scans the report tree documentation and returns passages that correspond to your question. You can also call up the reports directly. All information needed for the retrieval process is acquired automatically.</span></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New user interface for cost center hierarchy</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>A new GUI is being developed for the cost center stand ard hierarchy. The following functional enhancements are planned:<br><br>- Hiera rchy display through use of tree controls<br>- Hierarchy maintenance through use of the drag-and-drop action<br>- Faster initial access for hierarchy maintenanc e (this is achieved by the read-on-demand technique for navigating in the hierar chy; lower level hierarchy areas are imported from the database only on request) <br>- Customizable additional columns (available master data can be displayed as additional columns during hierarchy maintenance)<br>- Direct maintenance of cos t center master data in hierarchy maintenance<br> You can still use the list-based maintenance of the cost center standard hierarc hy.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Simplification of hierarchy maintenance through the dr ag-and-drop function enables the following: - Clearer structuring of the cost center standard hierarchy through tree control - More flexible, user-specific display of hierarchy maintenance</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Schedule manager</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The schedule manager enables the following activities: <br><br>- Definition of complex procedures<br>- Scheduling of procedures<br>- Ex ecution of procedures<br>- Checking of results - Easier location of errors<br>- Efficient postprocessing of objects with errors , through work lists<br><br>Complex procedures are displayed in the software and are accelerated. Several typical procedures are defaulted for customers.</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>This function simplifies the execution of periodical p rocesses by scheduling procedures with certain tasks. In accounting, there are tasks that occur periodically (for example, monthly, we ekly, or daily). Such tasks can contain many objects that need processing. These tasks (for example, period-end closing in cost center accounting) must be execu ted in a certain order and at certain times.<br><br>Until this release, you were supported in only one activity when executing these tasks. You had to manually call up several transactions to schedule activities, check result lists, perform error analysis, and perform postprocessing of objects with errors.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Activity-based costing interface: easier modeling and simulation for activity-based costing projects</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are supported by new interface s in the BAPI programming interface:<br><br>- Reading master data of cost center s and activity types<br>- Reading planned quantities and prices of cost center/a ctivity types<br>- Reading and creating master data from business processes<br>Planning quantities and prices for cost center/activity types and processes<br> - Direct activity allocation from cost center/activity types and processes<br>Creating a simple process template for structured processes<br><br>The new inter faces support the following functions:<br><br>- Creating master data from cost e lements, cost centers, and activity types<br>- Creating and reading group data f or cost elements, cost centers, activity types, and processes<br>- Creating and

reading master data from statistical key figures<br>- Planning primary costs and statistical key figures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The activity-based costing interface allows external a pplications to exchange data that is relevant to process costing with SAP R/3. B y allowing you to model and simulate with activity-based costing outside the sof tware, SAP R/3 facilitates the use of activity-based costing.<br><br>Using PC-ba sed tools, you can build activity-based costing models easily, even before SAP R /3 implementation begins. You can experiment with your model until it is ready f or uploading to the SAP R/3 software.<br><br>The new interface consists of sever al interfaces that provide the necessary functions and information. Support for the interface with PC-based tools is certified through the complementary softwar e program that authorizes the use of the corresponding logos.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Activity-based costing component usability enhancement s</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Until this release, function trees and environments, i ncluding the environment functions, were maintained in separate transactions. Yo u can now complete all jobs in one transaction. <br><br>New techniques, such as context menus, drag-and-drop, hierarchical tree structures, and split windows, m ake it easier for you to create, change, and display the following:<br><br>- Fun ction trees<br>- Environments<br>- Environment functions<br><br>Thus, all releva nt data is displayed.<br><br>To provide critical information quickly, the softwa re displays all function trees when the new transaction is called up. Each funct ion tree appears structured according to the respective environment. However, if you do not want to see the complete set of function trees, you can select the d ata shown in a display options screen.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>On the basis of customer feedback and SAP's research, the activity-based costing component is redesigned to be easier and more intuiti ve to use. Functions are more focused on tasks, and the operating method better reflects how users work.<br><br>These improvements affect the following projects :<br><br>- Newly designed function tree maintenance<br>- Modeling and simulating of activity-based costing projects facilitated by the activity-based costing in terface</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements in actual costing/material ledg er</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements are in the following areas:<br><br>- Mult ilevel costing<br> > The costing cockpit is a new tool that lets you perform a nd monitor the steps of the costing run.<br> > The same tool is used in the pr oduct cost planning component. The costing cockpit can be used on its own or in combination with the schedule manager. The schedule manager schedules and monito rs period-end activities in financial applications.<br> > The costing run no l onger requires a costing run profile. You can use the general data from a previo us costing run.<br> > You can analyze the steps of the costing run in an inter active hierarchy.<br> > There are functions for parallel processing and archiv ing costing runs.<br>- Analysis and reporting functions<br> > SAP offers a mod ern, interactive interface for the analysis of material ledger data and document s.<br> > There are new reports such as the purchase order history and the mate rial price history in multiple currencies.<br> > Data extraction for the forme r SAP Business Information Warehouse component, whose functionality is now part of SAP NetWeaver, is supported.<br> > Multilevel drill-down reporting is possi ble.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The actual costing/material ledger component is being updated to improve usability.</span></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Primary costs in business processes</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Recording primary costs directly to a business process has the following advantages:<br><br>- You can allocate actual bookings of fina ncial accounting documents to the appropriate business process.<br>- You can pla n each material position and the corresponding account assignment if you want to record a purchase or the ordering for a business process.<br>- In the area of i nventory management, you can book a material receipt to a specific business proc ess.<br>- Until this release, you could record the activities and other processe s in business process planning, but now you can also record fixed and variable p rimary cost portions through the corresponding cost elements. To support plannin g, you can also draw on process planning aids. These include formula planning, p lanning reevaluations, plan reconciliation, and copying.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you to allocate primary cos ts, caused by the use of goods or services, directly to a business process. For example, you can allocate materials receipts directly to a specific business pro cess. The options for managing business processes have been broadened. In later releas es, you can record primary costs to a business process through primary cost elem ents. You can assign individual costs directly to a cost object according to the allocation-by-cause principle. This is not possible with overhead costs. Indivi dual costs are assigned to a cost center and later, with the help of a suitable key, correctly allocated on the basis of the allocation-by-cause principle.<br>< br>In some cases, you can assign overheads directly to a business process. Until this release, it was possible to obtain the cost flow of a process only through secondary allocations.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements in cost object controlling</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>Master data is maintained in the following ways:<br><b r>- Product cost collectors Collective maintenance makes it easier to create, maintain, and display product cost collectors. A modern user interface helps you navigate between product cost collectors and maintain the master data.<br>- Cost object hierarchy A modern user interface helps you navigate in the cost object hierarchy and main tain the master data.<br>- Usability enhancement in the period-end closing activ ities A schedule manager is introduced for the period-end closing activities. The sche dule manager includes a multilevel work list. There is a separate Development Ne ws document for the schedule manager.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cost object controlling enables you to perform the fol lowing activities:<br><br>- Calculate planned costs for cost objects, depending on the order quantity to be produced<br>- Collect actual costs for all cost obje cts<br>- Compare actual costs with target costs and with planned costs, and anal yze variances<br>- Determine the cost of goods manufactured and the cost of good s sold<br><br>Cost object controlling entails the use of the following cost obje cts:<br><br>- Production orders and process orders in product cost by order<br>Product cost collectors and cost objects of cost object hierarchies in product cost by period<br>- Sales order items in product cost by sales order<br>- Genera l cost objects and internal orders in costs for intangible goods and services<br ><br>Later usability enhancements make cost object controlling easier and more c omfortable to use. These enhancements are focused on providing improved handling and simplified functionalities. You are supported according to your actual task

s and methods of working.<br><br>Usability enhancements in cost object controlli ng include the following:<br><br>- Maintenance of master data<br>- Processing of the period-end closing activities</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements in product cost planning</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements in product cost planning includ e the following activities:<br><br>- Performing and monitoring the steps of the costing run through the costing cockpit<br>- Performing all costing steps and an alyzing the results from one screen<br>- Standardizing the selection of plant ma terials and configured materials<br>- Standardizing the updating of standard pri ces, tax and commercial prices, and other planned prices<br>- Converting lists t o the ABAP list viewer (flexibility)<br>- Displaying the costed multilevel bill of materials (BOM) and its costing reports (such as the cost component report an d the itemization) in the costing cockpit<br>- Improving the F4 Help function wh en costing runs are selected, by showing the costing variant and validity in add ition to the name and date of the costing run<br>- Branching from the costing co ckpit to the report tree of the product cost controlling information function - Performing error management<br>- Displaying messages in hierarchical lists<br> - Displaying totals, such as the total number of error messages and the total nu mber of messages for a material<br>- Providing various standard display variants <br>- Using graphical elements (such as traffic lights and colored lights) to im prove presentation<br>- Changing a message type for future cost estimates direct ly from the current cost estimate<br>- Providing business add-in for user-define d message types dependent on data in the current cost estimate for example, err ors in standard cost estimates and warnings in modified standard cost estimates< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use the product cost planning function to plan the costs of manufacturing a product or supplying a service. Product cost planni ng enables you to accomplish the following:<br><br>- Calculate the cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold for products or services<br>- Set minimum p rice levels<br>- Analyze the cost composition of each product<br>- Show the valu e added transparently in each manufacturing step<br>- Determine prices for the v aluation of materials and for sales<br><br>SAP is providing numerous usability e nhancements to make product cost planning easier and more comfortable to use. Th e focus of development is not on creating new functions but on improving the pre sentation and usability of existing product cost planning functions. The aim is t o adapt the functions to the real-life tasks and working methods of users in the following areas:<br><br>- Executing cost estimates<br>- Analyzing costing resul ts<br>- Updating costing results in the price fields of the material master<br>Precosting (customizing)</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Visual unit costing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Visual unit costing is a major enhancement in unit cos ting. It combines the flexibility of unit costing (changing a single-level cost estimate) with the ability to edit the complete multilevel product structure on one screen.<br><br>Using visual unit costing, you can perform what-if analyses f or products, activities, processes, and overhead without changing master data. Y ou can simulate the following:<br><br>- Different valuation strategies<br>- Pric e changes<br>- Structural changes<br><br>Visual unit costing lets you integrate structural and overview information with detailed information about the object. Changes in costing details are reflected immediately in the overview, and change s to the structure appear automatically in the detailed view.<br><br>The result is a costing cockpit. The cockpit has three major work areas:<br><br>- Work sess

ion, to give a structural overview and allow changes to the structure<br>- Unit costing, to give detailed information and allow detailed changes<br>- Selection block, to search for and keep data to be copied into the structure or the detail ed view</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Visual unit costing is part of the product cost planni ng component in SAP R/3. It includes costing simulation, what-if analysis, and e arly cost estimates with limited quantity structure information. It lets you edi t multilevel costing structures effectively, through a new GUI. To fully benefit from the new visual unit costing functions, SAP recommends using a 21-in screen .</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Simplified configuration of high-volume installations< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With regard to the analysis tool, without significant technical knowledge of how to define summarization levels, it is difficult to se t up summarization levels properly. Customers lack either the necessary criteria or the required analysis tools needed for creating the number of summarization levels necessary to support all read accesses in profitability analysis in an op timal way. As a result, many customers create no summarization levels at all, cr eate too many levels, or create overly detailed levels.<br><br>To support its cu stomers in this complex task, SAP is developing an analysis tool for the new rel ease. By analyzing the objects being used (such as reports or planning layouts) and the user activities (such as the number of times a report and the drill-down paths have been called up), the tool proposes summarization levels for use thro ughout profitability analysis. The proposed summarization levels can be created automatically and rarely needs to be optimized manually. <br><br>Maintenance of summarization levels is now simplified. In the future, it will be possible to cr eate summarization levels automatically from the individual proposals made by th e new analysis tool. This will make complicated manual definition of summarizati on levels completely unnecessary. The need for summarization levels to be define d manually will arise only in exceptional cases. As part of this functional chan ge, the new release will also include the redesign of the user interface for the maintenance transaction to make it more user friendly.<br><br>Performance-relev ant settings can be documented. For customers to be able to implement the large number of performance developments, it is necessary to make them aware of the mo st up-to-date form of the tools, functions, and possible settings. For this reas on, new documentation is being compiled for the new release, providing a complet e overview of performance in which application examples are used. This documenta tion will be available both online and as a white paper in SAPNet.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new release entails simplication of performance-re levant settings for customers. As profitability analysis branches out into an increasing number of sectors, the record for processing mass data is being broken repeatedly. Considerable effort s made by developers in earlier releases such as the increased use of summariza tion levels, optimization of the report/report interface, and new facilities for reading data in the information software have brought about significant reduct ions in running time for many customers. The following functions are worthy of s pecial mention:<br><br>- Online reading of report data for each navigation step< br>- Option of using report-independent summarization levels or report-specific summarizations (summarization data)<br>- Automatic splitting of reports<br><br>H owever, these running time improvements were achieved only in projects in which the users had a good understanding of the technical aspects of profitability ana lysis. The simplification of performance-relevant settings for customers ensures that progress made in performance is of benefit in both large and small project s.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td

align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhanced usability for data entry in profitability ana lysis</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With regard to entry aids for assigning postings to pr ofitability analysis, although it was already possible in earlier releases to as sign postings in financial accounting directly to profitability segments, it pro ved too time consuming for many enterprises to fill out the dialog box containin g a list of characteristics. There was also no means of reusing an assignment en tered earlier for ensuing documents or document lines. In order to minimize the time required for account assignment, the new release has an entry aid for assig ning financial documents and entering settlement rules.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Most profit-relevant information in profitability anal ysis is updated automatically, without any extra effort on the part of the end u ser. In some cases, however, it is desirable or even necessary to enter profit-r elated information manually.<br> Typical examples of such cases are as follows:<br> - Direct posting of freight expenses to profitability analysis<br>- Maintaining settlement rules for settling a marketing order to profitability analysis<br>- E ntering profit-relevant information manually, by using the line-item entry funct ion<br> Usability is lent particular significance in the above transactions, because use r acceptance of profitability analysis depends greatly on the precision and rapi dity with which you enter the information.<br> The next section demonstrates how the usability of these transactions has been e nhanced through the following:<br> - Entry aids for assigning postings to profitability segments<br>- A new interfa ce for entering line items</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Open interfaces (BAPI) in sales and profit planning</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new interface consists of simple functions that al low you to read and write profitability analysis plan data. These functions also enable you to do the following:<br><br>- Integrate customer-designed user inter faces for manual planning (developed with any GUI builder) online with the profi tability analysis database<br>- Implement any customer-specific functions for au tomatic planning that cannot be realized with a user exit<br><br>The availabilit y of an open interface in sales and profit planning now makes it possible to com bine the advantages of integrated sales and profit planning in the SAP R/3 softw are with the advantages of customer-specific solutions.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP offers open interfaces in the BAPI programming int erface for sales and profit planning in the new release. Processes for sales and profit planning often need to fulfill entirely different requirements in different industries in order to account for the different busi ness aims and market situations. This is why many customers in different industr ies would like to be able to integrate their own user interfaces and special fun ctions with a highly flexible and adaptable standard software in the planning pr ocess.<br><br>Moreover, customers would like data to be stored consistently in a central database in the SAP R/3 software at the same time, thereby enabling the m to carry out planned or actual comparisons or to carry out central planning fu nctions without having to worry about poor software performance. Typical example s of such central functions include revaluating data to conform to recalculated costs of goods manufactured or reorganizing plan data to correspond to altered c ustomer or product hierarchies.<br><br>To meet these requirements in sales and p rofit planning, BAPI opens up sales and profit planning for user-developed inter

faces, industry solutions, and add-ons. Time-consuming processes, such as extrac ting plan data from the profitability analysis database or importing external pl an data, have been greatly simplified and accelerated. As a result, they are muc h more user-friendly.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New user interface and navigation in profit planning</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With regard to overall concept and new terms in planni ng, and with the aforementioned aims in mind, the old and new concepts in planni ng are defined within the overall framework of planning.<br><br>In past releases , far-reaching customer requirements led SAP to develop powerful functions that could be customized flexibly and applied to multidimensional profitability segme nts. The planning process itself generally consisted of applying these manual an d automatic planning functions to the desired profitability segments.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>Sales and profit planning provides you with a number o f functions and programs that let you structure your planning process to reflect your organization s business situation. Most enterprises have implemented a plan ning process consisting of a number of individual planning steps, in which they first copy actual data or existing plan data and then project it into the future , revaluate it, adjust it manually, and distribute it top-down until they obtain a sales and profit plan that fulfills their enterprises requirements.<br><br>Wh ereas past releases placed emphasis on providing powerful and flexible planning functions for the central planner, the new SAP release focuses on the local key account managers and sales employees. As decentralized planning is taking on an increasingly important role, it is becoming more and more important that the sof tware is designed so that it guides you and helps you coordinate and organize th e planning process.<br><br>The new navigation design and redesign of the initial planning screen in the new release is designed to simplify the overall planning process for the end user and support the process more efficiently. To achieve t his, the planning functions are enhanced as follows:<br><br>- Predefined plannin g levels guide you better.<br>- The individual planning steps are linked togethe r through a new user interface that combines automatic and manual planning steps into an intuitive introduction to planning.<br>- By defining planning packages, you can better adapt the planning screens to your individual planning tasks.<br >- Automatically generated planning layouts simplify customizing for planning.</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Simplified changing of operating concern structure</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>Characteristics and value fields can be deleted. Profi tability analysis generates the analysis structures according to your organizati on s analysis and information requirements. You define the structure of an operat ing concern by selecting the desired characteristics and value fields. <br><br>P reviously, you could only add fields to an active operating concern. The new rel ease now allows you to delete characteristics or value fields, which was not sup ported in the standard release.<br><br>An important component of this new functi on is the where-used list for characteristics and value fields, which provides y ou with an overview of the customizing objects (such as planning layouts, forms, reports, and profitability analysis transfer structures) in which specific char acteristics or value fields are used. You can then simply delete the characteris tic or value field in question from the customizing objects concerned. Furthermo re, you can delete those selected characteristics and value fields from live ope rating concerns. <br><br>This function allows you to delete characteristics and

value fields from an operating concern structure if these are not in use in othe r customizing objects. Using the database conversion function, you can remove fi elds without loss of any data. While the conversion process is in use, the opera ting concern is inaccessible, so that no postings can be transferred to the oper ating concern at the same time.<br><br>There are now functions for correcting da ta. After you have adapted your profitability analysis structures, it may be nec essary in some cases to cancel the posted profitability data so that you can rep ost the data to profitability analysis. This lets you have up-to-date informatio n that meets your new decision-making requirements.<br><br>The new release is eq uipped with correction functions for the purpose of canceling billing documents, for instance, and having them transferred back to profitability analysis. This is always necessary whenever you make customizing settings that alter the relati onship between condition types in sales and distribution and value fields in pro fitability analysis. This can be the case when, for example, you restructure you r contribution margin reports. These functions are available only in costing-bas ed profitability analysis.<br><br>Transport functions have been enhanced. The op tions for carrying out adjustments in profitability analysis are undergoing furt her refinement through an improved technical infrastructure in the transport sys tem.<br><br>The new release provides you with the following functions:<br><br>You can select the individual customizing objects at a finer level of detail tha n before and transport them by using collective transports.<br>- For carrying ou t smaller changes in customizing, you also have the option of transporting the c hanges from directly within the individual maintenance transactions themselves. This is particularly helpful if you carry out smaller customizing changes during your integration tests and want to pass them on to the live system via a delta transport.<br>- It is no longer necessary to carry out any subsequent activities in the live system.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP has developed a range of new functions in the new release to meet the challenges inherent in the rapidly changing conditions and f actors influencing decision making in increasingly dynamic markets. In such an e nvironment, a flexible application that can be altered and adapted individually is a prerequisite for success with regard to a meaningful and up-to-date basis f or your decisions.<br><br>The new functions in the new release allow you to adap t the structures of your operating concern more quickly to suit your changing in formation needs. The developments include the following:<br><br>- You can change the structures of your operating concern not only by adding but also by alterin g.<br>- You can more easily adjust your profitability data to the altered struct ures.<br>- You have improved support for transporting changes between test softw are and your live software.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Simplified data analysis in profitability reporting</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new features in report lists are as follows:<br><b r>- New user interface design, with the report display divided into as many as f our sections<br>- Header section<br>- Navigation section<br>- List section with drill-down and detail lists<br>- Graphic section<br>- Improved navigation throug h graphical control elements<br>- Hierarchical structures in the list section<br >- Use of context menus and drag-and-drop functions<br><br>The new features in t he report and form definition functions are as follows:<br><br>- Redesign of the report definition screens<br>- Sequence of dialog boxes redesigned</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Experiences with customers have revealed that the avai lable reporting functions in profitability analysis already fulfill most of thei r reporting requirements. To round off the overall appearance of the information software, new technologies are used to make the user interface in drill-down re porting more user friendly.<br><br>With regard to the GUI for drill-down reports , graphical control elements are used to give drill-down reports a GUI that make s it easy to navigate and alter settings in your reports while still offering yo

u the full functionality of drill-down reporting.<br><br>In the new release, the report display screen can be divided into different sections:<br><br>- The head er section<br>- The navigation section<br>- A section for displaying the values in drill-down lists or detail lists<br>- A section for graphics<br><br>You can u se the cursor to change the size of each of these sections. <br><br>The navigati on section contains all the navigation information. You can display both a drill -down list and a detail list at the same time in the list section. The values in the list section can be displayed in hierarchies, which you can expand and coll apse. Many of the functions can be carried out directly with the cursor (such as changing column widths) or by dragging and dropping (moving columns, drilling d own).<br><br>The graphic section contains a large number of functions for adjust ing and formatting the graphic according to your needs.<br><br>The software supp orts you in numerous ways to let you make the most out of the available drill-do wn functions. For example, you can position the cursor on a characteristic and c lick the right mouse button to display a list of functions that are applicable t o that characteristic.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Actual cost component split</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The actual cost component split enables the actual cos ting/material ledger component to use a cost component split based on actual dat a. This means that you can analyze the costs to be rolled up at the time of mate rial price determination at all levels of production and apply them to the relev ant material.<br><br>You can analyze the differences between the actual costs an d the preliminary material valuation by cost component. Single-level differences are caused by quantity variances in production (excess consumption of material components or activities, for example) or, in the case of raw materials, by pric e variances in purchasing. Multilevel differences are caused by price variances of material components used in production or by changes in actual activity price s.<br><br>The actual cost component split allows you to separate the value added by production from the costs associated with the lower level in production. Thi s works for all levels of production at which a multilevel structure is used. Yo u can decide whether to have a cost component split for the cost of goods manufa ctured and also a primary cost component split, in which case the cost of intern al activities, as well as that of materials, is recorded. The primary cost compo nent split can also be used in actual costing.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The actual cost component split is based on the materi al ledger. This function enables you to analyze actual costs and differences aff ecting new material prices by cost component across all production levels.<br><b r>The analysis functions are incorporated into the display functions for materia l ledger data. When multilevel material price determination is performed in the actual costing/material ledger component, the differences are rolled up and can be applied to the relevant materials. Actual cost component splits, which are up dated after every valuation-relevant transaction, can be analyzed at any time, b efore or after settlement. This function is an extension of the existing functio ns in the product cost planning component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Interactive user-defined information software</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>The changeover of reports from the ABAP programming la nguage lists to ABAP list viewer grids or trees makes a series of new functions possible, such as the following:<br><br>- Manipulation of columns with the dragand-drop function<br>- Selection of different layouts with tab strip technology< br>- Interactive creation of customer-specific and user-specific layouts<br>- Us er-defined and interactive summation level creation<br>- Integration of graphics

and Microsoft Office applications</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To meet the requirements of an interactive user-define d information software, all hierarchical and tabular reports and analyses in the area of product cost controlling are being redesigned with the control technolo gy of the ABAP list viewer.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Easy cost planning and execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Easy cost planning enables the following:<br><br>- Eas y cost planning supports easy but structured and flexible cost planning and is a vailable for objects that can be planned through unit costing.<br>- The cost pla nning can be arranged hierarchically by any available criterion (for example, by organizational units or costing objects, and in chronological or logical order) .<br>- For planning purposes, you can use existing master data in the SAP R/3 so ftware. However, you can also use variable costing items to place cost informati on that is not yet represented by SAP R/3 master data, to simulate existing mast er data, and to place other occurring cost information.<br>- Quick and easy entr y of costing information is ensured by alterable and adjustable cost models, reu se of costing information, and form-based or table-based entry.<br>- A cost mode l can be adjusted to an individual case by entering a few distinguishing feature s.<br><br>With these entries as a starting point, resource utilization is determ ined automatically. The costing items are derived on the basis of defined rules. The respective features can be prescribed to the costing object or to the heade r.<br><br>Easy cost execution provides the relevant information for the initiati on of a service. On the basis of easy cost planning, you can launch the respecti ve services to initiate the relevant business processes for procurement and inte rnal activities and, in some cases, confirm the corresponding direct bookings.<b r><br>Easy cost execution represents the starting point for the following proces ses and services:<br><br>- Material reservation<br>- Purchase requisition<br>- A ctivity and business process allocation<br>- Goods issue<br>- Purchase order<br> - Creation of material master records<br>- Goods receipt and back flush<br>- Int ernal service requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As part of SAP Business Suite, the easy cost planning and execution function offers various new functions to plan, calculate, and anal yze costs of goods and services and to use the costing results for further proce ssing through intranet.<br><br>Easy cost planning offers a comfortable way to pl an, calculate, and simulate the costs of new products and services. It supports cost estimates for various objects such as external services (for example, sales order), internal services (for example, internal order, internal service reques t), preliminary costing for projects, and general cost objects.<br><br>Easy cost execution offers a comfortable way to use the quantity structure created and ca lculated with easy cost planning as a starting point for the logistic procuremen t procedures and the back flush.<br><br>During the cost-planning phase, you can delegate the planning of parts of the project to be carried out (for example, th rough Internal service request) or support make-or-buy decisions with the abilit y to search for the cheapest vendor.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhanced interplay between profitability analysis and the former SAP Business Information Warehouse (now part of SAP NetWeaver)</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>Until this release, you had the option of performing p rofitability analyses in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component (now part of SAP NetWeaver) by transferring data from costing-based profitabili ty analysis to the component. With this release, you can also transfer data from account-based profitability analysis. This enables you to perform profitability

analysis for periods at the account level in the former SAP Business Informatio n Warehouse, with the analysis being reconciled exactly to financial accounting. <br><br>The extraction of data from account-based profitability analysis is inte nded for reporting on closed periods at an aggregated level.<br><br>Profitabilit y analysis business content is enhanced.<br><br>A profitability analysis demonst ration example can be found in the current business content delivered in the for mer SAP Business Information Warehouse component. This example shows you the set tings that you are required to make for connecting profitability analysis to the component. It also contains a typical InfoCube and several queries, all of whic h can be executed for demonstration purposes. In addition, extended profitabilit y content for productive use are available with the new release.<br><br>This rea dy-to-run business content for profitability analysis includes a fixed contribut ion margin scheme, an InfoCube, and a selection of different queries. The rows o f your key figure scheme are then assigned to those of the standard contribution margin scheme. This allows you to use the queries from the SAP software in your live system to analyze your profitability data.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To meet the aim of extending the possibilities of prof itability reporting in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component ( now part of SAP NetWeaver) and that of simplifying its implementation, a range o f new options have been created for the interplay between profitability analysis and the component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Web-enabled drill-down reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With Web-enabled drill-down reporting, employees worki ng externally can have constant access regardless of place and time to the cur rent status of figures that interest them. This would enable a salesperson, for example, to call up current plan/actual sales comparisons regularly through the Internet.<br><br>The known drill-down functions in SAP R/3 cover all the complex requirements that end users, as well as the power user, might have. Web-enabled drill-down reporting has taken into account the requirements of occasional user s in particular, such as the need for simple reports, minimal navigation, and in tuitive usability.<br><br>In the role menu within the end users workplace, users find all functions relevant to their respective tasks, including the Web-enable d drill-down reporting function. Alternatively, you can supply users with releva nt report information by automatically publishing reports through hyperlinks in their workplace.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As part of SAP Business Suite, there is now a new Webenabled GUI that allows you to execute suitable SAP R/3 transactions on the Inte rnet or intranet.<br><br>In line with Internet philosophy, the main focus of the Web-enabled SAP R/3 transactions is also on straightforward functions and intui tive usability. As of SAP R/3 release 4.6C, you can also execute profitability a nalysis reports in this new user interface.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Web-enabled profitability planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can create your own layout for the user interfaces so that the Web-enabled planning function meets the specific needs of your plan ning process precisely. With the help of the Internet launch pad on the left sid e of the screen, you make available selected planning packages that are relevant to the sales employee in question. Once the employee has selected one of these planning packages, only the market segments (such as products, customer groups, or regions) for which he or she is responsible appear on the rightd side of the screen, together with the values belonging to those market segments.<br><br>In a ddition, elaborate planning instructions can be stored on the planning screen to clarify the planning tasks in hand. These instructions appear in the area on th

e far right side of the screen and can be used to provide the planner with backg round information and inform him or her about any further details or special arr angements.<br><br>The planning data entered externally by the sales employees is posted remotely to the SAP R/3 software, which thereby guarantees that the cent ral dataset is always consistent. When the data is posted, not only is the maste r data checked but the data is also assigned to the current customer hierarchies , product hierarchies, and organizational hierarchies. In addition, this involve s the complete valuation of the data with list prices, for example, or with the current product cost estimate.<br><br>Finally, working with the Web-enabled plan ning function simplifies how you organize your planning process. It means you ca n either send out your planning tasks as hyperlinks by e-mail or use the planner s role menus in their respective workplaces to inform them about planning tasks awaiting processing.<br><br>The new Web-enabled planning function in profitabili ty analysis provides you with an efficient, decentralized planning process that offers a host of advantages, such as the following:<br><br>- Individual list of planning tasks for each sales employee<br>- Personalized structure of the user i nterface<br>- Simplified organization of the planning process<br>- Consistent, c entralized planning database in SAP R/3</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new Web-enabled planning function offers employees planning externally such as key account managers, product managers, or sales r epresentatives a straightforward planning function that is tailored to their pa rticular needs and has a simple and intuitively designed interface. To unite the sales and profit forecasts made by a number of different sales empl oyees working externally, you previously had the option in profitability analysi s planning of sending out Microsoft Excel sheets for data entry and then importi ng the returned data into the SAP R/3 software. The interplay of profit planning and the Internet as a part of the SAP Business Suite family of applications pro vides you with an efficient alternative to perform this planning process.</span> </td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Monitoring periodic tasks in profitability analysis by using schedule manager</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Transactions and programs for profitability analysis a re now connected to the schedule manager and can be accessed from the uniform sc reen there. As a result of this integration, you can manage periodically recurri ng activities in a task list covering the different applications. In particular, this means you can schedule in the daily overview transactions and programs tha t can be started by variants for background processing, and the SAP R/3 software can process them.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Profitability analysis provides you with a whole range of settlement and allocation techniques that you can use to allocate costs incu rred to the specific profitability segments that generated those costs (such as customers, products, or regions). To this end, as part of period-end closing, yo u perform periodically recurring tasks that lead to the cross-application flow o f costs. In many enterprises, tasks relating to period-end closing need to be pe rformed with rapid efficiency and have to be processed in a specific sequence. E ach step in the sequence requires the preceding step to have been completed succ essfully.<br><br>For example, you allocate costs from service cost centers to pr oduct cost centers at the end of the period so that you can then transfer the ba lances for these cost centers to profitability analysis at the product level.<br ><br>In previous releases, you could use SAP R/3 to manage the individual activi ties and to analyze the results, but it was not possible to do this centrally. I nstead, you would use the individual options for each specific activity (such as program execution, job administration, and result logs), and it was difficult t o gain an overview of the overall status. The schedule manager now allows you to group, schedule, and execute regularly recurring activities and to control the

results of these activities. In addition, you do all this in a single interface in the SAP R/3 software. In this way, you always have up-to-date information abo ut the status of your activities. Furthermore, you can define complex sequences of activities and have the SAP R/3 software perform them automatically.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Appropriation requests (investment management financial accounting investment accounting)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Appropriation request offers the following features:<b r><br>- Any number of projects and work breakdown structure (WBS) elements can b e created from an appropriation request.<br>- Costs planned on the appropriation request through the use of easy cost planning can be transferred to the individ ual WBS elements, for subsequent distribution to subordinate WBS elements.<br>Reporting takes place across all projects of an appropriation request.<br><br>Yo u can now generate multiple projects from one appropriation request. This enable s the appropriation request to represent a product for which a number of project s are created during its life cycle (such as a development project, investment p roject, or marketing project).<br><br>You can plan costs and revenues for the en tire life cycle of a product directly in the appropriation request.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Appropriation request adds business value in the follo wing ways:<br><br>- It supports decision-making processes for new products by pr oviding planning and preinvestment analysis on the appropriation request.<br>- I t enables complete reporting across the life cycle of the product by treating th e appropriation request as a connecting link.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Authorizations for additional areas of responsibility< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>"Area of responsibility" means that a user can receive authorization quickly and easily for all objects in an area. With SAP R/3 relea se 4.0, you can enter standard hierarchy nodes for cost centers in the K_CCA aut horization object. The user is then authorized for all cost centers within this node; if the area is a group, then the authorization is "inherited" for all the objects in this group.<br><br>Using the two alternative hierarchies now availabl e, you can issue authorizations for cost centers that have similar projects but have different company codes for example, for all advertising or research cost centers.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Authorization for additional areas of responsibility a dds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It simplifies the issue and m aintenance of authorizations.<br>- It enables authorization to be issued accordi ng to subject matter.<br>- It enables you to represent the complexity of an ente rprise more appropriately.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New interfaces in BAPI for actual postings in overhead cost controlling</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new interfaces in the BAPI programming interface e nables you to exchange business data between SAP components or between SAP compo nents and non-SAP components. <br><br>In overhead cost controlling, BAPI support s the following:<br><br>- Document search Controlling documents in the SAP R/3 software are found on the basis of account assignment object, reference transaction (information on the component outside o f controlling that wrote the document), interval for posting date, and period or

fiscal year (important for special periods).<br>- Planning reader Planning data is transferred to external software (such as statistical key figur es, primary costs, activity quantities and prices, and activity input).<br>- Man ual cost allocation The manual cost allocation transaction is checked and posted, which enables seco ndary costs to be allocated between selected account assignment objects, similar to automatic distribution and assessment.<br>- Reversal of actual postings of a ll controlling transactions BAPI can now reverse the transaction.<br><br>The following BAPI functions have b een improved:<br><br>- Customer fields Customer fields can be checked and posted with all transactions.<br>- Profitabil ity segments With primary cost repostings, revenue repostings, and manual cost allocations, y ou can post to profitability segments as senders and receivers.<br>- External va luation With activity allocations, you can influence how the allocated activity quantity is valuated. The valuation can be transferred either to BAPI or dynamically thr ough implementation of an appropriate business add-in (BAdI) from the account as signment data. The valuation can use the total price, the total value, or the fi xed and variable portions of the total price or total value.<br>- Transaction cu rrency by line With primary cost repostings, revenue repostings, and manual cost allocations, t he transaction currency can now be specified by line (in addition to header leve l). <br>- Enhancement of interface for activity allocations in joint venture acc ounting If the joint venture accounting component is active, the valuation period and ye ar can be specified for valuation.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This new development and enhancement in the BAPI progr amming interface in overhead cost controlling adds business value in the followi ng ways:<br><br>- It improves the integration of the processes represented by th e new interfaces in BAPI.<br>- It provides higher interface flexibility. <br>- I t facilitates communication between systems running non-SAP software and custome r developments for overhead cost controlling in the former SAP R/3 Enterprise (w hose functionality is now part of SAP ERP).<br>- It improves external data trans fer.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Planning and budgeting in multiple currencies</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Global corporations can now plan or budget their inves tment programs, appropriation requests, projects, and internal orders in multipl e currencies. This simplifies the coordination of bottom-up planning in the loca l currency with top-down requirements in a corporate controlling area currency.< br><br>Planning and budgeting in multiple currencies is also supported across sy stems running different software for example, when data is planned in group cur rency with central strategic enterprise management (SEM) business planning and s imulation (BPS) software.<br><br>Planning or budgeting in multiple currencies of fers the following features:<br><br>- Definition of an object currency in the po sitions of an investment program<br>- Planning and budgeting in an investment pr ogram in any currency<br>- Planning appropriation requests in object currency<br >- Total cost planning for projects and internal orders in any currency<br>- Ava ilability control in object currency<br>- Retranslation after a change in the as sumed exchange rate, or after a fiscal year change<br>- Freely selectable report currency in the information software for investment programs and appropriation requests<br> - Definition of strategic program positions and appropriation reque sts for the transfer of plan values into, or their adoption from, corporate plan ning in SEM-BPS <br>- Copy function for plan values in the investment program, b etween appropriation requests and projects, and between plan and budget</span></

td> <td align=left valign=top>Planning or budgeting in multiple currencies adds busi ness value in the following ways:<br><br>- It enables costs to be planned and mo nitored in the currency in which they are incurred.<br>- It incorporates local c ost planning in local currencies into a higher level of controlling area or grou p currency. <br>- It communicates and modifies top-down budget requirements acro ss currency and software boundaries.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Alternative valuation run</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The alternative valuation run is an enhancement in act ual costing. In addition to the standard costing run, you can calculate cumulati ve actual values from periodic actual costing, over several periods. You can als o execute several alternative valuation runs for a single plant by using differe nt criteria (different prices or valuation methods), and you can compare and eva luate the results.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The alternative valuation run adds business value in t he following ways:<br><br>- It does not allow seasonal variances to adversely af fect actual costing.<br>- It provides more exact information concerning producti on conditions in the cumulation view, which may be of particular importance for long-running production processes.<br>- It enables you to investigate the effect s of different valuation methods, and ending inventory valuations (for example, "first in, first out" [FIFO] and "last in, first out" [LIFO] accounting), on the product price.<br>- It enables you to transfer results to, and post results in, profitability analysis.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Distribution of usage variances</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>If exact quantities cannot be posted when confirmation s are made (for example, backflush with bills of materials [BOMs], or inverse ac tivities with routings), physical and software-recorded quantity differences can occur (for example, inventory differences). Distribution of usage variances ena bles you to subsequently post these differences to the withdrawing production or der, product cost collector, or the finished material.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The distribution of usage variances adds business valu e in the following ways: <br><br>- It enables you to complete exact cost object controlling and actual costing.<br>- It distributes inventory differences accord ing to receiver.<br>- It delivers realistic and accurate information about produ ction withdrawals.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>External costing interface in BAPI</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Standardized interfaces in the BAPI programming interf ace are now provided for the business object repository object Costestimate BUS2 044.<br><br>The following specific points should be noted:<br><br>- BAPI_COSTEST IMATE_CREATE_SPLIT If you use external software and create a costing based on this data, you can re use it in SAP R/3 for example, in the reference costing or transfer control. Yo u can, for example, transfer the results to actual costing/material ledger or to inventory valuation.<br>- BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_DELETE and BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_DEL_MU LTI These functions correspond to the "delete test data" transaction. For more infor mation, see the "delete material costing" documentation for the CKR1 transaction .<br>- BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_MARKING and BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_RELEASING

These functions correspond to the "price update" transaction. Note what happens after a stock revaluation.<br>- BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_ALLOW_MARK These functions correspond to the "allowance for marking and the price update" t ransaction. For example, you can use the BAPI programming interface to issue mar king allowance for more than one company code automatically.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With regard to external costing interface, the new int erfaces in the BAPI programming interface adds business value in the following w ays:<br><br>- It provides an additional selection criterion (costing runs), thro ugh a selection of existing cost estimates (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_GETLIST).<br>- It provides the partner cost component split, auxiliary cost component split, and t he direct partner cost component split (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_GETDETAIL).<br>- It cr eates cost estimates in external software and imports them to the SAP R/3 softwa re. You can also transport data for the cost component split, partner cost compo nent split, direct partner cost component split, auxiliary cost component split, and costing header data (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_CREATE_SPLIT).<br>- It enables you t o delete a cost estimate in SAP R/3 by using a cost estimate key (BAPI_COSTESTIM ATE_DELETE).<br>- It enables you to delete a costing in SAP R/3 by using selecti on criteria (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_DEL).<br>- It enables you to mark more than one c ost estimate by using selection criteria (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_MARKING).<br>- It en ables you to release several cost estimates by using selection criteria (BAPI_CO STESTIMATE_RELEASING).<br>- It enables you to issue a marking allowance per comp any code, posting period, fiscal year, and valuation view. The corresponding cos t estimates can be used in the marking procedure. BAPI defines both the selectio n criteria for the marking procedure and the marking allowance for the cost esti mate (selection criteria for the marking procedure) (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_ALLOW_MAR K).<br>- It enables you to analyze the cost estimates that received a marking al lowance (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_ALLOW_MEAS_GET).<br>- It enables you to select a grou p of cost estimates and update them in the material master and to set either the plan price control 1-3 or the tax valuation price and commercial valuation pric e to 1-3 (BAPI_COSTESTIMATE_UPDATE_PRICE).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Flexible selection for the costing run</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Additional selection options are provided for selectin g materials for a costing run in product cost planning. You can now create a sel ection group, which you can process in the maintenance transaction. You can use the following characteristics:<br><br>- Material master<br>- Bill of material (B OM) usage<br>- Costing run templates<br>- Additional material fields<br>- Existi ng costings</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Flexible selection for the costing run adds business v alue because it enables you to make a selection for the costing run, without hav ing to select all materials. This is particularly useful when you have large qua ntities of material.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mass costing for sales orders</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can now run a mass costing for sales orders. You c an also select by order item by using various criteria, and you can mark items f or the costing of valuated sales order or project stock. A user exit has been pr ovided so that you can obtain additional selection criteria for the selection. T his user exit includes all of the selection criteria of the initial screen.</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mass costing for sales orders adds business value beca use it simplifies costing runs by providing specific costing selection criteria, so that you do not have to use automatic costing (which affects software perfor mance). You can also set up the costing run in advance for example, to run over

night.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Revaluation of consumption</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Before this release, you could use actual costs to val uate only materials already delivered to the warehouse. You can now valuate peri odic consumption by using actual prices. In particular, you can valuate the cost of goods sold by using actual prices.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The revaluation of consumption adds business value bec ause it enables all goods issues (in particular, cost of goods sold) to be valua ted with actual period prices.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls accomplishes the follo wing: - It supports documentation, assessment, and testing of internal controls needed to fulfill the requirements of Sections 302 and 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act o f 2002 (SOX), as well as the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadw ay Commission (COSO I) framework and other internal control initiatives.<br>- It provides scheduling functionality and workflow-supported issue-remediation func tionalities.<br>- It includes predefined and easily customized management report s, ranging from a high-level overview of the status of internal control to detai led analyses.<br><br>SOX makes management responsible for the effectiveness of d isclosure controls and procedures for financial reporting, operations, and compl iance (Section 302) and requires managers to document internal controls, assess their effectiveness, and prepare a report on the state of internal controls in t heir organization (Section 404). SOX is applicable not only to United States base d companies and their foreign subsidiaries but also to foreign companies that ar e registered with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.<br><br>Management of internal controls centralizes the documentation of internal controls and ass essments of control design, efficiency, effectiveness, and management reporting to support companies in their SOX and other internal control initiatives. The sc heduling functionality and workflow-supported issue remediation ensure on-time d isclosures and reduce internal communication and administration expenses related to compliance. Predefined and customizable management reports provide managers, as well as internal and external auditors, with an overview of the state of int ernal control.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls produces the following benefits: - Lower risk of failing to comply with financial compliance regulation<br>- Redu ced internal communication and administration expenses related to compliance doc umentation <br>- Improved management reporting that highlights issues before le gal and regulatory reporting deadlines, to reduce the risk of noncompliance</spa n></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Audit information support</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function offers new roles that support two differ ent business audit approaches:<br><br>- An account-oriented approach that provid es a balance sheet, an income statement, and segment reporting, as well as inter nal activity allocation and a consolidated financial statement<br>- A process-or

iented approach that supports two different processes: order to cash and purchas e to order<br><br>The audit information function provides methodical approaches for business and system auditing, comprising a structured collection of preconfi gured SAP evaluation programs. The audit information function is the external or internal auditor s toolbox within an SAP environment, providing online controls and data export functionality to specialized auditing software. This function ha s been enhanced to offer a more complete suite of preconfigured business audit f unctionality. The enhanced scope of this function includes further components wi thin financial applications, such as asset accounting, cost accounting, cash jou rnal, consolidation, real estate, and treasury, and within operation application s, such as procurement.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality lowers risk of internal audit failu res, improves ability to satisfy requirements of internal audit commitees, impro ves quality of internal and external auditing, and improves efficiency of intern al and external audits.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls: customer-defined fiel ds</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Customers can create their own attributes for controlrelated master data such as organizational units, controls, and processes. In ad dition, fields can be added to assessments, test logs, issues, and remediation p lans. These fields can be made available in reporting and can help companies del iver on company-specific requests by auditors.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function provides the following benefits: - It improves managerial insight into internal controls analysis and reporting.< br>- It improves effectiveness of processes in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxle y Act. <br>- It reduces risk of failure to comply with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls: import of third-party tests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function accomplishes the following: - It supports the direct import of third-party test results of control effective ness (from separately licensed testing tools) to support the testing required by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.<br>- It enables authorized users to document the result s of their control-effectiveness tests, in accordance with a predefined testing procedure.<br>- It provides master data structures that facilitate data mapping with dedicated control testing environments.<br><br>New functionality in SAP ERP supports the import of third-party tests of control effectiveness results direc tly into management of internal controls to support the testing required by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. To implement this functionality, the customer must be using a separately licensed testing tool (Virsa, Approva, SecurInfo) in which the cust omer's side of the interface has been developed for pushing the test results int o management of internal controls.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function provides the following benefits: - Lower cost of compliance through the automation of testing procedures<br>- Rea l-time identification of internal control violations or fraudulent transactions< br>- Improved effectiveness of processes in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley A ct</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls: upload of master data </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function supports upload of process- and controlrelated documentation which is required for compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, Section 404 from other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, with a stand ardized Extensible Markup Language (XML) interface.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function provides the following benefits: - Lower cost of compliance through the automated process documentations<br>- Rea l-time identification of internal control violations or fraudulent transactions< br>- Improved effectiveness of processes in compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley A ct</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls: mass assignment of te sters</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function supports mass assignment of testers to c ontrols (test objects) within a cycle or business unit.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function provides the following benefits: - Improved automation of activities that ensure compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxl ey Act<br>- Elimination of manual assignment processes<br>- Improved ability to monitor key controls</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of internal controls: audit information fun ction interface</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables authorized testers to document the results of their control effecti veness tests in the management of internal controls.<br>- It allows testers to d rill down to the individual document level in the audit information function, if necessary, to track down results.<br><br>The audit information function is a li sting of SAP ERP reports that can be accessed through a hierarchically structure d menu of reports. Auditing is made easier because data ranges for analysis can be limited and there is no need to learn transaction codes and navigation.<br><b r>In accordance with the predefined testing procedure, the tester uses a link in management of internal controls to open the audit information function in a Web -based transaction. The tester is taken to a report that has been assigned to te st a particular control (in a particular system for example, a logistics contro l would bring the tester automatically into an audit information function in the business unit s logistics software).<br><br>Using selection criteria as provided in the testing procedure, the tester executes the report. The audit information report is displayed. The user can drill down to the individual document level i f necessary to track down results.<br><br>The tester enters the results of the r eport in management of internal controls. If problems were identified, the teste r initiates any necessary remediation activities to fix problems with the contro l.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function provides the following benefits: - Improved automation of activities that ensure compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxl ey Act<br>- Elimination of manual assignment processes<br>- Improved ability to monitor key controls</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td

align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Extended transfer price functions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following activities are accomplished with this fu nction: - Price determination (overhead cost controlling) In SAP R/3 release 4.0B, you could calculate actual activity or process prices, and thus valuate your flows of activities, only in your operational version. Thi s meant that when you allocated actual activities, these were valuated through o nly one approach. In SAP R/3 4.5B, you can have the software calculate up to thr ee prices simultaneously and valuate your activities in all three versions. In p lanning, you can still calculate only one price. This price is also used to valu ate actual data if you have not calculated any actual activity prices.<br>- Prel iminary order costing (product cost controlling) Until and including SAP R/3 4.0B, preliminary order costing updated costs on the controlling object only in the operational version. In SAP R/3 4.5B, cost estim ates are run automatically for all the active valuation approaches and then stor ed for the controlling object. Because of a corresponding enhancement in reporti ng, you can also analyze the valuation approaches for your nonoperational versio ns for both plan and actual data. <br>- Valuated sales order stock (product cost controlling) In SAP R/3 4.0B, you could valuate sales order stock through only legal valuatio n, because the material ledger could not store valuated sales order stock. The m aterial ledger is the basis for transfer pricing, inasmuch as it stores the diff erent valuation approaches (legal, group, and profit center) for the stock. In S AP R/3 4.5B, the material ledger can store sales order stock, just like stock th at is not stored, for a specific order. This means that sales order stocks can n ow be valuated through all the active valuation approaches.<br>- Parallel actual allocation in collective orders and in cost object hierarchies (product cost co ntrolling) Until this release, goods movements between orders within a collective order wer e valuated through the preliminary cost estimate in the operational version. In SAP R/3 4.5B, preliminary cost estimates are stored for all the active valuation views, and the goods movements are valuated through each of these. Parallel val uation methods are supported for only new collective orders (using stock). Previ ously, actual cost distribution within a cost object hierarchy could be performe d only for the operative version. In SAP R/3 4.5B, this is possible in all valua tion versions. However, only one target version can be used to calculate the tar get costs for the distribution. That means that all valuations are distributed o n the basis of the same target costs.<br>- Profitability analysis based on trans fer prices (profitability analysis) Previously, the profitability analysis application component could represent all external sales with customers outside the group and other companies within the group. These external sales could be analyzed through the characteristic profit center from the point of view of internal organizational units in reporting. In SAP R/3 4.5B, profitability analysis offers another type of profit center analys is. This enables you both to select all internal goods movements within profit c enters in addition to the external sales and to valuate these by using transfer prices according to the cost-of-sales method.<br>- Profit planning for internal goods movements (enterprise controlling profit center accounting) In direct profit center planning, you can plan output quantities by referencing representative materials. Planned revenues are calculated on the basis of the pl anned sales quantities, valuated with transfer prices. Planned costs are taken f rom the profit center cost estimate. You can plan profits for internal goods mov ements on the basis of valuation by using transfer prices.<br>- Order settlement (financial account asset accounting) SAP R/3 4.0B allowed you to settle orders collectively to asset accounting only for the legal valuation view. Consequently, assets constructed internally could

be shown only from a legal viewpoint. In SAP R/3 4.5B, you can also settle the g roup valuation and the profit center valuation to the relevant depreciation area s in asset accounting, so that you can analyze the values there according to all three views: legal, group, and profit center. This applies to both collective s ettlement and settlement by line item.<br>- Authorizations In SAP R/3 4.0B, no authorization object was available to allow you to protect t he different valuation views with an authorization check. SAP R/3 4.5B provides an authorization object that contains the controlling area and the valuation vie w. You can use this authorization object in reporting so that users can see only the legal, group, or profit center view (or combinations of these), depending o n their function.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The transfer pricing functions were introduced in SAP R/3 release 4.0B. Transfer prices enable you to define your own valuation approa ches to apply from a legal, group-oriented, or profit center viewpoint and thus valuate your entire value-added process within your organization through paralle l methods.<br><br>In SAP R/3 4.5B, a number of the limitations on transfer price s in SAP R/3 4.0B are eliminated, and new functions are added.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Summarization of profit center documents</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.0B, you can summarize line items when updating them in enterprise controlling profit center accounting. <br><br>Fo r individual activities, you can specify that certain fields are to be ignored. These fields are then no longer updated in enterprise controlling profit center a ccounting, so that several line items in a single transaction can be summarized into one item if they differ only in the ignored fields. This can lead to a sign ificant reduction in the data volume.<br><br>Summarization is possible only for data fields that are not contained in the summary record table. <br><br>If you c hoose to summarize a field, you can no longer analyze that field in profit cente r accounting.<br><br>An example of a situation in which you might want to summar ize line items is a billing document that contains a large number of items and i n which the profit center is the same in all lines. Profit center line items tha t belong to one document might differ only in the sales order item and the mater ial. If you do not want to analyze these fields, you can summarize them, so that only one line item is posted to enterprise controlling profit center accounting. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Summarization of profit center documents improves perf ormance and readability. Profit center accounting typically receives postings for a large number of trans actions, which leads to very large data volumes in the line item tables and pote ntial performance problems.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: extended function s</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function has the following features: - Master data The concept of flexible uploads now also covers items, subitems, and consolidati on units. <br>- Online data entry The rows in data entry layouts can outline a hierarchy of multiple levels. This enables you to see subtotals (for example, totals items, or partner or subitem t otals) while entering the data. <br>- Data collection from non-SAP software The concept of flexible uploads, which features user-defined data file interface s, now also covers the additional financial data for consolidation of investment

s (changes in investments, changes in equity, equity holdings adjustments) and i nterunit profit or loss. The functions can be used for periodic transfers and fo r legacy data transfers, of which the latter occurs only once. <br>- SAP softwar e integration This feature of enterprise controlling consolidation provides further functions f or setting up the master data and controlling the collection of data into the co nsolidation component:<br> > Generation of an enterprise controlling consolidat ion chart of accounts from a financial statement version of financial accounting general ledger accounting <br> > Generation of enterprise controlling consolida tion subitems from master data in the SAP R/3 transaction components <br> > Ge neration of a group chart of accounts from an enterprise controlling consolidatio n chart of accounts <br> > Reconciliation of the financial accounting general l edger accounting with the totals database of consolidation <br>- Currency transl ation Currency translation provides a user exit, which enables customers to implement custom currency translation keys in addition to the ones available in the standa rd SAP software.<br>- Reporting Reports for all kind of master and customizing data have been included.<br>- Tra nsport tool This tool supports transfers of enterprise controlling consolidation master data and customizing data between different clients or different systems running SAP R/3 software. Its features include the following: <br> > Simple selection of t he objects without the need for technical knowledge about disk storage <br> > Optional automatic environment detection (for example, to transport a consolidat ion unit with all of its methods, or to transport a method with its assigned set s) <br> > Generation of a regular SAP transport request <br>- Copy function This provides easier copying of master data and customizing data between differe nt dimensions (within a client).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The consolidation component enterprise controlling cons olidation is extended by new functions in the areas of master data, online data entry, data collection from non-SAP software, SAP software integration, currency translation, reporting, and transporting of enterprise controlling consolidation data. More enterprise controlling consolidation developments (EC-CS) are introdu ced in the following Development News announcements: <br><br>- EC-CS: Proportion al Consolidation <br>- EC-CS: Elimination of Interunit Profit or Loss in Invento ry <br>- EC-CS: Interactive Excel in Consolidation</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: interactive use o f Microsoft Excel in consolidation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>User-defined reports are characterized as follows: <br ><br>- Interactive reports created with Microsoft Excel enables data to be inser ted from the consolidation totals table into Excel worksheets, in either a summa rized or nonsummarized form.<br>- Values can be displayed with the appropriate d ebit or credit sign for the item and transaction type. <br>- Predefined report f unctions assist your definition of reports by providing hierarchies, sets, and s ingle values for insertion into a sheet. <br>- An interactive report created in Excel can contain both data imported from consolidation and data calculated with in Excel itself by means of formulas. <br>- Standard Excel formatting functions enable you to format your reports flexibly (for example, by applying different c olors or font sizes). <br>- Once data has been imported into an interactive repo rt created in Excel, you can process it further (for example, in a chart). <br>< br>Data can be entered either in a system running SAP R/3 software or in the off line data entry program in enterprise controlling consolidation with a Microsoft Access database: <br><br>- Reported financial data for consolidation can be tran sferred from an interactive Excel report directly into a system running SAP R/3 software. Alternatively, data can be exported to the offline data entry program in enterprise controlling consolidation, enabling subsidiaries without access to

such software to report their data offline. <br>- Data entry forms can be used w ith a combination of databases. You can create a form with data from a system ru nning SAP R/3 software and then use it to enter data into a Microsoft Access dat abase for the offline data entry program in enterprise controlling consolidation. Forms can therefore be created at group headquarters and distributed to subsidi aries without access to such software for use in offline data entry. <br><br>An interactive database connection is characterized as follows: <br><br>- If you ch ange the definition of a report, interactive Excel reports automatically refresh report data as required. For example, if you change the fiscal year of a report , data for the new year is inserted. <br>- You can manually refresh a report at any time to fill it with the latest data. <br>- Automatic refreshing can be temp orarily deactivated.<br><br>With regard to pivot tables, with interactive Excel reports, you can download a data cube from consolidation into a Microsoft Excel pivot table. You can then flexibly rearrange data by using the standard Excel pi vot table functions. <br><br>You can generate a "snapshot" of current report dat a at any time. <br><br>Data entry with Excel has the following features:<br><br> - Definition of offline data entry forms in interactive Excel reports with the s ame formatting and processing functions available for reports <br>- Automatic co nsistency check on transfer of data to the database, through which any errors ar e listed in a log <br>- Data consistency check in test mode, without transfer of data to the database <br>- Validation of data by validation rules in the databa se, which can take place with or without an update of the database <br><br>Data protection is characterized as follows: <br><br>- Interactive eports created wit h Excel can be protected against undesired changes by means of a digital signatu re and password. <br>- Report data can still be updated from the database, even if the report is protected. The selection data in the digital signature is simpl y modified.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new function for creating interactive Excel report s is available in enterprise controlling consolidation as of SAP R/3 release 4.5B . Interactive Excel reports link data in the consolidation component with Micros oft Excel, enabling you to create reports and data entry forms in the spreadshee t program, fill them with consolidation data, and format them by using Excel s wi de range of formatting functions. A connection between Excel and the source data base enables reports to be automatically refreshed whenever they are changed.</s pan></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: proportional cons olidation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The reported financial data and the standardizing entr ies are apportioned in local currency, transaction currency, and group currency. The data is reported and standardized at full amounts. The apportionment does n ot modify the data, and so the data remains available for auditing purposes. <br ><br>The elimination of interunit payables and receivables and interunit revenue and expense allows you to reclassify minority interest in the payables or recei vables, and revenue or expense, to special financial statement items. The reclas sification, which is triggered by the apportionment, is posted in separate docum ent line items. <br><br>The elimination of interunit profit and loss in inventor y only eliminates the proportional profit and loss. The posting document is divi ded into two parts. The first part eliminates the entire interunit profit or los s, and the second adjusts the document according to the proportion. Reclassifica tions also generate an adjustment according to the proportion.<br><br>All of the activities of consolidation of investments take the apportionment into account. Minority interest in investee equity and annual net income is calculated in dea lings with multilevel investments in a proportionally consolidated company. <br> <br>The reporting functions disclose the apportionment adjustments for the group . This means that a given consolidation unit can be included in multiple consoli dation groups through different accounting techniques (for example, the purchase

, proportional, or equity method). The reports can separately list the apportion ment adjustments made against the automatic consolidation entries.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, enterprise controlling consoli dation features the proportional method of consolidation of enterprises, in addi tion to the purchase and equity methods.. Midyear increases and reductions of th e proportion of ownership are supported by all functions (interunit elimination, elimination of inter-unit profit or loss, reclassification, consolidation of in vestments).<br><br>Any percentage rate can be used for the proportion. Two-sided eliminations distinguish between the variants minimum apportionment and product apportionment.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Data transfer</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Data transfer performance is improved with this functi on. Large amounts of transaction data are being transferred more frequently into the database of the executive information software. In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, th e following measures have been taken to improve data transfer performance: <br>< br>- Optimization of the main memory requirement<br>- Optimization of the CPU lo ad <br>- Compression while importing files<br><br>With data compression, the dat a sets are put into a buffer on arrival and then forwarded to various receivers. The advantage of this method, in comparison with the earlier procedure (in whic h a transfer run was initiated for each receiver), is that the strain is taken o ff the network as a performance-critical factor. Double manual entry of the same data for different receivers is no longer necessary.<br><br>The flexible upload is an enhancement in this function. Using the flexible upload, which was introd uced with SAP R/3 4.0B, you can design worksheets of any structure in the execut ive information software by simply highlighting headers, data areas, and key are as. Then you can load these into the database of the executive information softw are. This technique is typically used to transfer Microsoft Excel based reporting data from decentralized business units into the centralized dataset of the exec utive information softrware at corporate headquarters. The number of rows or col umns in the received worksheets cannot always be predicted and is therefore vari able. This eventuality is taken into consideration and implemented in the flexib le upload in SAP R/3 4.5B. Furthermore, changing the layout of existing workshee ts is simplified. <br><br>This function also includes an interface of the execut ive information software with the project software. In SAP R/3 4.5B, data collec tion from the project software into the executive information software is being set up. This makes all significant characteristics and key figures from the proj ect software available for management reporting. You can select and define chara cteristics and key figures from several projects and project structure plan elem ents. Logistic key figures, accounting key figures, progress key figures, and st atistical key figures concerning projects are available. The data can be summari zed at any selected level within the project structure plan hierarchy.</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>The developments in the data transfer area are focused on the following areas:<br><br>- Improved data transfer performance <br>- Enhan cement in the flexible upload <br>- Interface of the executive information softw are to the project software</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, characteristic attributes c an be displayed in the lead column of the executive information software. This f unction enhances the existing display facilities in the lead column. Until this release, you could define only the presentation format of the key and name of a characteristic value. You could use characteristic attributes only as navigation

al attributes in a report. Now you can also display additional fields from the c haracteristic master data tables in the lead column. Using a new dialog box, you can display all the attributes for a particular characteristic value. This func tion is also available in the detail list.<br><br>When executing a report, you c an now enter "select options" on the selection screen. Entry of several single v alues and intervals for a given variable is supported. More comprehensive restri ctions are not supported. This function has no effect on the form definition. He re you can continue to enter several single values by using the "More" function. <br><br>Technical report information is available for each report variant. This is especially suitable for the administration of running time critical reports. E xamples include information on report run times and table sizes.<br><br>With SAP R/3 4.5B, you can sort the comment list for transaction data with the executive information software. This simplifies the displaying, administration, and creat ion of comments. You can also change the assignment of comments to characteristi c values.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The developments in the data transfer area are focused on the following areas:<br><br>- Display attributes <br>- Select options <br>Technical report information <br>- Sorting the comment list</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Average balance ledger for profit center accounting</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The average balance ledger lets you update average inv entory balances for actual data. It is a parallel ledger that stores average bal ances by period in summarized form.<br><br>Average balances are calculated as fo llows:<br><br>(Acquisition or sale) * (remaining days in the period)/(days in th e period)<br><br>You can choose whether to calculate the average balance on the basis of the posting date or the value date.<br><br>In reporting with the use of report writer, you can select the following key figures to analyze average inve ntory balances:<br><br>- Average balance in local currency (which calculates ave rage balance for period)<br>- Average balance in group currency (which calculate s average balance for period)<br>- Average balance in transaction currency (whic h calculates average balance for period) <br>- Average balance in local currency (which calculates average balance at beginning of year) <br>- Average balance i n group currency (which calculates average balance at beginning of year) <br>- A verage balance in transaction currency (which calculates average balance at begi nning of year)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Average inventories are particularly useful when oppor tunity costs are to be calculated for inventories (for example, non interest-bear ing inventories such as homes). Many corporations inventories fluctuate dramatically. Because of this, it is pos sible that at the end of the period, many materials are being transported or are in the process of being sent to stock from production. However, because reporti ng is usually performed up to the end of the period, the inventory values calcul ated do not actually reflect the period being analyzed.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Decentralized profit center accounting (application li nk enabling)<br><br></span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions support decentralized profit c enter accounting in a distributed software environment:<br><br>- Send line items to the home software of the profit center Each profit center can be assigned to home software. All the postings made to a profit center are then sent to that profit center s home software. Detailed analy ses can be performed on the profit center in its home software, because all the

transaction data and all line items are available there.<br>- Periodic, summariz ed transfer of transaction data to the central installation The data for all profit centers can be merged in summarized form in the central software. You can perform groupwide reporting on profit centers by using a summa rized database.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Application link enabling (ALE) has been implemented i n profit center accounting to enable you to decentralize this function.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Drill-down reporting in profit center accounting</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are available for drill-down r eports and forms for reading the summary record table:<br><br>- Execute <br>- Cr eate <br>- Display <br>- Change<br><br>The standard software contains a number o f standard reports you can copy to create your own reports.<br><br>You can also add drill-down reports to the report tree in your information software.</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Drill-down reporting is a flexible reporting tool that is already used in many application components, such as project software. The a dvantage of drill-down reporting over the report writer or report painter is tha t you can change the structure and display of the report when you execute it by drilling down through a number of characteristics. <br><br>In addition to the ex isting report writer or report painter reports, you can now define and run drill -down reports in profit center accounting.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: Elimination of in terunit profit or loss in inventory</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The elimination of interunit profit or loss in invento ry is based on the information from the inventory managing consolidation unit an d the supplying consolidation unit. Trade relationships can be portrayed at the product group level. The term product group is freely chosen within consolidatio n and is merely used in conjunction with the elimination of interunit profit or loss in inventory.<br><br>The additional financial data is used to determine the book value of the asset and the group production cost. The standardized financi al data is used for the calculations. The calculation of group production costs takes into account the delivery cost that must be capitalized, which is reported by the inventory managing consolidation unit. <br><br>The interunit profit or l oss is the difference between the book value of the asset and the group producti on cost. The interunit profit or loss already takes the accumulated depreciation into account.<br><br>A positive difference represents an interunit profit that needs to be eliminated. In this case, an adjustment is made to the lower of the two values or to the value to be applied from the group s point of view.<br><br>A negative difference represents an interunit loss, which is eliminated by means of an adjustment to the higher valued group production costs. If desired, the el imination of interunit losses can be waived if the assets were sold at market va lues that are lower than the group production costs. <br><br>Interunit loss situ ations take into account the principles of prudence and lowest value. This conte xt distinguishes between two categories of valuation allowances: <br><br>- Perma nent valuation allowances that underlie the principles of prudence and lowest va lue (for example, unscheduled depreciation) <br>- Valuation allowances that are not affected by the principles of prudence and lowest value (for example, flat-r ate depreciation) <br> The automatic postings adjust the balance sheet item by the amount of the interu nit profit or loss and offset the entry in the income statement. The offsetting

entry in the income statement automatically adjusts retained earnings or annual net income, as well as deferred taxes.<br><br>Typically, currency translation tr anslates the asset values through the use of the current exchange rate, whereas the revenue and expense items in the income statement are translated with monthl y average exchange rates. For this reason, the elimination of interunit profit o r loss in inventory can separately post and disclose translation differences.<br ><br>When a cost-of-sales percentage rate is specified for the supplying consoli dation unit, the cost-of-sales portion is automatically transferred to a financi al statement item the user specifies (for example, production costs).<br><br>In a first consolidation, the interunit profit or loss of the prior period can be a utomatically posted at the time of the first consolidation.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Interunit profit or loss, which needs to be eliminated , can arise when current assets are sold by one company of a corporate group to another company within the same group. Interunit profit or loss of the prior per iod can be automatically posted at the time of the first consolidation. <br><br> Automatic entries are used to eliminate interunit profit or loss. The entries ad just the balance sheet item for the amount of the interunit profit or loss and t ypically post to an offsetting item in the income statement.<br><br>The eliminat ion of interunit profit or loss in inventory in enterprise controlling consolidat ion extends the existing functions of financial accounting legal consolidation. T he new functions are as follows: <br><br>- Differentiation of accumulated deprec iation in interunit loss situations with regard to the prudence concept and the lowest value principle <br>- Posting of currency translation differences</span>< /td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling business planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, functions are provided for modeling planning structures, for the support of various planning strategies, fo r the coordination of the planning process, for the support of planners with pla nning tools, for reporting purposes, and for the integration of planning.</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>With enterprise controlling business planning, SAP prov ides a planning component with which you can produce an enterprise-wide, uniform business plan at a high level of aggregation. Sacrificing the detail and fine-t uning of the planning functions in the SAP R/3 transaction functions, enterprise controlling business planning focuses on the relatively smooth production of a b usiness plan that is consistent across group and enterprise levels. The increasingly dynamic business environment and tougher competition for custom ers and capital has resulted in such developments as globalization, decentraliza tion, and information networking. These developments are presenting more new cha llenges for the enterprise. Efficient enterprise planning therefore plays a crit ical role in management. Because of the increasingly complex structures of group s and enterprises, appropriate enterprise planning tools are necessary to enable goal-directed and foresighted action.<br><br>Flexible planning views enable, fo r example, organizational subplans for business area and group views; functional subplans for sales, costs, capital investment, and finance views; and a plan pr ofit-and-loss statement and plan balance sheet according to a management and sha reholder view. You can produce various subplans, both quantity and value, and al so integrate these within the framework of a uniform corporate key figure system .<br><br>As well as comprehensive functions for configuring the complete enterpr ise planning model with its multidimensional views and key figure systems, enter prise controlling business planning offers a range of facilities to improve the e fficiency of the planning process. These facilities include communication betwee n the planners through e-mail; the keeping of private planning information throu gh a high level of integration with Microsoft Excel; the support of top-down, bo ttom-up, and mixed top-down/bottom-up planning rounds; comprehensive comment fac

ilities for plan data; and integrated functions for decentralized data entry and data transfer from legacy software. <br><br>Individual planning layouts for int eractive planning of refined planning models and a more comprehensive authorizat ion protection have also been taken into consideration in the range of functions in enterprise controlling business planning. The efficiency of the actual planni ng activity is increased through the use of planning tools such as copying funct ions, conversion functions (for example, "plan98" = "actual97" + 10%), seasonal distributions, automatic planning runs, and comprehensive forecasting methods. E nterprise controlling business planning also contains "situation planning," with which you can simulate various business situations and perform what-if analyses to weigh up decision alternatives on future projects.<br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the data structures on which enterprise controlling business planning is ba sed are integrated with those of the enterprise controlling executive information system. Therefore, you can use all the reporting functions available in the exe cutive information system for example, navigation and exception reporting in t he business planning database. As a result of the high level of integration betw een the executive information system and business planning and their identical " look and feel," the introduction of both components in the total enterprise cont rolling context is eased significantly.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: consolidation enh ancements</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Attributes of consolidation units are as follows:<br>< br>- You can define additional attributes (special characteristics) for consolid ation units. For each of these attributes, a value table, text table, and a corr esponding maintenance function are automatically generated.<br>- Attribute value s are assigned to consolidation units for a period in time and version. You make this assignment in the consolidation unit's master data.<br>- The country of a consolidation unit can be used as a standard attribute that is not dependent on time or a version. The company code, business area, and profit center attributes are available for integrated consolidation units.<br>- Attributes can be used a s selection criteria in interunit elimination, reclassification, and drill-down reporting and for the report writer.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP has made many usability improvements to the consol idation component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: customer-defined additional fields in consolidation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>All methods of data collection (manual data entry, int egration with data-supplying applications, interfaces to non-SAP software) and m anual postings support breakdowns of transaction data by the customer-defined ac count assignments.<br><br>The screenshot on the next page shows an example of th e posting transaction:<br><br>- The additional account assignments can be used i n validation rules.<br>- Translation differences incurred by currency translatio ns are broken down by the additional account assignments.<br>- Currency-related and other elimination differences incurred by intercompany eliminations are brok en down by the additional account assignments.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>When implementing SAP R/3 software, you can enhance th e transaction database (documents and totals records) of enterprise controlling c onsolidation with your customer-defined account assignments. Some applications a re product groups, regions, divisions, or distribution channels. These assignmen ts are subassignments of financial statement items such as subitem, partner unit , transaction currency, and year or period of acquisition. Although the subitems feature variable characteristics, such as the transaction type or region, which

is determined by the subitem category, the additional fields provide simultaneo us breakdowns of the same financial statement items into multiple user-defined a ccount assignments. The additional account assignments can represent entities of other SAP software or user-defined entities. For user-defined entities, enterpr ise controlling consolidation provides functions for updating the corresponding t ext descriptions and hierarchies.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhanced usability with parallel valuation approaches/ transfer prices</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In overhead cost controlling, you have a flexible choi ce of calculation base.<br><br>At present, you can store up to three actual vers ions in controlling when you use transfer pricing, because the software valuates all transactions from the legal, group, and profit center viewpoints in paralle l. The valuation approach in controlling version 000 is referred to as the "oper ational valuation approach." Up to and including SAP R/3 release 4.5, the base v alues for calculating markups were taken from the operational valuation approach in controlling. In the new release, you can make a setting in customizing to ch oose the valuation approach from which the base values are determined. This prov ides you with greater flexibility in selecting the operational valuation approac h.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The transfer price solution enables you to define your own valuation approaches from a legal, group, or profit center point of view, t hus also enabling you to valuate and analyze the entire value-added process with in a group or company from multiple viewpoints. This makes enterprise controllin g more transparent and lets you more effectively manage areas of responsibility within your organization.<br><br>The functions are being enhanced particularly t o simplify implementation and usability. Reporting is also being improved, and n ew functions for calculating transfer price markups are now available.</span></t d> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability in customizingfor profit center accounting</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The assignment monitor has been improved. Using the as signment monitor, you can check and make assignments of original objects such as cost centers, orders, and projects to profit centers directly from profit cente r accounting.<br><br>The transactions are being converted to the ABAP list viewe r, which provides better and more flexible functions, such as for sorting lists. <br><br>For time-dependent account assignment objects (cost centers, business pr ocesses), the corresponding selection screens are being extended to include the selection criterion key date. At the same time, the corresponding lists are bein g expanded to include a display of the validity period of the object.<br><br>The transport functions have also been enhanced. In profit center accounting, all c hanges to customizing settings are recorded automatically in transport requests. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Profit center accounting is based on the tools of the special purpose ledgers, although it is an independent application. It was possi ble to apply many of the functions of the special purpose ledgers to profit cent er accounting. Profit center accounting has evolved from release to release how ever, with new and improved functionality. It was therefore necessary to complet ely redesign the structure of the implementation guide, the functions, and the c ustomizing interface, to make them simpler and easier to understand. This result ed in a large number of minor changes in customizing, not all of which can be me ntioned here.

Below is a list of functions for which both improved usability and extended func tions have been realized.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability in profit center accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Actual document entry has been enhanced. The new relea se allows you to enter actual documents by using the same planning processor use r interface as that used for entering plan data. It is possible to design indivi dual entry screens (layouts) for different posting procedures (such as simple po sting documents or transfer postings) or for displaying or changing balances for profit and loss accounts, balance sheet accounts, and statistical key figures t hrough the layout maintenance functions. When displaying or changing balances, y ou can use the full functionality of the planning processor, including the use o f row and column formulas.<br><br>The Microsoft Excel upload function for actual data provides an interface for transferring external data.<br><br>For controlli ng area-dependent allocations, when you previously defined allocations such as a ssessment or distribution in profit center accounting, it was necessary to defin e a cycle for each individual company code. In the new release, you can define a llocations in profit center accounting for the entire controlling area.<br><br>T here are additions to period-end partner. The period-end partner has been availa ble since SAP R/3 release 4.5B as a tool for monitoring periodic tasks in SAP R/ 3 software. This release already provided the capability of monitoring allocatio n cycles (assessment, distribution) from profit center accounting through the pe riod-end partner.<br><br>In the new release, the period-end partner s monitor als o includes the periodic transfer of balance sheet items to profit center account ing. Using the period-end partner, you are thus able to determine whether transf ers to profit center accounting have been started or check the parameters used f or such transfers.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As far as usability is concerned, the new release enta ils the redesign of the profit center accounting interface, as well as the help and documentation texts for a number of functions. The functions themselves are also being redesigned to be more efficient and user friendly.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise organization</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The enterprise organization is made up of organization al units, to which you can assign profit centers, cost centers, controlling area s, company codes, and so on.<br><br>The redesigned user interface is divided int o a locator area and a workspace. The object manager, or the audit list, can be displayed in the locator area. The workspace (the main work area) is divided int o an overview and a detail area. The screen layout is as follows:<br><br>- The o bject manager is used to search for objects by certain criteria. The objects fou nd through the search are displayed in a list or tree structure. The list remain s on the screen when an object is selected.<br>- The audit list helps identify n onassigned profit centers.<br>- The overview area represents the actual work are a. The enterprise organization is displayed here.<br>- The detail area displays master data of the objects displayed in the overview area, which can also be edi ted here. <br><br>With regard to navigation, the objects that can be selected (f or example, profit centers) are displayed in the object manager. You select an o bject by double-clicking it. The object is then displayed in context (for exampl e, a profit center group with the profit centers that belong to it) in the overv iew area. If an organizational unit is selected from this structure, master data information is displayed in the detail area on various tab pages. You can chang e, create, or delete this master data.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As part of the EnjoySAP project, a new GUI is being de veloped for modeling the structure of your organization. You can maintain multip

le organizational units of different types in one tool, as well as their relatio nship with each other. Profit centers are integrated completely into this enterp rise organization.<br><br>Standard and alternative hierarchies of profit centers can be generated from the enterprise organization.<br><br>The following enhance ments have been made:<br><br>- Visualization of relationships between organizati onal units of different types<br>- Single point of entry for master data mainten ance of profit centers and other objects<br> For customers not using the GUI, the new tool s interface replaces the old standa rd hierarchy maintenance. Its design enables clearer structuring of the profit c enter hierarchy and easier maintenance.<br><br>You can still use the list-based maintenance of the profit center standard hierarchy.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Formula planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With formula planning, you can use mathematical depend encies to plan your profit centers. You can store these mathematical dependencie s as formulas in templates, which are independent of the actual profit centers. This makes it possible for profit centers that share a similar structure to use the same formulas.<br><br>You can plan manually with formula planning. It is par ticularly suitable for planning accounts and statistical key figures whose value s are calculated for a number of profit centers that use the same logic. An exam ple of this is planning personnel costs, in which various types of costs are der ived from the number of employees, planned as statistical key figures.<br> <br>F or each profit center, you can create a template for accounts and statistical ke y figures in the profit center master record. You can also define subtemplates, which can then be referenced in the main templates.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Formula planning allows you to calculate values for st atistical key figures, profit and loss accounts, and inventory accounts for prof it centers.<br><br>Templates are created for accounts and statistical key figure s, and are then assigned to profit centers in master data maintenance. Statistic al key figures, profit and loss accounts, and inventory accounts can be used as parameters for the formulas. You can select additional functions in customizing. </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Schedule manager</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The schedule manager enables the following:<br><br>- D efinition of complex procedures<br>- Scheduling of procedures<br>- Execution of procedures<br>- Checking of results<br>- Easier location of errors<br>- Efficien t postprocessing of objects with errors, with work lists<br><br>Complex procedur es are displayed in SAP R/3 software and are accelerated. Several typical proced ures are set as defaults for customers.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In accounting, certain tasks occur periodically (month ly, weekly, daily, and so on). Such tasks can contain many objects that need pro cessing. These tasks (for example, period-end closing in profit center accountin g) must be executed in a certain order and at certain times. Previously, you wer e supported in only one activity when executing these tasks. You had to manually call up several transactions to schedule activities, check result lists, perfor m error analysis, and postprocess objects with errors.<br><br>Until this release , in profit center accounting, you could use the schedule manager to display onl y the tasks to be executed. Now, however, all schedule manager functions are ava ilable in profit center accounting.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Data collection for consolidation through the Internet </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Consolidation unit and consolidation group iare among the global parameters.<br><br>The global parameters have been extended by consol idation group and consolidation unit, optional parameters that are interpreted a s the area of responsibility of a user. The following applies when a user sets e ither of these parameters:<br><br>- In the hierarchy of consolidation units and groups, the focus is set automatically according to the global parameters. Howev er, you can also change the focus to see the whole hierarchy and even store this focus as the new user default.<br>- When the data or consolidation monitor is s tarted, the focus is set automatically according to the global parameters. You m ay set a more detailed focus, but you may not enlarge the focus. Users responsib le for only one consolidation unit see a special data monitor screen that lists the tasks in rows. The status icon and additional information (such as number of warnings and errors, date of last run, and so on) are displayed for each task.< br>- When enterprise controlling consolidation functions from the menu are starte d, the global parameters for group and unit are proposed as defaults. Drill-down reporting has corresponding global variables.<br>- You may change the global pa rameters group and unit only to the groups and units for which they are authoriz ed. Resetting the group or unit to space requires the authorization for all grou ps or units. This is to prevent users from changing their area of responsibility as prescribed by corporate headquarters.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Reduction of closing time and improvement of data qual ity are two key requirements in today s statutory and managerial corporate accoun ting. One very promising approach to fulfilling these requirements is the delega tion of responsibility to the subsidiaries of a group by granting them direct ac cess to the consolidation software.<br><br>A subsidiary might take responsibilit y for data collection and checking of data according to the group rules ( quality at source ) or even run certain steps of the consolidation process, such as post ing of standardization entries or currency translation. A subgroup might take re sponsibility for all or part of the consolidation steps (such as interunit elimi nation) on its level in the hierarchy.<br><br>With the GUI for HTML, SAP provide s a browser-based, installation-free access to any system running SAP software. Hence, the technical requirements for the situation just described are available even at subsidiaries, which would not need to install the GUI for Microsoft Win dows. This enhancement reduces the enterprise controlling consolidation workload of an accountant at a subsidiary or subgroup.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enterprise controlling consolidation: usability improve ments</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Hierarchy maintenance for consolidation units and grou ps is characterized as follows:<br><br>- The hierarchy maintenance of consolidat ions units and groups now entails the use of a hierarchy tree. This provides a M icrosoft Windows like user interface with functions such as expand/compress, sizi ng, scrolling, and drag-and-drop function of consolidation units within the hier archy.<br>- Hierarchy maintenance and master data maintenance have been combined in a single split screen: the hierarchy is displayed on the left side of the sc reen. When you double-click a consolidation unit or group, that object s master d ata appears immediately on the right side of the screen.<br><br>Maintenance of h ierarchy and master data for financial statement items is characterized as follo ws:<br><br>- The interface for the maintenance of financial statement items has been redesigned to include tabs, which allow easier navigation to the desired da ta (such as item properties, item texts).<br>- Likewise, the hierarchy maintenan ce of items now entails the use of hierarchy trees and integrates the item maste r data on the same screen.<br><br>Master data maintenance for subitems is charac terized as follows:<br><br>- The interface for subitem maintenance now includes tabs, which allow easier navigation to the desired data (such as su-item propert

ies, subitems texts).<br>- For better access, all subitem categories, along with all of their subitems, are displayed in a two-level hierarchy tree. When you do uble-click a subitem, the subitem s master data is displayed to the right of the hierarchy. Note that the definition of subitem hierarchies does not make use of the new interface technology.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Many usability improvements have been made to the cons olidation component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Individual value adjustment and discount</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can carry out flat-rate value adjustment and disco unting for open customer items (during preparations for the balance sheet). During flat-rate value adjustment, you can use a valuation program that searches for all the appropriate customer items and carries out valuation according to a particular algorithm. Using this same program, you can also discount long-term receivables (in which case the net present value of the receivables is determine d). These valuations are created in a proposal run and can be manually postprocessed . After transfer, the results can be viewed when documents are displayed. In the standard software, the following functions are supported: - Discounting of longer -term receivables - Flat-rate value adjustment according to the countries to which the items relat e and their lateness You can create further valuation procedures by using self-defined business trans action events. Open receivables are then sorted and reclassified on the basis of the receivable s for which valuation adjustment has been carried out.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In addition to foreign currency valuation, you can now also have discount on long-term receivables and value adjustment of unsecured r eceivables (based on country provision for contingent losses or arrears in payme nt history). Receivables that are adjusted then serve as the basis for later sor ted listing and regrouping of open items for the balance sheet.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New open interfaces (business transaction events) in f inancial accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the areas listed below, you can intervene in proces sing at the following points: <br><br>- Central check routines Implementation of alternative check algorithms when checking bank key, bank numb er, bank account number, international location number, Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number, persistent object reference number, Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT) code, and tax codes <br>- Electro nic banking <br> > Analysis of note to payee data per processing industry<br> > Definition of own methods<br> > Ability to determine business partner from payment advice notes<br>- Archiving document objects <br> > Archiving of tabl es within partner or customer name range (or both) in line with the relevant sta ndard objects<br> > Adding interfaces when registering new tables for the arch ives (carries out check on whether an object can be archived during archiving)<b r> > Exits during reloading and in the deletion program</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.0B, a new infrastructure enable

s you to enhance functions without needing to modify the standard software. In f inancial accounting, about 100 interfaces have been created within this infrastr ucture. These can be controlled through a subscribe mechanism and are divided in to publish-and-subscribe and process interfaces.<br><br>More detailed technical information can be found in Development News on the functions that were develope d for SAP R/3 4.0B (in which they are referred to under open financial accountin g).<br><br>SAP R/3 4.5B contains an increased number of interfaces. Within finan cial accounting, enhancements have been made in electronic banking, in document and master data archiving, and for central check routines. These interfaces mean that processes within the new subareas are now as flexible as they are in gener al ledger, accounts receivable, and accounts payable.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Retrofit project: Korea</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To comply with Korean tax law requirements, two new or ganizational structures have been created: - Business place Part of a company that is under the jurisdiction of one tax office - Section code Part of a business place - represents a government office</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In 1994, SAP started to analyze the requirements of th e Korean market. At the end of 1995, the first Korean localized version of SAP R /3 was released. Currently, a country version for Korea is available as an add-on solution for SA P R/3 releases 3.0D and 3.0F.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Transfer of trip accounting results to financial accou nting and cost aAccounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The travel management function collects the trip accou nting results that are to be transferred in a posting run and converts them into trip transfer documents (prima notas). It then checks the trip transfer documen ts and forwards them to accounting, where </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the past, the travel management application compone nt used a batch input interface to transfer trip accounting results to the finan cial accounting application component. With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, this interface has been replaced by th</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The basis for the travel planning component is the spe cific company s travel policy. The travel policy is set up in the form of profile s in SAP R/3. Each employee is assigned one of these profiles. The software chec ks the entries for planned trips against these profiles</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The travel planning component makes it possible to pla n and book business trips and to make reservations with computer support. You ca n now thanks to integration with the travel accounting component carry out all business and administration</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Transfer of assets between business areas, cost center s, and profit centers</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>There is a new customizing setting: "time-independent management of organizational units." Setting this flag has the following results : <br><br>- The business area is now modifiable directly in the asset master rec ord. In conjunction with any changes, the software automatically creates a gener al ledger account document. <br>- A general ledger account document is created w hen a cost center is changed with a resulting change of the profit center.</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 4.5B, you can change the business area di rectly in the asset master record; the software automatically creates a general ledger account document. When you make a change to a cost center in an asset master record and this chang e causes the profit center to change, the software automatically creates a gener al ledger account document. This document ensures consistency in any balance she et type reports for profit center accounting. Until SAP R/3 release 4.5B, changing the business area in the asset master recor d was possible only if the "business area balance sheets" indicator was not set in financial accounting customizing. If this indicator was set and you wished to assign the fixed asset to a different business area, you had to create a new as set master record and transfer the original asset to it.<br><br>Changing the cos t center in the asset master record has always been possible. However, until SAP R/3 4.5B, the change produced only a change document, rather than a posting doc ument. Assets can be assigned only indirectly to profit centers, by means of the ir cost center. Until this release, if you wished to conduct balance sheet type reporting at the profit center level, there were no transfer documents showing t he transfer of assets between profit centers.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Connecting accounts receivable and accounts payable to drill-down reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Drill-down reporting enables user-friendly functions f or navigating in the dataset (such as proceeding to next level, hiding a level, or viewing detail list or drill-down list). These include drilling down to a cus tomer s or vendor s line items. SAP graphics, SAPmail, and Microsoft Excel</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can also use the drilldown reporting methods for defining and presenting reports in the accounts recei vable and accounts payable components. All tables and functions in these compone nts are set up so that you can access them separately</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cross company code dunning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use cross company code dunning to combine overd ue items from several different company codes in one dunning run. The overdue it ems from accounts that exist in several company codes are dunned with one dunnin g notice. This eliminates the need to send a customer a separate dunning notice for each company code.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B enables you to dun your business partners across several company codes. Cross company code dunning is particularly beneficial for companies whose internal organization includes several company c odes (for example, divisions) but that are seen externally as one organization.< /span></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Dual control for sensitive master data (customers and vendors)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can define the required sensitive fields for the c ustomer or vendor master record in a customizing table. When a sensitive field i s changed, the relevant customer or vendor account is blocked. This block is rem oved by the second person responsible in a separate transaction. Once the second person confirms the change, the payment run block is deactivated. If the second person responsible cannot confirm the change made to the master data, the maste r data object is returned to the original accounting clerk with explanatory text requesting that the master data be either changed or reset.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B enables you to control changes ma de to the customer and vendor master data using dual control. You can define mas ter data fields as sensitive. If the responsible accounting clerk changes a sens itive field in the customer or vendor master record, such as alternative payee, the account is blocked for the payment run until a second person confirms the ch anges. A new transaction is now available for this confirmation.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financial accounting alternative payment currency</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the SAP R/3 software, line items posted in one curr ency can be paid in a different (alternative) currency when line items are paid manually. Payers in certain countries and industries also require this facility during automatic payment transactions so that they can make payments in any avai lable given currency.<br><br>As a rule, payers and the vendors agree either on w hat constitutes acceptable alternative currencies or on the payment currency and the payment amount per transaction. Before SAP R/3 release 4.5A, payments in an alternative currency could be created and posted only manually. As of SAP R/3 4 .5A, it is now possible to enter a payment currency that differs from the docume nt currency in the open item. You can also specify an amount equivalent to the g ross amount of the item in the payment currency.<br><br>This payment currency is supported in both accounts payable and accounts receivable.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As of SAP R/3 release 4.5A, it is possible to enter a payment currency that differs from the document currency in the open item. You c an also specify an amount equivalent to the gross amount of the item in the paym ent. Before this release, payments in an alternative currency could be created a nd posted only manually. </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Creating assets from a purchase order</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5A, you can create an asset from within the transactions for purchase orders or purchase requisitions. This asset is then the asset to which account assignment is made from the purchase order.< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Until this release, the ordering process for fixed ass ets in the SAP R/3 software consisted of two steps. You had to create an asset f rom within the asset accounting component before creating the purchase order in the purchasing component, entering the fixed asset as the account assignment obj ect.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Using BAPI for asset inventory in non-SAP software</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>There are new interfaces in the BAPI programming inter face that make it possible to link SAP R/3 asset accounting software to non-SAP software. These interfaces are especially useful when you carry out your fixed a ssets inventory by using non-SAP software. The interfaces enables you to process the information, which was gathered in the non-SAP software, in SAP R/3 asset a ccounting.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 3.0 provides a function for printing b ar code labels for assets. You attach the labels to your fixed assets to facilit ate subsequent physical inventory. You need non-SAP instruments to read the bar codes and non-SAP software to manage the data.<br><br>SAP R/3 4.5B gives you the option of using the new interfaces in the BAPI programming interface to provide inventory data to your non-SAP software. The inventory data gathered in the non -SAP software can be transferred directly to the SAP R/3 asset accounting compon ent through the interfaces. </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Asset transfer between software and with mass transfer functions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can process intercompany asset transfers by using mass processing procedures. The workflow procedures in the SAP R/3 software are used. The same procedures are already being used for mass retirement. The basic procedure for mass transfer is therefore largely the same as for mass retirement . It is also possible to carry out intercompany asset transfers across siftware boundaries. This cross-system asset transfer is made possible through applicatio n/s < lp ia nn k>< e/ nt ad b> ling (ALE) technology. <td align=left valign=top>In earlier releases, SAP R/3 enabled only the transfer of single assets within the same logical software. The process of asset transfe r is now much faster within one single type of software, as well as across softw are bounderies.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cash journal accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>User-friendly navigation, data entry, and data display on one screen enable the following:<br><br>- Individual maintenance of multiple cash journals<br>- Easy reconciliation of balances with physical amount in cash <br>- Comprehensive cash administration (handling of receipts and payments), whi ch includes the following activities:<br> > Saving journal entries (parking)<br > > Posting journal entries to general ledger accounts at the touch of a button <br> > Printing receipts and thus avoiding the need to manually write receipts< br> > Printing the journal for documentation purposes</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>A new journal has been introduced in general ledger fo r managing cash on hand. The cash journal significantly reduces the time needed to process cash movements and enables you to monitor them flexibly. You can use the journal function independently of other accounting posting transactions.</sp an></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in fixed-asset reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality established the following: - Connection to the former SAP Business Information Warehouse (SAP BW) component

(now part of SAP NetWeaver) In SAP R/3 release 1.2, SAP BW provides tools for reporting on fixed assets. The delivery includes InfoSources, data extraction programs, InfoCubes, and sample SAP BW queries. These tools enabled you to load information from financial accou nting asset accounting installations periodically to SAP BW and report on this in formation with SAP BW tools. SAP R/3 3.0D, 3.0F, 3.1H, 4.0B, and 4.5B and the ne w release are supported as source software. All fields provided in the InfoSourc es and InfoObjects can be reported on. You can report in single asset master rec ords (main numbers and subnumbers). The data extraction program also provides in formation on asset transactions (line items).<br>- Connection to ABAP list viewe r Multiple asset reports have been linked to the ABAP list viewer. This tool enabl es you to dynamically display additional fields in reports and to total and sort displayed fields. The display length of the fields can be changed. Microsoft Ex cel download is supported for single-asset lists and summary reports.<br>- New a sset value display The asset value display is enhanced by the use of tabs. It displays values at fi scal year start, transactions, and values at fiscal year end. Depreciation param eters and simulation functions are embedded more smoothly in this function.<br>User fields in reporting You were able to define user fields for the asset master record in SAP R/3 relea se 4.5 by using append structures assigned to the current master data tables. No w you can report on these fields using user-defined ABAP query reports. In repor ts that use the ABAP list viewer for display, you can show the contents of these fields dynamically.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multiple enhancements have been made to asset accounti ng reporting. These enhancements include the following:<br><br>- Connection to t he former SAP Business Information Warehouse component (now part of SAP NetWeave r)<br>- Connection to ABAP list viewer<br>- New asset value display<br>- User fi elds in reporting</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Posting transactions for general ledger accounts and v endor invoices</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new entry transactions for general ledger and acco unts payable provide the most important input fields on one screen.<br><br>Once you have called up one of these transactions, you can start navigating from a tr ee structure on the left side of the screen. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The design of the SAP R/3 software posting transaction s in the general ledger and in accounts payable has been revised. The aim of the se changes is to enable you to make postings more quickly and easily and with as little training as possible.<br><br>This new function offers the following user -friendly enhancements:<br> - Single-screen transaction without loss of context<br>- Ergonomic user interfac es<br>- Uniform dialogue for parking and entering documents<br>- User-specific e diting options<br>- Pool of entry variants, account assignment templates, and he ld documents</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements in fixed-asset accounting</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>Microsoft Excel based legacy data transfer and the BAPI .pM ri oc gro as mo mf it ngEx ic ne tl erw fo ar ck esh se ue pt ps orc tan thn eow dab te a u ls oe ad directly as input files for the ass et legacy data transfer. For legacy data transfer, BAPI can be used to load the input file to SAP R/3 software. In addition, the legacy data transfer program (R AALTD01) can now be fed through the use of the SAP data transfer workbench. This

tool lets you easily view and modify input files.<br><br>There are new maintena nce functions for depreciation calculation. They have been implemented within th e customizing functionality of the financial accounting asset accounting software . The goal is to separate the technical attributes that are required for depreci ation calculation from the business-related attributes. The technical attributes are assigned to the calculation key that is defined as client dependent. The bu siness-related attributes are grouped together into methods, which are then stor ed in tables that are dependent on the chart of depreciation. This new structure leads to a large reduction in the number of depreciation keys delivered. For ex ample, keys for luxury cars made in the United States can now be updated more ea sily, as can depreciation keys with annual percentage rates for depreciation of buildings in Germany.<br><br>Until this release, you did not become aware in ass et accounting that a cost center was locked until the system rejected the postin g of actual costs and issued an error message ("cost center locked"). Now it is possible to avoid problems with depreciation posting resulting from locked cost centers at an early stage. Using event linkage, you can activate a workflow that is automatically started when a cost center is changed.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multiple enhancements have been implemented in asset a ccounting to improve ease of use and of implementation. These enhancements inclu de the following:<br><br>- Microsoft Excel based legacy data transfer and the BAP I programming interface, which support the data load<br>- New maintenance functi ons for depreciation calculation keys<br>- Workflow-based information when cost center is changed</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Volume notation of foreign exchange rates</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>If you are using volume and price notation simultaneou sly, a number of new developments on the GUI help you keep track of the differen t options:<br><br>- New, user-friendly input help for exchange rates<br>- Config urable input conventions for differentiating between exchange rates quoted in te rms of price or volume<br>- Improved maintenance of exchange rate tables<br><br> Interfaces usually provide a second exchange rate field for volume notation. Thi s guarantees maximum compatibility, particularly for communication with other so ftware.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In line with market requirements, all the functions an d applications of SAP R/3 can now handle exchange rates quoted in terms of volum es. This was not always possible in previous SAP R/3 releases. The use of volume notation impacts the GUI (manual entry and batch input), internal and external interfaces, customizing, and the storage and retrieval of all data structures. With the dual-currency phase of the European Monetary Union (EMU) now well under way, exchange rates in Europe are being increasingly used and published as volu me notations rather than as price notations. Volume notation of exchange rates i s already a widely used standard in countries outside of Europe, such as the Uni ted States. Whether exchange rates are fixed and published as volume or price no tations depends on the respective market standard and might even depend on indi vidual business transactions.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Change/correction requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can create, change, or delete master data by using a self-service form. Once you have submitted this form, the subsequent processe s are then run almost entirely automatically. A typical situation for a change r equest is as follows:<br><br>1. When viewing a list of master data on the intran et or Internet, a user notices that certain master data is missing, or that exis ting master data needs to be changed.<br>2. From this list, the user can then br

anch to the request form for making changes to master data.<br>3. The user then uses the form to request that new master data be created or that existing master data be changed.<br>4. The user does not need to know the name of the clerk res ponsible for implementing the changes and does not require detailed knowledge of the SAP R/3 software.<br>5. When the user sends the form, the software determin es who the responsible processor is. <br>6. The processor receives the request i n his or her inbox or workflow inbox in the SAP R/3 software. The request form c an be accessed from there, as can the transactions needed for processing master data.<br>7. Before changes are posted, you can set up an approval process in the software.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The benefits of this function are as follows: - You do not need to know the name of the clerk responsible for processing the request, because this is determined automatically.<br> - You also do not require knowledge of the SAP R/3 software. <br> - Your request is transferred to the SA P R/3 software, where it is processed. <br> - You use the intranet to process nu merous transactions that were previously made through mail or telephone. You can enter requests and check their processing status at any time of day, every day of the week.<br><br>The request form has been designed for ease of use. As menti oned, little or no prior knowledge of the SAP R/3 software is required.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Correction requests for postings</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Beginning with SAP R/3 release 4.6C, you can request a djustment postings from the line item reports in controlling, from the document display in controlling, and in financial accounting. You can access both the rep orts and the document display from an intranet, as well as directly in the SAP s oftware.<br><br>The correction process is a self-service function. Once the corr ection request has been submitted, the subsequent processes are run almost entir ely automatically. A typical situation for a correction request is as follows:<b r><br>1. When viewing a line-item report on the intranet, the user notices that an amount was posted to the wrong account.<br>2. From the line-item report, the user then branches to the request form for correcting a posting.<br>3. When that branching is done, the data for the line item in question is also transferred.< br>4. The user requests the correction posting on the intranet by using the requ est form.<br>5. To do this, he or she does not need to know the name of the cler k responsible for carrying out the request or to be familiar with the SAP R/3 so ftware.<br>6. The request is transferred to the SAP R/3 software with the status New and is assigned to the correct clerk automatically.<br>7. The request is se nt to the processor's worklist or workflow inbox in the SAP R/3 software. From h ere, the clerk can view the form and start the transactions needed to make an ad justment posting.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Correction requests for postings can be managed over t he intranet. You do not need to know the name of the clerk responsible for proce ssing the request. The request is transferred to the SAP R/3 software, in which it is processed by the responsible clerk. The processing status of the request c an be monitored through the intranet, together with any notes added, at any time .<br> The request form has been designed for ease of use. No knowledge of the SAP R/3 software is required.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financial accounting asset accounting: Web-based employ ee self-service functions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Now you can process fixed assets not only in the SAP R

/3 software but also by using the Internet. For the new Internet functions, ther e are two new transactions:<br><br>- "My assets" You can process all fixed assets that contain your personnel number in the asset master record.<br>- "Assets on my cost center" You can process all fixed assets that contain a cost center for which you have a uthorization.<br><br>Both of these transactions offer a simplified screen layout that is suited to the Internet, along with a limited selection of master data f ields. In the initial screen, you use a selection tool to target the assets you want. The software generates a work list, from which you choose an asset for edi ting. In addition to displaying and editing of assets, you can propose an asset retirement and enter the reason. The accountant responsible for asset retirement s is informed by workflow.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In conjunction with the roles provided by SAP, not onl y do you have a selection of transactions directly related to your job needs but also the functions available in these transactions are tailored directly to you r individual requirements.<br> For example, an employee can maintain various master data (such as plant, room, and so on) for fixed assets that are assigned to his or her equipment (such as a PC or printer), even if there is no SAP R/3 software at the employee's location . The responsibility for depreciation, maintenance of organizational assignments , and the like remains with the asset accountant in this situation.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Online business partner information service</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>Through your company's Web site, your business partner s access the online business partner information service. Each partner logs on w ith a user ID and password, is authorized to carry out only the information serv ices activated for him or her, and sees only the accounts assigned to him or her . The following services are offered:<br><br>- Line-item display (open items)<br >- Line-item display (cleared items)<br>- Line-item display (all items)<br>- Bal ance display<br>- Account balance display</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.6C, you can enable your externa l business partners to access selected information directly from your SAP softwa re through the Internet. This enables your business partners to get up-to-date i nformation for their accounts through a self-service. The business partners can get this information 24 hours a day and are not dependent on contacting an accou nting clerk in your organization.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Business Suite: assigning and clearing open items< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Open items in SAP R/3 software or on the Internet can be assigned as follows:<br><br>- The accounting clerk/customer requests the list of open items, and the assignment screen is displayed, with the list split acco rding to debit and credit items.<br>- By simply selecting items, the clerk/custo mer can assign the debit and credit items. The SAP R/3 software displays the ass ignments that have been made in a separate screen area.<br>- When the assignment s have been made, the clerk/customer saves the list.<br><br>The list with the pr oposed assignments can be further processed in the SAP R/3 software or on the In ternet. The following options are available to accounts receivable clerks:<br><b r>- They can display the assignments made and use these for manual clearing.<br> - They can display the assignments made and confirm whether they want to use the m for manual clearing. Manual clearing possibly by a different accounting clerk can be carried out only after this confirmation has been made.<br>- They can d isplay the proposed assignments. If they do not want to use them, they can reset

them, notifying the clerk/customer whose proposals were refused by mail.</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>Using the new assignment of open items on the Internet , you can obtain missing information directly from your customers. You thereby s implify and accelerate the clearing process. A frequent problem that arises when you are assigning customer open items such a s invoices, credit memos, and payments on account is that information required f or the assignment is missing. This causes additional expense and delay. In some cases, it can lead to unjustified issuance of dunning notices.<br><br>Users with no previous experience with SAP R/3 software find the user interface for the ne w function easy to use.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Interfaces in BAPI for the handling of payments with p ayment requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>When you pay in account payable and accounts receivabl e, you pay open items (financial accounting documents). When you use payment req uests, you can initiate payments without a reference to open items on a vendor o r customer account. The payment requests are created in the application containi ng the dataset to be paid (for example, cash management). The payment requests c ontain information on when, how, what, to whom, and from whom payment is made. T he payment program for payment requests then pays the payment requests.<br><br>T he handling of payment transactions with payment requests includes the following functions:<br><br>- Posting payment requests The payment requests are posted through the update interface. You can therefore pay with payment requests externally (for example, from SAP software or from a c ustomer enhancement). This is implemented through the use of new interfaces in t he BAPI programming interface. The payment requests contain the following specif ications:<br> > Recipient and sender of the payment<br> > House bank and partn er bank details<br> > Instructions to the house bank<br> > Payment amount and currency<br> > Due date or value date<br> > Payment documentation in accountin g (data for creating the financial accounting document)<br> > Origin of the pay ment request (for example, the cash management component)<br>- Paying payment re quests You carry out the process of payment with the payment program for payment reques ts. It includes the following partial processes:<br> > Entering parameters (you enter the dataset to be paid)<br> > Creating a payment proposal<br> > Editing the payment proposal (you can change various entries in the proposal, and you c an block items for example, those that were proposed for payment at this stage or change the house bank from which payment is to be made)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Until this release, payment transactions were processe d in SAP R/3 as follows: the payment program in the accounts payable and account s receivable component. Customer and vendor open items are paid in this way. In addition, payments from customer or partner enhan</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document parking Enjoy transaction</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.6C, you can park general ledger account postings, invoices, and credit memos for subsequent further processing. This design means that document parking also benefits from the advantages of th e EnjoySAP transactions. User navigation is simplified by means of a clear scree n layout. For example, the tree on the left side of the screen displays the docu ments that you have parked. The clear screen layout also simplifies the selectio n of screen variants or account assignment templates.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The user-friendly EnjoySAP interfaces, combining funct

ional enhancement with improved design, are also available for document parking. The aim of these changes is to enable you to make postings more quickly and eas ily and with as little training as possible.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Asset accounting engine for external interfaces</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use the asset accounting engine as an interfac e for external applications. It enables you to transfer all master data transact ions and asset posting transactions from an external application.<br><br>The ass et accounting engine processes the transactions without any user interaction.</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The asset accounting engine adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It synchronizes asset accounting master data.<br>- It creates asset accounting postings.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Audit information function</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The audit information function now has a more user-fri endly and role-based layout.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The audit information function adds business value bec ause it reduces administrative costs in connection with user-specific functions and authorization assignments for auditors. Its benefits are as follows:<br><br> - You can copy the SAP standard roles and modify them to meet your particular ne eds. <br>- SAP provides single roles, each of which deals with an audit topic. Y ou can enhance the functions of the standard roles and combine the single roles into composite roles.<br>- You can assign authorizations specifically for each u ser.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Automatic scheduling of the payment program</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>You can use automatic scheduling of the payment progra m to schedule a proposal or an update run of the payment program. By using varia bles, you calculate the current data when executing the payment proposal or upda te run. The schedule manager can be used to schedule payment runs periodically. Previously, you could schedule only a proposal run.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Automatic scheduling of the payment program provides b usiness value as follows:<br><br>- It speeds up and simplifies your payment proc ess. <br>- It enables you to schedule periodic runs of the payment program, beca use it is integrated with the schedule manager.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Customer-specific fields in customer/vendor master rec ord</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can define additional data in the master data of c ustomers and vendors by developing subscreens to which you add your required fie lds. With a change of release, an upgrade, or a support package, you copy your s ubscreens and data without having any modification.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following benefits are provided: - Modification-free enhancement in the customer and vendor master record with in

dividual data<br>- Easy prevention of misuse of exisiting standard fields</span> </td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Fixed-asset accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Fixed-asset accounting now incorporates new features t o provide depreciation calculation through the use of a half-year depreciation r ate for semiannual closing (a legal requirement in some countries, such as Japan ), a more flexible parallel valuation process, and user-specified account assign ment objects. <br><br>To support the enhanced account assignment objects, the d epreciation posting program and the periodic asset posting program have been red esigned.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Fixed-asset accounting adds business value in the foll owing ways:<br><br>- It enables you to calculate depreciation for the first half of a fiscal year with a different depreciation rate than in the second half of the fiscal year, by using only six months as the basis for calculating depreciat ion for the first half-year. <br>- It provides a more flexible parallel valuatio n in asset accounting, enabling you to post depreciation areas to a special ledg er or to more than one depreciation area in real time.<br>- It enables you to sp ecify new account assignment objects and to post all other asset transactions, i n addition to depreciation, to these new account assignment objects such as wor k breakdown structure (WBS) elements, real estate objects, and public sector acc ount assignment objects (for example, funds, functions, or grants).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Handling of payments</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As is already the case for vendors and recipients with out a master record (free form payments), you can now use the online creation of payment requests for customers. Various functions are available to support you in enterign the payment data.<br><br>You also have the option of managing paymen ts from several payment runs in one payment medium. This applies to payments fro m the payment program for both accounts receivable and accounts payable, as well as payments from the payment program for payment requests. It also applies to o nline payments and to both travel expenses and personnel payments.<br><br>The fo llowing features are provided:<br><br>- Online payments<br> > You are supported in the quick entry of your payment data by master data, variants, and repetitiv e codes. You can enter the International Bank Account Number (IBAN) of the payme nt recipient for free form payments.<br> > You can check the release of payment requests by using the dual-control principle. If you use a payment method of th e payment medium workbench, you can create the payment medium at once or create it in a cross-payment run.<br> > You can define the document type in customizin g for the documents created in accounting in parallel to the payment requests an d select the document type in the transaction.<br> - Creation of payment medium for cross-payment run<br> > You can start the paym ent runs separately in accordance with your internal checking and release proces ses. This enables you to reduce the number of payment media that you transfer to your bank. By starting the payment program more often, you are better able to k eep financial accounting current.<br> > You achieve improvements in performance because you split up large payment runs and run them in parallel and use creati on of this payment medium creation in combination with the payment medium workbe nch.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>These developments add business value for the online p ayments in the following ways:<br><br>- They allow posting of free-form payments to customer and vendor accounts.<br>- They speed up the entry of your payment d ata through various entry tools.<br>- They offer additional security through the dual-control principle.<br><br>For the creation of the payment medium for the c

ross-payment run, they add business value in the following ways:<br><br>- They a llow separation of organizational processes and external bank schedules.<br>- Th ey separate the posting procedure and data medium creation.<br>- They improve pe rformance.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Manual accruals</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The manual accruals functionality enables you to calcu late and post accruals for example, license fees or rent costs or revenues in general ledger accounting automatically. The accrued costs can vary.<br><br>You can calculate and post the accruals according to as many accounting principles a s you wish (parallel valuation methods).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The manual accruals functionality adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It automates the process of calculating and post ing accruals in financial accounting.<br>- It offers you the option of parallel valuation methods.<br>- It enables you to perform accruals according to your own calculation methods.<br>- It allows you simulate future accruals with a forecas t function.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Payments through Orbian</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To streamline the payment process, you can now make pa yments in SAP ERP Financials through Orbian.<br><br>Orbian offers a new Internet -based electronic financing and settlement method that represents an innovative alternative to the traditional payment processes. The distinctive feature of thi s method is that it includes both a settlement method in the form of Orbian cred its and a financing method in the form of primary Orbian credits.<br><br>The int egration of the Orbian settlement community in SAP ERP Financials does not requi re changes to the standard payment program functions or the electronic bank stat ement in the SAP software.<br><br>Refer to the software documentation for specif ic information on customizing your SAP software.<br><br>If you are using SAP R/3 4.6C with support package 20, important Orbian functions are already available. The new release contains additional functions supporting automatic discounting. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Settlements through Orbian add business value in the f ollowing ways:<br><br>- They enable you to use an Internet-based financing and s ettlement method.<br>- They optimize your financing and payment processes. <br>They are fully integrated in SAP ERP Financials.<br>- They enable you to work w ith familiar transactions. <br>For more information on the advantages and use of Orbian, visit www.orbian.c om.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Postprocessing of bank statements</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Postprocessing of bank statements enables you to selec t and correct much more quickly bank statement items that have not been posted a utomatically. You can use filter, search, and sorting functions to display and e dit the items in a way that best suits your method of working.<br><br>The follow ing features are provided as of the former SAP R/3 Enterprise software, now SAP ERP:<br> - Targeted selection of bank statement items<br> > You can select the items you want to process according to different criteria, such as posting rule, amount, accounting document, and so on.<br> > You can also compile the criteria once an d save them as a variant. This could enable you, for example, to call up the sta

tements for the previous day by using the same variant.<br>- Display of the bank statement items Using the SAP list viewer list functions, you can display the statement items so that only the information necessary for your processing appears. You can also u se the filter function on the first line of the note to payee to achieve flexibi lity in the choice of the items of interest to you.<br>- Processing the bank sta tement items You can correct the selected items in succession. When you have finished, you ca n trigger, with one keystroke, the automatic posting of all items you have chang ed. Other functions that make work easier include the following options:<br> > Display the note to payee separately you can display the note to payee in a sep arate window so that it is always available for processing.<br> > Lock items or bank statements when you process an item, it is locked for other users. Howeve r, you can also lock particular items or bank statements for certain other users in advance.<br> > Change customer you can change the posting rule and enter a customer so that the customer account can be cleared automatically.<br> > Dele te payment advice note you can delete any unnecessary payment advice notes that still bear clearing information in which posting failed (also in mass processin g).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new function for the postprocessing of bank statem ents adds business value because it increases your productivity. You can organiz e your work according to your individual needs.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Provisions for employee award schemes</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality covers the following individual pro cesses and functions:<br><br>- Data transfer from the SAP ERP Human Capital Mana gement (SAP ERP HCM) solution The SAP software transfers the relevant data for calculating the provision from SAP ERP HCM to the functionality provisions for employee award schemes. The tran sferred data can, for example, be the number of awards, together with their base price and running time. This data is stored by the SAP software as base data an d is used later for the calculation of provisions.<br>- Calculating and posting provisions You start the function for automatic calculation and posting of provisions from a point in time of your choice. The SAP software calculates the value of the awa rds and posts the corresponding provision in financial accounting.<br>- Data ext raction to the former SAP Business Information Warehouse (now part of SAP NetWea ver) You can transfer all data in the functionality provisions for employee award sch emes to SAP Business Information Warehouse and perform your own evaluations.</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you to calculate and post p rovisions for incentive plans, such as stock option programs, automatically.<br> <br>You can calculate and post the provisions according to as many accounting pr inciples as you wish (parallel valuation methods).<br><br>This functionality add s business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It automates the process of cal culating and posting provisions in financial accounting.<br>- It offers you the option of parallel valuation methods.<br>- It contains predefined reports that e nable you to simulate future provisions.<br>- It is integrated with the SAP comp onents human resources and treasury.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Use of the International Bank Account Number</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>You can save the International Bank Account Number (IB

AN) in your master data for use when you create payment media. The following mas ter data are examples:<br> - Vendors<br>- Customers<br>- Business partners<br>- House banks<br>- Employee d ata<br><br>The IBAN is a standardized, uniform number for identifying a bank acc ount in accordance with the European Committee for Banking Standards.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>The International Bank Account Number (IBAN) adds busi ness value in the following ways:<br><br>- It simplifies the payment process and enables straight through processing.<br>- It achieves value date and charges ad vantages from the banks.<br>- It ensures the structured entry of bank details an d minimizes typing errors through the verification of check digits.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Advance return for tax on sales or purchases in Extens ible Markup Language</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can now create advance returns for tax on sales or purchases in Extensible Markup Language (XML) by using report RFUMSV00. The rep ort produces an XML file that you can process further before sending it on to th e relevant tax authorities. XML is a flexible alternative to the current static formats used for data transfer in several countries. <br><br>SAP provides an ex ample style sheet for Germany, which you can adapt to meet your country-specific requirements. In doing so, you create, for example, an HTML file or an Adobe PD F file. You can send a PDF file to the tax authorities either electronically or in printed form.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Advance return for tax on sales or purchases in Extens ible Markup Language (XML) adds business value in the following ways:<br> <br>It provides you with your advance tax return in a format that enables you to ada pt the data to the requirements and formats of the respective national tax autho rities.<br>- It provides style sheets that enable you to process your advance ta x returns efficiently and electronically. <br>- It enables you to create additio nal style sheets to transfer XML data into other formats and to adapt the form t emplates of the respective tax authorities.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document splitting in the SAP R/3 cash journal</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>For each cash journal item, you can define different a ccount assignments, tax codes, or business areas. On the basis of the split in t he cash journal document, the SAP software creates separate offsetting and cash journal items, as well as a summary tax item. <br><br>For each receipt or expens e, on each of the three tab pages you can use the "split" button to call up a di alog box in which you enter the different details. In this dialog box, the SAP s oftware uses the tax codes defined in customizing to calculate the tax amounts a nd displays them in the lower part of the screen. <br><br>If reporting units (f or example, business areas) are different, this is shown in the cash journal doc ument in separate cash items.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document splitting in the SAP R/3 cash journal adds bu siness value in the following ways:<br><br>- It enables you to enter individual business transactions with different details for partial amounts in the cash jou rnal. <br>- It simplifies data entry in the cash journal document.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>One-time accounts in the SAP R/3 cash journal</span></ td>

<td align=left valign=top>In the cash journal, you can enter one-time accounts f or vendor, customer, or check postings.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality adds business value because it enha nces the cash journal by including the normal financial accounting (posting func tion.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Direct tax posting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>For single-level tax codes (the condition schema for t his tax code must contain only one active item), you can post to tax accounts di rectly from the cash journal.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Direct tax posting in the SAP R/3 cash journal adds bu siness value because it enables you to pay, for example, import sales or purchas e tax cash.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Data medium exchange engine</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The data medium exchange engine (DMEE), which enables you to define file formats in a graphical editor, now enables you to define form ats for files that you receive for example, from your bank. With this function, DMEE supports both outgoing and incoming data medium exchange files. This relea se also includes many predefined file formats used in the payment program, tax r eporting, and withholding tax reporting applications.<br><br>The following featu res have been added to DMEE:<br> - DMEE for incoming files The main application of incoming files is in conjunction with the electronic acc ount statement. DMEE converts an incoming account statement file to a new file i n "multicash" format, and uses this new file for additional processing.<br>- Ver sion management DMEE can store different versions of a format tree, including temporary versions , which you can then compare. <br>- Business add-ins (BAdIs) Additional BAdIs cover specific requirements that cannot be handled by the stand aS rA dPDd Me El Eiv fe ur ns ctf ior nm sa .t trees in the application areas listed below. These format t rees can be used to generate files without any further configuration in DMEE. In addition, you can use the format trees as templates to create new trees to cove r any regional or bank-specific formats not supported by SAP.<br>- Payment progr am DMEE format trees now cover most of the standard formats previously supported by SAP as individual file generation programs. These new format trees enable you t o use the additional features of the payment medium workbench software, such as the flexible configuration of the note to payee.<br>- Withholding tax reporting DMEE format trees are available for creating withholding tax returns as a data m edium exchange file in several countries (for example, the United States).<br>Value-added tax reporting DMEE format trees are provided for value-added tax reporting in Taiwan.</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Data medium exchange engine (DMEE) adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It offers a central customizing tool for defini ng file formats, called "format trees" in DMEE, for several business application s in financial accounting.<br>- It enables you to create new format trees by cop ying predefined format definitions and adding any required additional features, without any programming effort.<br>- It enables you to use predefined format tre es for payment medium exchange or withholding tax reporting, without any modific ations.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Generic withholding tax reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Generic withholding tax reporting enables you to prepa re withholding tax returns, on file or on paper, as required by the tax authorit ies. It is ready to run in a number of countries, enabling you to prepare tax re turns and withholding tax certificates in</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Generic withholding tax reporting adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It reduces the time and effort required to prepa re withholding tax returns and certificates because you need to work with onlyh one report rather than country-specific reports.<br>- It enables you to react qu ickly to changes in statutory reporting requirements by changing the provided cu stomizing settings, rather than having to change the program code.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cost center planning and budgeting: express planning</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The express planning self-service composite applicatio n combines various services into one convenient and easy-to-use planning applica tion for occasional users such as line managers: <br><br>- It supports the techn ical preparation of planning, communication, execution of planning, and review a nd release of planning details. <br>- It includes planning guidelines for refere nce.<br>- It provides status overview for planners and planning supervisors.<br> - It integrates planning software such as the former SAP Business Information Wa rehouse (SAP BW) component (now part of SAP NetWeaver); the former SAP Business Planning and Simulation Service Select; and SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) b ased cost center planning.<br><br>This functionality helps with planning for the entire organization. It improves the productivity of the entire organization du ring planning cycles and produce a better audit trail of all associated document ation, e-mail, and unstructured information. Express planning bundles all this i nto a single application and presents it in a structured way to the user. A stat us manager tells you at any time what you have done already and what still has t o be done. Altogether, this makes planning much easier for the user.<br><br>Expr ess planning is a new collaborative planning function that accelerates planning and is available with road map user interfaces, making it easy to use, even for occasional users. The standard end users for express planning are occasional use rs: for example, line managers. Express pPlanning is not a new planning technolo gy but a new composite function framework. As a composite function, express plan ning combines various services (such as planning and reporting services, master data maintenance services, and internal service requests) into a single applicat ion framework. As a self-service function, express planning guides users through a series of business process steps to allow them to accomplish tasks related to planning without additional training.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It lowers the cost of planning and budgeting.<br>- It improves accuracy of pla ns.<br>- It better enables you to monitor changes and approvals to plans.<br>- I t enhances business performance through more effective planning and performance management.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cost center planning and budgeting: planning coordinat ion and monitoring</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports planning process organization through collaboration rooms.<br>- It

provides monitor with status information on the progress of planning tasks.<br> - It offers links to jump directly into a single planning task of a single plann ing user for example, for inserting comments or approving certain parts of the planning.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It lowers the cost of planning and budgeting.<br>- It improves accuracy of pla ns.<br>- It better enables you to monitor changes and approvals to plans.<br>- I t enhances business performance through more effective planning and performance management.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product design cost estimate</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It imports bills of materials and routing from SAP R/3 and any other logistics software.<br>- It imports existing cost estimates from SAP R/3 software.<br>- I t enables you to develop target costs and accurately estimate product profitabil ity.<br>- It performs simulations and model outcomes of your production plans.</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It enables manufacturing organizations to make accurate price predictions befo re production.<br>- It allows more accurate measurement of product profitability .<br>- It improves ability to forecast product profitability.<br>- It enables en gineering staff to evaluate cost implications of design decisions.<br>- It impro ves ability of production staff to evaluate change requests.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: data structure standardization</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides single data structure across various ledgers.<br>- It offers a sim plified approach to extend the general ledger functionality as needed.<br>- It l owers the cost of expanding general ledger and training accounting staff.<br>- I t smoothes the transition path from the existing general ledger.<br><br>SAP ERP contains a new cross-industry and cross-country general ledger, which, because o f its architecture, provides considerable advantages with regard to transparency and compliance, the option of enhancement with industry-specific and customer-s pecific terms, fast close, reduction of total cost of ownership (TCO) on impleme ntation, and extended options for reflecting parallel accounting standards. The new general ledger functionality exists parallel to the classic general ledger t hat is the current functionality in SAP R/3 and SAP R/3 Enterprise. Upgrade cust omers can continue to use the classic functions for the time being. SAP plans to provide a migration from the classic to the new general ledger at the start of unrestricted shipment.<br><br>In the standard SAP offering, the new general ledg er has a data structure that is equally suitable for financial statement reporti ng, for management reporting, and as a source for analytical applications. This means that customers no longer have to implement additional components with part ially redundant ledgers (profit center ledger, cost of sales ledger, special pur pose ledger, consolidation staging ledger, industry-specific ledger) in addition to the general ledger, as was the case in SAP R/3 and SAP R/3 Enterprise.</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits:

- It simplifies data management. <br>- It enables more flexible consolidated rep orting and analysis.<br>- It eliminates need for manual postings to various ledg ers.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: extensions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows organizations to add dimensions to general ledger as business evolve s.<br>- It offers an extensible general ledger in which standard data structure is used.<br>- It maintains existing functionality from current general ledger.</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It quickly modifies general ledger to fit business needs.<br>- It reduces requ irements for technical migration or training.<br>- It eliminates the need to mai ntain separate ledgers.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: document online split</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This funcitonality accomplishes the following: - It simplifies the generation of financial statements and reports on segments o r dimensions that are unique to an industry.<br>- It eliminates the need for bus inesses to create new or special ledgers for each view of the company by allowin g documents to be automatically balanced online for any desired view of the comp any.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It supports transparency and fast closes.<br>- It simplifies the ability to re port by industry-specific requirements.<br>- It enables greater internal control when generating industry-specific financial statements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: real-time integration from controlling </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality automatically reflects any postings from management accounting (for example, cost center allocations) in the genera l ledger at the appropriate level of detail.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It eliminates need for a separate reconciliation ledger.<br>- It eliminates re conciliation processes between financial and managerial accounting.<br>- It incr eases the opportunity to close month-end books faster.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: parallel accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: . It provides additional functionality for parallel ledgers to reduce costs - It enables organizations to use identical interfaces and functions to process all ledgers in the general ledger, as well as to update ledgers individually or

simultaneously.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It reduces manual postings to individual ledgers.<br>- It enables greater effi ciency of accounting staff.<br>- Its document numbering improves internal contro l for managing parallel ledgers.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Fast close support</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides a simplified overview of the entire closing process through a clos ing cockpit for period-end closing of individual financial statements.<br>- It o ffers an intuitive user interface for scheduling and beginning the closing proce ss.<br>- It enables reconciliation of open items and intercompany balances in ge neral ledger accounts.<br>- It supports loading of intercompany data from non-SA P software through a new interface.<br><br>There is an increasing worldwide dema nd by companies management, as well as external institutions, such as regulators and stock exchanges, to reduce time spent on closing the books. SAP software su pports the fast and efficient creation of accurate and transparent financial sta tements by means of application integration, process automation, comprehensive r econciliation, and collaboration functionality.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduced errors through transparency and support for compliance through a conci se overview of the closing status and remaining tasks<br>- Significantly reduced time to reconcile intercompany activities <br>- Improved employee productivity and reduced costs</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: document online split simulation</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It offers functionality to simulate the result of an online split, which can b e previewed and analyzed before a document is posted.<br>- It allows posted docu ments to be analyzed with regard to the configuration that led to the resulting split.<br>- It offers standard customizing content for processing special indica tor transactions, such as down payments and down payment clearings.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Increased transparency of postings in the new general ledger<br>- Improved usa bility<br>- Necessity for less additional customizing to support standard proces ses such as down payments and so on</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: period-end closing tax accounting</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>A program (data retention tool [DART]) creates data fi les to support the periodic transfer of value-added tax related data to tax autho rities. These files are then sent to the tax authorities.<br><br>Note: this func tionality has also been made available in SAP R/3 and the 2004 version of SAP ER P.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits:

- Compliance with U.S. tax law (IRS Revenue Procedure 98-25) <br>- Increased re porting and auditing capability</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: period-end closing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The reporting tools available in the audit information function now also support the new general ledger.<br><br>Note: this functionali ty is also available in the 2004 version of SAP ERP with support package 10.</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves business and tax audit cap ability.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: depreciation of fixed assets</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality offers a completely automated depre ciation of fixed assets, even for customers from countries with special requirem ents in this area, such as Japan and Russia.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Greater flexibility and easier compliance, especially for customers in Japan a nd Russia<br>- Improved compliance with International Accounting Standards (IAS) </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: migration from classic to new general ledger</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality supports SAP R/3 and SAP R/3 Enterp rise customers in their migration efforts, providing standardized migration path s and programs.<br><br>Note: this functionality is also available in the 2004 ve rsion of SAP ERP with support package 10. If a customer wants to apply as a pilo t, he has to create an open source software ticket according to note 812919 and will be provided with further information concerning the next steps).</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>This functionality reduces migration effort and costs. </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: default derivation of profit center</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality supports derivation of the default profitcenter.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality reduces the need for additional cus tomizing effort.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: enhanced reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality offers the following:

- Enhanced standard line-item reporting for the fields segment and profit center <br>- Reconciliation report for totals and documents <br><br>Note: this function ality is also available in the 2004 version of SAP ERP with support package 10.< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality reduces the need for additional eff orts in generating specific reports on standard content.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: statistical key figures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality allows allocation within general le dger through the use of statistical key figures as a basis.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides greater flexiblity for all ocations within general ledger.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: archiving of documents</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function allows archiving of documents and totals created in the new general ledger. <br><br>Note: this functionality is also ava ilable in the 2004 version of SAP ERP with support package 10.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality results in better performance of th e SAP software and lower maintenance costs.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: euro conversion</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality creates zero balance on document le vel when changing over to euro currency.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves audit capability.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>General ledger: enhanced interfaces and integration to new general ledger</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality offers enhanced interfaces and inte gration concerning the applications public sector, financial accounting contract accounting, human capital management, travel management, and material ledger (tr ansfer prices).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved ability to support public sector accounting requirements<br>- Improve d integration with human resources, travel and expense, and contract accounting solutions</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management: credit limit management and control </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides a portal for credit managers to view, analyze, and change current credit limits for customers.<br>- It enables access and visibility to customer c redit scores according to external or internally created standards.<br>- It disp

lays intuitive view of customer credit risk levels and order limits.<br>- It tri ggers a notification process if an exception is needed.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Credit Management helps companies manage their cus tomers credit lines. Companies can analyze credit information by using both exte rnal and internal information to adapt the customer scoring to fit the reality. SAP Credit Management makes use of the latest components of the SAP NetWeaver te chnology platform, including SAP NetWeaver Master Data Management, SAP NetWeaver Portal, and SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure. Effective credit management can reduce arrears and prevent potential nonpayment after delivery has occurred. SAP Credit Management meets all the prerequisites for a company-wide credit pol icy, including automated, real-time decisions and access to both internal and ex ternal credit information by all employees. By bringing customer data from vario us sources together, SAP Credit Management enables centralized customer credit c hecks and helps companies avoid the risk that customers would use different dist ribution channels to extend their credit limits. SAP Credit Management can be us ed by companies in all industries.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management: credit information support</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Requesting external credit information is completely i ntegrated in SAP Credit Management and enables companies to request information electronically using appropriate Extensible Markup Language (XML) interfaces. Be cause credit departments often use several external credit information providers , SAP Credit Management can save the information provided by such an interface s eparately according to the data provider.<br><br>This functionality supports cre dit managers in determining and managing the external and internal credit inform ation on customers information used primarily to set up input parameters for th e credit rules engine in SAP ERP, which can make credit decisions or automatical ly calculate credit limits.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Ability to utilize external and internal credit ratings in a single portal<br> - Ability of companies to generate credit standards by using external data <br>Ability to develop an industry-specific credit rating system</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management: credit rules automation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows organizations to apply or change credit rules to groups of customers .<br>- It enables automated calculations of credit limits on the basis of new st andards or changes to external standards.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Ability to change new credit rules without transforming processes<br>- Simplif ied implementation of new credit rules and standards<br>- Ability of credit depa rtment to change standards faster and react to market conditions</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management: credit decision support</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It helps credit managers visualize customer credit risks and limits.<br>- It r

educes training costs for credit managers through an intuitive user interface.<b r>- It allows credit managers to make decisions faster and with greater certaint y through improved reporting.<br><br>Credit decision support contains, for examp le, evaluations for analyzing the credit history for a customer and for analyzin g payment or purchase behavior.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Enhanced customer care<br>- Reduced customer credit risks <br>- Reduced levels of bad debt or default accounts</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collections management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables greater productivity through a single view of customer accounts rec eivable status. <br>- It enables individual collections managers to set promiseto-pay flags that include automatic workflow triggers if dates have passed.<br>It offers customer-improved invoice history overview.<br>- It simplifies the ta sk of applying credits to open invoices or splitting payments to multiple invoic es.<br><br>SAP Collections Management provides new functions that enable you to display and process receivables per customer. All open invoices are displayed, w ith their status, at customer account level, and this enables fast further proce ssing. It is therefore possible to create and monitor promises to pay, to create dispute cases, and to display a detailed invoice history.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Enhanced productivity of collections and accounts receivable departments<br>Increased collections rates, lower days sales outstanding (DSO)<br>- Customer-or iented approach to the accounts receivable process</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In-house cash</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides integration with cash management and treasury management features. <br>- It provides new payment orders, flexible routing, and new currency convers ion functionalities.<br>- It supports international payments with real-time exch ange rate information.<br><br>SAP In-House Cash is an application for companies that operate globally to manage their intragroup and external payment transactio ns more efficiently by setting up a virtual house bank. With SAP In-House Cash, international companies can centrally process payments made by their affiliates by netting and consolidating internal accounts. You can use SAP In-House Cash to pay external business partners on behalf of the subsidiaries or to forward inco ming payments from external business partners to the correct subsidiary.</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Accurate current accounts forecasting for cash managers <br>- Reduced complexi ty of intercompany netting and payments<br>- Reduced cost of intercompany paymen ts or cross-border settlements</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Dispute management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following:

- It enables organizations to process receivables-related disputes.<br>- It supp orts structuring and streamlining the dispute resolution process and reduces pro cessing time through an electronic communication process.<br>- It integrates wit h accounts receivable, sales and distribution, SAP Customer Relationship Managem ent (SAP CRM), and SAP Business Workflow (including e-mail notification).<br>- I t supports automatic creation of dispute cases for underpayments generated by th e electronic account statement.<br>- It offers a correspondence function that en ables standard letters, faxes, and e-mail to be sent automatically.<br>- It supp orts various communication channels, including those through SAP Biller Direct a nd SAP Collections Management.<br><br>SAP Dispute Management contains functions for processing receivables-related disputes such as reduced payments and dispute s because of a customer action. SAP Dispute Management enables companies to stru cture and streamline the process of dispute resolution and to reduce processing time. Communication is managed entirely in electronic form. SAP Dispute Manageme nt is closely integrated with the accounts receivable function but also with the sales and distribution function, SAP CRM, and SAP Business Workflow.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduced days sales outstanding (DSO) <br>- Reduced days deduction outstanding (DDO) <br>- Improved liquidity and liquidity forecasting <br>- Accelerated proce sses through automation<br>- Improved customer relationships through targeted in quiries and fast processing of complaints <br>- Reduced costs through early iden tification and notification about possible problems in the logistics value chain or internal processes</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Electronic bill presentment and payment (SAP Biller Di rect)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables companies to deploy Web-based billing, invoicing, account managemen t, and payment services through Internet portals.<br>- It supports Internet-base d authorization of automatic payment debits.<br>- It enables collaboration with customers and trading partners without requiring paper- and electronic data inte rchange (EDI) based payment methods.<br>- It provides a portal for suppliers to v iew invoices and payments.<br>- It supports the complete communication process f rom bill presentation to discrepancy handling and final reconciliation.<br>- It eliminates duplicate data entry by integrating data in accounts receivable and a ccounts payable.<br>- It reduces administrative burden with easy Web-based confi guration management.<br><br>This functionality allows corporate entities to pres ent invoice and account information through the Internet. SAP Biller Direct supp orts the complete communication process from presenting the bill through dealing with discrepancies to the final reconciliation. <br><br>SAP Biller Direct also supports the authorization or cancellation of automatic debits through the Inter net. This function is of particular interest to the utilities and telecommunicat ion sectors. It also enables the presentment of vendor information in the Web. A t the same time, bill recipients can import bill data into their SAP software in Extensible Markup Language (XML) form. There are further improvements in the ar eas discount, partial payments, and configuration. SAP Biller Direct is an appli cation based on the Java 2 platform, enterprise edition compatible functionality of SAP NetWeaver.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduced billing and settlement transaction costs <br>- Improved payment and e xception processing <br>- Improved cash flow <br>- Integrated data both in accou nts receivable and accounts payable, which eliminates the need to reenter inform

ation<br>- Reduced accounting errors on the customer side <br>- Reduced processi ng time on the supplier side</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Treasury and risk management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It improves compliance with the International Financial Reporting Standards (I FRS) and financial accounting standards (FAS), including hedge accounting, and s upports the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and German regulations.<br>- It adds new products for foreign exchange trading. <br><br>The SAP Treasury and Risk Management appl ication is used to manage financial transactions and the associated financial ri sk. Common instruments can be handled within the money market, foreign exchange, derivatives, and securities functions, both on the investment side and on the b orrowing side. Financial risks can be monitored through the use of risk tools, a nd a range of derivatives can be employed to limit the risk.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved corporate controls, by integrating treasury reporting with finance an d accounting <br>- Greater array of transaction support<br>- Elimination of the need to support a treasury management function separate from finance and account ing</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management: credit limit management and control </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides a list of documents that are blocked because of their credit statu s.<br>- It offers automated work lists for credit limit checks triggered by sale s orders and delivery documents.<br><br>The major processes in credit management that are subject to continuous improvements development in SAP ERP are as follo ws:<br><br>- Credit check called by sales orders and delivery documents (deliver y and shipping)<br>- Liability updates triggered by sales orders, delivery docum ents, and billing documents<br>- List of documents that are blocked because of t heir credit status (blocked sales order list)<br>- Rebuilding of liabilities fro m sales documents (linked partner messages) Exposure from deliveries is decreased only if the corresponding financial accoun ting accounts receivable invoice is sent to credit management.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It lowers the cost of operating your credit department.<br>- It improves produ ctivity of individual credit analysts within your credit department.<br>- It imp roves ability of credit managers to monitor risks throughout the entire value ch ain.<br>- It drives down customer credit risk and levels of bad debt.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management: credit decision support</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves reporting and scoring abil ities.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits:

- It lowers the cost of operating your credit department.<br>- It improves produ ctivity of individual credit analysts within your credit department.<br>- It imp roves ability of credit managers to monitor risks throughout the entire value ch ain.<br>- It drives down customer credit risk and levels of bad debt.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In-house cash</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality release workflows for in-house cash payment orders. You can define the workflow for in-house cash payment orders an d assign the possible users for the workflow. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP Business Workflow tool can be used with this f unctionality. </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collections management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables the definition of organization-specific rules for collecting receiv ables and determining the selection and prioritization of customers to be contac ted.<br>- It presents a work list with prioritized accounts to collections speci alists automatically, based on defined collection rules and strategies.<br>- It enables collections specialists to remove customers from their work list until t he resubmission date.<br>- It allows collections specialists to document custome r contacts and provides an overview of past contacts to facilitate contact prepa ration and optimize contact results.<br><br>A focus area in financial supply cha in management is the SAP Collections Management application in which collection specialists can process automatically created work lists to ensure efficient exe cution. User productivity enhancements were also made to bank statement reportin g in the SAP Cash and Liquidity Management application. Specifically, a report w as added that helps customers to do better cash management reporting. SAP Collec tions Management is not licensed separately.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduced days sales outstanding (DSO)<br>- Increased efficiency in collecting r eceivables from complex transactions or contracts<br>- Improved customer relatio nships<br>- Ensured collection strategy execution with automatic creation of wor k lists<br>- Improved user productivity<br>- Reduced preparation time for custom er contacts</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Electronic bill presentment and payment</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides integration with the SAP Dispute Management application, thereby a llowing users to upload or download business documents.<br>- It offers various o ptions for filtering invoices, such as by sold-to party.<br>- It provides a comp any administrator mode that allows company administrators to create and maintain their users' profiles themselves.<br><br>Within SAP Biller Direct, dispute-hand ling functions are enhanced, and an additional company administrator mode allows company administrators to maintain their users' profiles themselves. This compo nent is separately priced.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits:

- It improves your dispute resolution processes and drives down days sales outst anding (DSO).<br>- It accelerates your ability to manage supplier and business c ustomer relationships.<br>- It improves insight and ability to examine invoice i nformation.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Treasury and risk management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It offers new instruments for debt management and asset-backed securities.<br> - It provides significantly improved reporting and hedge-accounting capabilities .</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It improves your effectiveness in managing financial instrument and hedging tr ansactions.<br>- It improves the accuracy and speed of reporting investment inco me and losses.<br>- It reduces currency exposure and risk.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New functions for investment programs</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Work breakdown structure (WBS) elements can be assigne d to investment program positions, even if they are not top elements in a WBS. F or example, your project may already be subdivided into a segment for capital in vestments and a segment for expense. The new function then enables you to assign the specific WBS element, which represents the capital investment segment, to t he investment program. In the project, manual budgeting is then possible only be low the hierarchy node that is assigned to the investment program. The budget fo r the subtree of the WBS hierarchy that is above this node is determined by roll ing up the budget of the nodes below this node. <br><br>The assignment to an inv estment program can be made a required entry field in the order, the WBS element , and the appropriation request. Maintenance orders are assigned automatically, based on the assignment keys in their order type. <br><br>Authorizations can be limited to subtrees of the investment program. Until SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you c ould limit authorizations only by means of the organizational units to which an investment program position was assigned.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New functions for investment programs improve budgetin g and make using the investment management function easier.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mass changes for appropriation requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - Selection of the appropriation requests to be changed, through the use of any fields of the tables in which the appropriation requests are stored<br>- Additio nal selection, through the use of the status of the appropriation request<br>- S election of the fields to be changed <br>- Entry of the new value or selection o f the new status <br>- Display of the results, with the option of making changes </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The benefit of this functionality is linkage to a stan dard tool for mass changes: Mass change functions are needed for appropriation requests in a number of situa tions, for example:<br><br>- When you frequently create and change appropriation requests during the planning process <br>- When you make numerous changes to th

e assignments of appropriation requests to organizational units <br>- When you c hange field contents, such as investment reason or environmental indicator, in a large number of appropriation requests at the same time<br><br>Another possible use is for changing the status for some or all appropriation requests, if you a pprove a large number of appropriation requests in a single step.<br><br>To make these kinds of field changes possible, appropriation requests in SAP R/3 releas e 4.5B are linked to the standard tool for mass changes. You can also make mass changes to the status of appropriation requests. Mass changes are speeding up th e work and saving time.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Maintenance orders as investment measures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>An investment profile can be assigned to a maintenance order, enabling the software to carry out the following automatically: <br><br> - Create an asset under construction when the maintenance order is released<br>Carry out periodic settlement of the values on the maintenance order to the ass et under construction<br><br>There are advantages especially if you use plant ma intenance orders as internal orders. Maintenance orders can also be used for rep resenting investments.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.0B, you could use maintenance ord ers for budgeting and link them to an investment program or a maintenance progra m. In SAP R/3 4.5B, this integration between investment management and plant mai ntenance has been expanded further.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Information software for appropriation requests</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>The appropriation request functions were included for the first time in SAP R/3 release 4.0B. Until this release, you could generate i nvestment management reports on appropriation requests only when the appropriati on request was assigned to an investment program position. In SAP R/3 4.5B, this restriction no longer applies.<br><br>You can now use the information software to create reports on appropriation requests directly, regardless of whether they are assigned to an investment program. The information software for appropriati on requests, such as that for investment programs, is based on SAP R/3 drill-dow n ability. The standard reports that SAP provides for appropriation requests inc lude the following:<br><br>- Appropriation requests listed by organizational uni ts<br>- Appropriation requests listed by applicant name or approver name <br>- C omparison of net present value of appropriation requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With this functionality, you can easily copy the repor ts that SAP provides and modify them to your specific needs.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in appropriation requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New master data maintenance functions are characterize d as follows:<br><br>- Appropriation request master data maintenance functions h ave been enhanced with tabs.<br>- Depreciation simulation data is adopted automa tically by the investment measure when it is created from the appropriation requ est. <br>- The assignment of request variants to controlling plan versions is ea sier.<br><br>This functionality also enables you to create plant maintenance ord ers. In addition to creating work breakdown structure (WBS) elements and investm ent orders directly from the appropriation request, there is now a function for automatically creating a plant maintenance order from an appropriation request.< br><br>Future plans are as follows:<br><br>- Cost and revenue planning with stan

dard &RQWUROOLQJ (controlling) tools through the use of planning profiles and th e planning processor<br>- Enhanced revenue planning through the use of reasons f or revenues, quantities, and prices<br>- New interfaces in the BAPI programming interface for creating and changing appropriation requests and for updating thei r plan values<br><br>On the basis of these new interfaces in BAPI, a Web-based I nternet function enables users in the field to create appropriation requests dir ectly from a Web page.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Several enhancements in appropriation requests have be en implemented, including the following:<br><br>- New master data maintenance fu nctions: the assignment of request variants to controlling plan versions is easi er.<br>- Creation of plant maintenance order: you can automatically create a pla nt maintenance order from an appropriation request.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Investment measures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The asset transaction type that is used during settlem ent is currently set in the software. In the new release, you can specify the tr ansaction type in the settlement rule of the measure. This allows you, for examp le, to post removal costs or salvage revenue that was posted to measures, as wri te-up or write-down to group assets. The function is available for summary settl ement (one transaction type for each source assignment) and for line-item settle ment.<br><br>Proof of settlement is now available. In addition to the current pr oof of origin, many requests were made for a report that shows which values from the investment measure were settled to which receivers (assets, cost centers, a nd so on). This information is available in reporting in the new release.<br><br >Depreciation simulation can now be done by equivalence numbers and amounts. The planned amounts on an investment measure can be divided among several asset cla sses, cost centers, and depreciation simulation terms. In prior releases, this f unction works with percentage distribution only. In the new release, you can mak e this distribution by using amounts or equivalence numbers.<br><br>Depreciation forecast reporting can be accomplished with ABAP list viewer. The depreciation forecast report has been linked to the ABAP list viewer. This tool enables you t o dynamically display additional fields in reports and to total and sort the dis played fields. The display length of the fields can be changed. Microsoft Excel download is also supported.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Several enhancements in investment measures have been implemented, including the following:<br><br>- Asset transaction type in the set tlement rule<br>- Proof of settlement<br>- Depreciation simulation by equivalenc e numbers and amounts<br>- Depreciation forecast report with ABAP list viewer</s pan></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Investment programs</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New interfaces in the BAPI programming interface are i mplemented for creating and changing master data information and plan and budget values of investment program positions:<br><br>- Automatic measure assignment In SAP R/3 release 4.5, a function for automatically assigning maintenance order s to the investment program was provided. This function has been extended to app ropriation requests. This extension enables you to define the criteria used to d etermine the program position assignment for each appropriation request.<br>- Ve rsions of actual values in reporting You can now report directly from investment program reporting on parallel versio ns of actual values that are created on orders or work breakdown structure (WBS) elements when the transfer pricing scenario is in use.<br>- Reporting on releas ed measure budgets Until this release, reporting on the budget of investment measures that are assi

gned to an investment program position was possible only on the total budget, an d not on the released budget of WBS elements. This is now possible in the latter budget.<br>- Structures for the investment program in the former SAP Business I nformation Warehouse component (now part of SAP NetWeaver) Data extraction programs, InfoSources, InfoCubes, and queries have been defined for the investment program in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse. The y are available in the content shipment in the former SAP Business Information W arehouse release 1.2.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Several enhancements in investment programs have been implemented, including the following:<br><br>- New interfaces in the BAPI progra mming interface<br>- Automatic measure assignment<br>- Versions of actual values in reporting<br>- Reporting on released measure budgets<br>- Structures for inv estment program in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component (now part of SAP NetWeaver)</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usablityenhancements in fixed-asset accounting</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Microsoft Excel based legacy data transfer and new inte rfM : ai cc er sos io nfthE exc Be Al PIwo prk os gh re ae mt ms inc gan inn to ew rfb ae ceuse ud ppd oi rr tec tt hl eydas tain lp ou at d files for the ass et legacy data transfer. A new interface in BAPI for legacy data transfer can be used to load the input file to SAP R/3 software. In addition, the legacy data t ransfer program RAALTD01 can now be fed through the use of the SAP Legacy System Migration Workbench. This tool lets you easily view and modify input files.<br> <br>New maintenance functions for depreciation calculation have been implemented in financial accounting asset accounting customizing. The goal is to separate th e technical attributes that are required for depreciation calculation from the b usiness-related attributes. The technical attributes are assigned to the calcula tion key that is defined as client-dependent. The business-related attributes ar e grouped together into methods that are then stored in tables that are dependen t on the chart of depreciation.<br><br>This new structure leads to a large reduc tion in the number of depreciation keys delivered. For example, keys for luxury cars made in the United States can now be updated more easily, as can depreciati on keys with annual percentage rates for depreciation of buildings in Germany. < br><br>Tables have been created for the following:<br><br>- Base method of depre ciation<br>- Treatment of end of depreciation<br>- Maximum depreciation amount k ey<br>- Depreciation key<br>- Calculation method<br>- Declining-balance deprecia tion<br>- Depreciation period control<br>- Multiphase depreciation with explicit percentage rates<br><br>Existing depreciation keys are converted automatically into the new tables.<br><br>You can now create asset work lists and assign posti ng transactions as methods to the work lists. Initially, the allowed posting met hods are manual depreciation and writing up. Acquisition postings are also suppo rted. However, you cannot create the asset master record from the mass acquisiti on function.<br><br>Workflow-based information on organizational changes in cost center accounting is available. When cost centers are blocked or deleted, asset master records are not updated automatically. This caused problems in the depre ciation posting run when the software tried to charge depreciation to a cost cen ter that was no longer valid. You can now have the system issue a workflow messa ge when cost centers are blocked or deleted. Asset accounting employees can then trigger the necessary mass change to asset master records.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multiple enhancements have been implemented in asset a ccounting to improve ease of use and ease of implementation, including the follo wing:<br><br>- Microsoft Excel based legacy data transfer and new interfaces in t he BAPI programming interface that support the data load<br>- New maintenance fu nctions for depreciation calculation keys<br>- Mass postings<br>- Workflow-based information on organizational changes in cost center accounting</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Investment management financial accounting: unit costin g and easy cost planning for appropriation requests</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can enter costing for cost planning on the variant s of appropriation requests. The sum of this costing, divided into capital and o verhead if necessary, can then be adopted by the existing manual cost planning f unction.<br><br>Normally, you generate an order or work breakdown structure (WBS ) element from the appropriation request, using one of its variants. If this var iant includes costing, the costing is adopted by the order or WBS element.<br><b r>There is no separate costing for capital and overhead.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.6C, unit costing is enhanced by e asy cost planning, which simplifies unit costing in comparison with earlier rele ases.<br><br>Because this form of costing is also suited for rough estimates dur ing preplanning, the new easy cost planning function is also linked to appropria tion requests.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Investment management financial accounting investment ac counting: appropriation requests on the WEB</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Because appropriation requests are typically used in d ecentralized corporate planning scenarios for capital investments, users who hav e only limited or no SAP software access need to participate in planning activit ies. That s why appropriation requests can now be created on the basis of Interne t transactions. The available functions include the following:<br><br>- Creating appropriation requests<br>- Changing appropriation requests<br>- Viewing the st atus of appropriation requests<br>- Simple planning functions for appropriation requests in list form</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Appropriation request functions are provided in easy-t o-use, Web-based transactions.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Investment management financial accounting investment pl anning: investment program linked to organizational management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Maintenance of the investment program structure is at present not linked to other organizational hierarchies, such as those defined in human resources, or the cost center or profit center hierarchy. You can now mai ntain the structure of the investment program in the enterprise organization.<br ><br>You can define the units of your organization in the enterprise organizatio n. A unit of the enterprise organization can be linked to organizational objects of several SAP R/3 applications for example, company codes, profit centers, or cost centers. It can now also be linked to a position of the investment program .<br><br>You can create a new investment program automatically from the units de fined in the enterprise organization. Other organizational objects in the SAP R/ 3 software (such as company code, profit center, cost center), which are linked to the units in the enterprise organization, are also assigned automatically to the positions created in the investment program. However, you can define program positions in the investment program that are not part of the enterprise organiz ation. For example, you can define positions on lower levels of the hierarchy to distinguish them according to size or investment reason.<br><br>If you change y our enterprise organization, you can decide when you want to activate this chang e in your investment program. This can be done at any time during the year or at the beginning of a new year. The investment program for a new approval year can be created from the current enterprise organization. In this way, all changes t o the organization during the year are activated in the new investment program.< br><br>The units of the enterprise organization can also be linked to positions

of an existing investment program.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The investment program can be maintained through the u se of functions of the enterprise organization.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Investment management financial accounting information s oftware: customer field in reporting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Customer append structures can now be included easily in the table structure where the fields for reporting on investment programs and on appropriation requests are defined. (This is the same simple procedure as us ed in the master data tables for work breakdown structure [WBS] elements and app ropriation requests.)<br><br>These fields then have to be filled by means of a c ustomer exit. Using this customer exit, you can also fill standard fields with c ustomer-specific data.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>User fields defined through customer enhancements in a ppropriation requests, work breakdown structure (WBS) elements, or program posit ions can now be included in reporting without program modification.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Space management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides enhanced maintenance of th e linkage that connects architectural views (physical structure of a building) a nd rental objects (the different rental spaces to lease out) to the real estate contract.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Better management of the allocation and utilization of space<br>- Enhanced tra nsparency of vacancies in the space utilization<br>- Faster creation of rental o bjects and related contracts</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Rental vacancy management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables managers to assign the reas ons why a vacancy has occurred (and the date on which it occurred).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Analysis of condition changes by reasons<br>- Easier assignment through automa tic setting of change reasons, depending on the adjustment method during the adj ustment process</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Rent adjustments</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality allows rent adjustments to be made according to representative lists of rents and comparable objects.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Higher legal reliability of rent adjustments through automation of the calcula tion procedure<br>- Increased revenues through improved usage of adjustment oppo rtunities</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Service charge settlements</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality supports metered consumption for th e apportionment of service charges if meters are assigned to settlement units or pooled spaces.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved distribution of consumptions through the assignment of meters to pool ed spaces<br>- Enhanced settlement possibilities as a result of a one-, two-, or three-level hierarchy of meters for the settlement units</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integration to financial accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables easier retrieval of related open times by using the real-estate con tract number in the incoming payment transaction.<br>- It enables open items to be easily distributed into multiple installments.<br>- It allows assets to be cr eated and assigned directly from buildings and properties.<br>- It facilitates r eporting, revenue, and cost planning on real estate objects by allowing real est ate master data to be easily assigned to individual sets.<br><br>Until this rele ase, the financial accounting functions used for real estate related transactions were not able to reflect the specific information important for real estate. No w the number of the real estate contract is included in the incoming payment tra nsaction. Also, the tenant account is displayed in standard reporting for financ ial accounting. In addition, you can record an installment agreement in the soft ware by splitting an open item in financial accounting into smaller amounts late r on.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Easier posting of incoming payments by better selection function<br>- Time sav ings through automatic generation of installments<br>- Simplified creation and a ssignment of assets<br>- Faster selection of specific parts of a real estate por tfolio</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Reports and invoicing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It includes new reports for plant maintenance (costs on maintenance orders), a sset accounting (depreciation of real-estate objects), and controlling (costs on internal orders for real estate objects).<br>- It allows rent invoices to be pr inted from the periodic postings function and dispatched to tenants (Note: Line items on the invoice are grouped together, and the invoice number is based on th e real estate document.)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Enhanced analysis options for joining data from the SAP Real Estate Management application with data originating from other SAP ERP applications<br>- Simplifi ed creation of invoices to real estate contracts</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Real estate search</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This application enables the following:

- Search for offered objects (vacant objects) on the basis of the prospect s prop erty requirements and general prospect data<br>- Creation of a contract offer, w hen a fitting real estate object is found, by copying all relevant prospect and rental object data to the offer document<br>- Monitoring of contract offer appro vals or rejections and creation of the accompanying correspondence for property managers<br><br>Real estate search is a functionality that was not available in previous releases. It supports the lease-out process. In real estate search, you collect the prospect s requirements for the property that the prospect wishes to rent, as well as all data on the prospect in the real estate search request.</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the real estate manager wi th enhanced insight into demand for property and own supply, and it optimizes th e occupancy levels within the manager's real estate portfolio. <br><br>The proce ss is automated and integrated to master data and contract management processes, and it allows for accurate occupancy reporting.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Land use management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables management and viewing of p ublic law related information found in cadastral and property registers about par cels of land and properties, as well as related rights and encumbrances, such as rights of ways and contracts for usage and sales. (This functionality has been released only for Germany).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality supports better decision making and business insight.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Condominium ownership association (COA) management</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>Condominium ownership association (released only for G ermany) accomplishes the following: - It provides real estate managers with a separate book of accounts per real est ate and enables real estate managers to manage various such associations on thei r behalf.<br>- It enables viewing of specific master data such as mandates and m anagement contract.<br>- It supports regularly scheduled processes:<br> > Calcu lation of event-driven fees<br> > Creation of a proposal for the next year s ann ual budget<br> > Final settlement of costs to the owners<br><br>In comparison t o standard property management, the condominium ownership association functional ity focuses on the management of communities of owners per real estate. The comm unity gives the real estate manager the power of attorney (mandate) to manage th e property and all associated activities.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables more efficient management o f condominium ownership associations.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Adjustment measure</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables the following: - Using the adjustment measure, the real estate manager can set new rents or inc rease rents for any rental objects and, on the basis of this action, make a rent adjustment.<br>- Adjustment measures are especially suited for adjusting condit ions and notifying tenants when the adjustment is based on the following:<br> >

Modernization measures<br> > Expert opinion<br> > Special assessments for con dominiums (condominium ownership association)<br><br>In general, you can use the adjustment measure when rental conditions for objects are to be adjusted throug h a particular adjustment method, and an adjustment for these conditions should be calculated.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Adjustment according to modernization is considered by German organizations as a legal requirement.<br><br>Organizations profit from a n earlier, faster, and safer increase of revenues and return on their (moderniza tion) investment. Additional management costs are reduced.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integration to financial accounting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It adapts one-time posting transactions and templates to standard financial ac counting interfaces to better meet the needs of the real estate manager.<br>- It utilizes the accrual engine to post accruals and deferrals to the correct perio ds for expenses and revenues from real estate contracts.<br>- It offers tax summ arization for the summarization of tax lines, which is required in some countrie s, such as Italy and Austria. This compresses all tax postings sharing certain c riteria into one line.<br>- It allows input tax distribution in accounting objec ts for real estate to meet taxation requirements, thereby avoiding time-intensiv e manual checks and transfer postings.<br>- It integrates with public sector con tract accounting to allow for unified open-item accounting in the public sector through real estate processes, while being able to transfer these documents to g eneral ledger accounting.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Optimization of integration with other parts of SAP ERP (such as controlling a nd plant management) <br>- Increased efficiency through automated processes<br>Better compliance with (local) legislation and taxation requirements in the are a of real estate</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Service charge settlements</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Because of local law, organizations in some countries have to calculate, in addition to the service costs, the apportionment loss risk , while executing service charge settlement. This functionality is a legal requi rement and was not available in previous releases.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables organizations to ensure tha t taxation requirements are met and to avoid time-intensive work on manual check s and transfer postings.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Localization support: Germany</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality includes the following: - Data retention tool (DART)/Grundstze zum Datenzugriff und zur Prfbarkeit digital er Unterlagen (GDPDU) compliance (reporting support for tax authorities)<br>- La nd use management - Condominium ownership association</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables better compliance with (loc al) legislation and taxation requirements in the area of real estate.</span></td >

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Localization support: Italy</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality calculates the following: - Imposta comunale sugli immobili (local property taxes and fees)<br>- Imposta d i registro (registration tax)<br>- Posta di bollo (stamp tax)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables better compliance with (loc al) legislation and taxation requirements in the area of real estate.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Localization support: Austria</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality calculates the following: - Condition adjustments (Austrian real estate, 1/15 adjustment)<br>- Service cha rge settlement (current occupancy principle)<br>- Correspondence (according to A ustrian real estate template)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables better compliance with (loc al) legislation and taxation requirements in the area of real estate.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>RE-FX</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Localization support: Switzerland</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - Creation of Einzahlungsscheine mit Referenznummer (ESR) (reference numbers) in credit postings of vendor contract<br>- Service cost settlement (calculation of heating material consumption; refer management fee to vendor and invoice/docume nt printing; exchange of data tapes in individual heating cost settlement; resul ts of meter reading for consumption of energy)<br>- Correspondence (including fo rms that are released by the state of Switzerland)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables better compliance with (loc al) legislation and taxation requirements in the area of real estate.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Business unit analyst role testing 123</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides monitors to track aggregate key figures for a business unit and id entify budget overruns, postings that exceed a given threshold, and unusual post ings.<br>- It offers hierarchical reports to help visualize the relationships be tween profit centers, cost centers, and orders in the business unit and to facil itate navigation through large numbers of items, such as information for multipl e cost centers.<br><br>The business unit analyst is typically part of the manage ment team for his or her unit with responsibility for the financial health of th e unit. The business unit analyst monitors a number of financial and operational key figures for his or her business unit and reports these figures to senior ma nagement. This analyst also has an advisory role to the line managers in his or her business unit, explaining postings to them and communicating with the back o ffice. The business unit analyst is a key player in the planning process and coo

rdinates the handover to the back office and to corporate planners. He or she is a supporting player in the fast close process, monitoring the key figures for t he operational processes, reporting anomalies to the back office, and signing of f the figures for his or her unit when postings are complete. All organizations have business unit analysts, although the key figures monitored can differ signi ficantly between industries.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It improves productivity for the occasional user by making it easier to find a ll the relevant reports for his or her business unit and to access the reports w ithout filling out a selection screen.<br>- It helps analysts focus on the infor mation that matters, by allowing them to set rules to help them monitor key figu res, budgets, and individual postings.<br>- It makes it easy to verify and exami ne the selected information and perform or request adjustment postings if necess ary.<br>- It helps analysts visualize the relationships between the profit cente rs, cost centers, and orders in the business unit and helps the user see how cos ts roll through these structures.<br>- It provides a framework for the planning process and access to the planning data entered by the line managers.<br>- It su pports collaboration between the business unit analyst and the managers.</span>< /td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Business unit analyst role</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides monitors to track aggregate key figures for a business unit and to identify budget overruns, postings that exceed a given threshold, and unusual p ostings.<br>- It offers hierarchical reports to help visualize the relationships between profit centers, cost centers, and orders in the business unit and to fa cilitate navigation through large numbers of items, such as information for mult iple cost centers.<br><br>Within the SAP ERP release 6.0, the solution has been redesigned to help analysts to monitor their business unit and collaborate more effectively. The new work center approach provides the business unit analyst wit h a list of alerts each morning that show depending on rules for exception han dling set by the analyst key figures that have exceeded a threshold, cost cente rs that are over budget, unusual postings, and so on. From here, the business un it analyst can drill down into the details behind the posting and start collabor ation services with, for example, the cost center manager responsible for the hi gh variances. In the event of errors or changes in the organization, the analyst can use form-based processes to initiate a correction posting or request a chan ge: for example, to a profit center or cost center in his or her area. All formbased business processes have been reimplemented to use SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe software.<br><br>A separate work center focuses solely on the planning pr ocess allowing the analyst to set up a collaborative planning process to organiz e all tasks associated with planning. This includes ad hoc planning tasks and th e guided express planning application that leads the managers through the proces s of planning head count, costs, equipment, internal orders, and other costs. As the managers submit their data, the business unit analyst can monitor their res ponses and check the results both in total and individually, returning the work item to the manager for further work: for example, if the planned travel costs e xceed the organization guideline.<br><br>An additional work center shows the ana lyst the master data in his or her area of responsibility, and a dedicated analy tics work center provides access to all the reporting applications that the anal yst works with. This application has been expanded in SAP ERP to include project s in addition to the profit centers, cost centers, and orders available in the 2 004 version of SAP ERP.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits:

- Improved business productivity through automated alerts and exception handling <br>- Improved decision support and employee productivity<br>- Increased quality of employee support and project management through better access to budgets and project status information<br>- Better usability and enriched user experience</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Briefing book</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It makes it easy to create custom reports, summarizing specific data in the SA P Balanced Scorecard application for different audiences. (Note: Users simply dr ag and drop desired data from the scorecard into the briefing book, tailoring co ntents for particular audiences as needed while keeping other SAP Balanced Score card data confidential.)<br>- It enables PC-based download that can be forwarded to the relevant parties either as an Adobe PDF file or as a printout.<br><br>In general, the strategy management process communicates strategies and objectives throughout the entire organization through the SAP Balanced Scorecard. It suppo rts value-based management, management by objectives, and strategic initiatives. <br><br>Reporting for strategy management has to consider the individual needs o f the recipients of the different types of information.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Less time needed to prepare reports based on data from the SAP Balanced Scorec ard application<br>- Personalized collection of data from SAP Balanced Scorecard <br>- Many options for printing and viewing through the use of Adobe PDF files</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: integration of sta tutory and management consolidation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It delivers time- and version-dependent assignment validity from statutory and managerial consolidation units.<br>- It provides specific definition of first c onsolidation/divestiture accounting dates through consolidation unit combination s. <br>- It supports customer-defined attributes of consolidation unit combinati ons.<br><br>The process of consolidation encompasses extensive functions for the efficient collection of data from internal and external accounting and for ensu ring the necessary quality and details of the data. These functions offer an alm ost fully automatic creation of consolidated financial statements for a broad sp ectrum of accounting methods in compliance with various generally accepted accou nting rules. External and internal group reporting can be built on a basis of sh ared, consolidated data, so that time-intensive reconciliation and synchronizati on of different sets of data are no longer necessary. Thus, an efficient, integr ated consolidation process for statutory and management reporting contributes si gnificantly to realizing a fast-close strategy.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This release extends the existing online analytical pr ocessing (OLAP) based consolidation functionality in various places with regard t o usability, compliance with International Accounting Standards (IAS) and Intern ational Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), and a reduction in total cost of o wnership (TCO). The concepts of full integration of statutory and management con solidation are extended with new functionality and enhancements in the area of m aster data. The user interface is more clearly structured. The logic of consolid ation of investments has been extended to automatically support new requirements for IAS and IFRS. Furthermore, this release significantly facilitates the integ

rated collection of data from subsidiaries.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: consolidation of i nvestments</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports goodwill in local currency.<br>- It provides automatic treatment o f method change between equity method and purchase method.<br>- It supports orga nizational changes. <br>- It enables amortization/write-up of investments.</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It improves cost of generating consolidated financial statements.<br>- It impr oves accuracy of financial reporting.<br>- It enables more effective treatment o f investment accounting. <br>- It supports consolidated financial reporting for complex, multinational organizations.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: data collection ca pabilities</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It enables users to read data from an integrated business data warehouse.<br>It supports conversion of data from business data warehouse or flat file.<br>It enables customers to use customized calculations to update data before the co nsolidation process.<br>- The cut-and-paste functionality can be used to move da ta from third-party software to consolidation software.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Less complexity in the relationship between operational software and the conso lidations software<br>- Ability to link third-party accounting software to the c onsolidation software<br>- Improved usability, which accelerates the consolidati on process and improves close times <br>- Support of consolidated financial repo rting for complex, multinational organizations</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: reporting features </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following features: - Configurable task logs<br>- Simpler configuration of reporting for data matric es<br>- Database list with report logic<br>- Extensible Business Reporting Langu age (XBRL) outbound interface (support for multiple periods)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Quick and handy ad hoc analysis of preliminary consolidated data<br>- Easy cre ation of performance-optimized reports<br>- Information tailored to the user s ne eds</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: consolidation of i

nvestments</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized as follows: - New alternative posting logic provides enhances flexibility in handling goodwi ll in investment consolidations, including decrease of ownership.<br>- Handling of manual goodwill entry and correction is facilitated.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Increased automation during the creation of consolidated financial statement a nd thus reduced closing times<br>- Support of legal compliance<br>- More flexibi lity in goodwill treatment</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: interunit profit e limination in transferred assets</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Automated functionality for the elimination of interun it profit in transferred assets is characterized as follows:<br> - It enables the elimination of interunit profit in transferred assets, includin g functionality for the treatment of transfer chains.<br>- It creates automatic postings to correct ongoing depreciations.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO): no manual elimination documents ncesessar y to execute consolidation steps <br>- Faster closing: predefined business logic for automatic postings, which eliminates recurring adjustments after a manual p arallel posting<br>- Better compliance as a result of standard business logic fo r new legal requirements from International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 3</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: interunit profit e limination in inventory</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables elimination of interunit pr ofit in the following:<br> - Inventory supply chains, while all interunit profit along the supply chain is considered within a consolidation group <br>- Inventory in upstream, downstream, and horizontal transactions <br> Also, delivery between purchased and at-equity units can be handled in various c ombinations.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Lower total cost of ownership (TCO): no manual elimination documents necessary to execute consolidation steps <br>- Faster closing: predefined business logic for automatic postings, which eliminates recurring adjustments after a manual pa rallel posting<br>- Better compliance as a result of standard business logic for new legal requirements from International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 3 </span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: master data integr ation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides support for reading master data from an InfoObject (the smallest information object in the former SAP Busi ness Information Warehouse [SAP BW] component, which is now part of SAP NetWeave

r), either from its physical storage in the former SAP BW or through a remote co nnection from its origin.<br> It also provides the ability to load master data that has been extracted from SA P BW with traditional business intelligence extractors into the SAP SEM: BCS wor kshop. <br> Moreover, it allows you read an info object's master data, not from physical sto rage in SAP BW, but online through remote connection from the original location in SAP R/3 or SAP ERP Central Component.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Streamlined maintenance of master data in integrated scenarios<br>- Lower tota l cost of ownership (TCO): no programming of dowload interfaces necessary to cre ate files that are readable by SAP SEM: BCS flexible file upload functionality</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Analytics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Legal and management consolidation: migration support< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Improved migration support from the enterprise control ling component for consolidation to SAP Strategic Enterprise Management is chara cterized as follows:<br> - Downloadable reports can be used to create flat files (for chart of accounts; financial statement items and hierarchies; subassignments; and consolidation uni ts, consolidation groups, and hierarchies) that can be uploaded with standard me thods for master data file upload in the SAP SEM: BCS workshop.<br>- Flexible fi le upload of SAP SEM: BCS has been enhanced to read transaction data files in fo rmats created by periodic extract or special ledger rollup. <br>- Statistical it ems can be recalculated in C/I; no reopening of already closed periods is necess ary.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It lowers cost of migration and shortens project schedules.<br>- Facilitated p roject organization: the migration project can, as a first step, fully concentra te switching the consolidation software without the need for subsidiaries to cha nge their data extraction method; switching the data extraction method can be do ne as a second step whenever it fits best in the project schedule.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New country versions: Mexico, Sweden, Norway</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>New preconfigured country templates cover the statutor y requirements of Mexico, Sweden, and Norway for reimbursement of travel expense s.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Companies operating on a global basis can now implemen t travel expense management with significantly reduced effort for additional cou ntries.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning: Deutsche Bahn (German Federal Railway )</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integration of services are offered by the German Fede ral Railway in travel planning, train schedule information, price information wi th the application of the BahnCard, major customer rates, and railway-specific p references.</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables integration of the Deutsche Bahn AG (German Federal Railway) in travel planning.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Volume notation of foreign exchange rates</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>If you are using volume and price notation simultaneou sly, a number of new developments on the GUI help you keep track of the differen t options:<br><br>- New, user-friendly input help for exchange rates<br>- Config urable input conventions for differentiating between exchange rates quoted in te rms of price or volume<br>- Improved maintenance of exchange rate tables<br><br> Interfaces usually provide a second exchange rate field for volume notation. Thi s guarantees maximum compatibility, particularly for communication with other so ftware.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With the dual-currency phase of the European Monetary Union (EMU) now well under way, exchange rates in Europe are being increasingly used and published as volume notations rather than as price notations. Volume no tation of exchange rates is already a widely used standard in countries outside Europe, such as the United States. Whether exchange rates are fixed and publishe d as volume or price notations depends on the respective market standard and mi ght even depend on individual business transactions.<br><br>In line with market requirements, all the functions and applications of SAP R/3 software can now han dle exchange rates quoted in terms of volumes. This was not always possible in p revious SAP R/3 releases. The use of volume notation impacts the GUI (manual ent ry and batch input), internal and external interfaces, customizing, and the stor age and retrieval of all data structures.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integration of the business processes "travel request, " "travel plan," and "travel expense report"</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Since EnjoySAP release 4.6B, the new business process travel request has been available in the travel manager functionality in SAP R/3 . The previous processes, travel plan and travel expense report, have been combi ned with this new business process in the travel manager functionality; data is automatically prepopulated in each next process step.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The design of the transaction for recording travel exp enses has been reworked entirely. Even a user who works only occasionally with t he software can claim his or her travel expenses easily and quickly without havi ng to receive any training.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning: trip templates for frequently recurri ng trips</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>For frequently recurring trips, the software now offer s a "trip templates" function that can be personalized by self-service users, as well as by travel administrators for use in central trip templates. The reserva tions in the template are automatically checked for availability and booked in e ach replay of the travel plan.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Until this release, to plan a trip and book travel ser vices such as flights or hotel rooms, users had to go through the entire entry p rocess for each trip. The new function enables users to complete the reservation process faster for frequently recurring trips.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mobile travel expenses (offline)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP travel management software now provides an offline mobile travel expenses functionality as part of the joint Java-based offline ap plication, mobile time, and expenses. This application makes it easy for travele rs to enter their latest receipts and trip data without having to be connected t o the software.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Offline travel expenses software provides the followin g business value:<br><br>- It enables employees to keep their receipts and trip data up to date, whenever and wherever they are.<br>- It reduces paper-based pro cesses.<br>- It provides timely and precise information on project costs.</span> </td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel management business content in the former SAP B usiness Information Warehouse</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The improvements made to travel management business co ntent for the former SAP Business Information Warehouse (SAP BW) component (now part of SAP NetWeaver), increase your control over specific areas of travel expe nses and booked travel services, especially in connection with providers and geo graphical units.<br><br>You can now benefit from a much wider range of predefine d queries that are simple to use and that can be adapted easily to specific inte rests and industry requirements. You must have at least SAP R/3 release 4.5B and plug-in 2001.1 in the former SAP BW to take advantage of the new features.</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel management business content for version 3.0 of the former SAP Business Information Warehouse (SAP BW) component (now part of SA P NetWeaver), adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It enables tra nsparent reporting on city pairs and negotiated air fares.<br>- It provides dril l-down displays of travel planning data that is based on geographical hierarchy. <br>- It enables travel planning data to be displayed on geographical informatio n system (GIS) maps.<br>- It makes predefined queries easier to use by providing extra characteristics (such as selection/filter criteria).<br><br>On the basis of the existing InfoSources and InfoCubes for the travel planning and travel exp enses functionalities, the range of queries is extended to include the following features:<br><br>- Reporting on city pairs and negotiated air fares: new querie s on return flights for all city-pairs booked in travel planning now enable trav el managers to complete in-depth analysis of the flight frequency for all city p airs and the booking classes, cabin classes, and fares that are used on these ci ty pairs. The analysis can also be completed with the providers used as the base criterion. The queries include the base fare of all flights and the total fares . The drill down can be as detailed as the number of return flights for each ind ividual fare base code. Intermediate stops can also be considered at all levels of drill down.<br>- Drill down with geographical hierarchy: travel planning data can now be displayed through a new drill-down method based on a geographical hi erarchy. The geographical hierarchy takes into account the elements continent, c ountry, referenced International Air Transport Association (IATA) location, and IATA location.<br>- Display travel planning data on GIS maps: travel planning da ta can now be displayed on GIS maps. This facilitates visual processing and enab les information to be used for presentations without complex conversions with gr aphical mapping tools.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel expense management in the former SAP R/3 Enterp rise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel expense management functionality in the former

SAP R/3 Enterprise software, whose functionality is now in SAP ERP, adds busines s value in the following ways:<br> - It introduces credit card clearing for travel agency cards (lodged cards).<br> - It incorporates a receipts itemization wizard that enhances transparency of re ceipts and correct value-added tax assignments.<br>- It provides the solutions f rom public sector add-on packages reintegrated into the former SAP R/3 Enterpris e software.<br>- It allows for creating and posting receipts and for advances in foreign currencies. <br>- It enables receipts paid by company to be treated dif ferently from other receipts in the posting process.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel expense management remains a major focus point of the SAP Travel Management application. It enables you to achieve higher produ ctivity in the reimbursement and subsequent financial processes and to leverage your savings strategies in expense management.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning in the former SAP R/3 Enterprise</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning is enhanced by the following:<br> - Connecting to the Galileo/Apollo global distribution system (GDS) for online b ooking of air, hotel, and car rentals<br>- Connections to hotel reservation syst em and the German rail corporate portal (BIBE) in addition to GDS connectivity<b r>- Improving exception handling process for unpreferred providers or exceeding lowest available fares<br>- Improving travel agency communication process (passe nger-named record tailoring, queuing, synchronization)<br>- Making more flexible choice of payment methods per reservation type and organizational unit<br>- Add ing e-ticketing choices<br>- Adding seat map display options<br>- Extending air policy rules with breakdown to booking code level<br>- Allowing maximum rates fo r hotel stays</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning the online booking function of the SA P Travel Management application encourages better compliance with travel policy , increases the use of preferred suppliers, and provides strong reporting facili ties for use in supplier negotiations.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Public sector Germany: Trennungsgeld (separation allow ance)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP has developed the separation allowance manager for the public sector in Germany. The separation allowance manager enables you to c alculate separation allowances for temporary assignments or transfers and includ e them in the payment and taxation life cycle.<br><br>It is a user-friendly tool that enables you to process separation allowances simply and effectively. As wi th travel management, users create and enter their own travel expenses, which ar e then checked and settled by the travel department.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Separation allowance manager adds business value in th e following ways:<br><br>- It improves the calculation and processing of separat ion allowances.<br>- It keeps administrative chains short.<br>- It incorporates the processing of separation allowances into the SAP Travel Management applicati on, including an approval function and integration with SAP ERP Financials and S AP ERP Human Capital Management. <br>Separation allowance manager takes into account all legal requirements from both the German separation allowance regulations (Trennungsgeldverordnung) and t he German travel expenses regulations (Bundesreisekostengesetz). You can use it to process separation travel allowances and separation living allowances for ext ernal stays, to process the associated return travel necessary to complete the e xternal work, and for separation allowances for daily business trips.</span></td >

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Employee Self-Service: for travel and expenses</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It integrates maps to support hotel and airport searches, indicating exact dis tances to destination addresses.<br>- It integrates airline and car rental logos , hotel images, and amenities information in availability searches.<br>- It inte grates external Web content regarding up-to-date visa, health, and security info rmation, as well as important travel news.<br>- It integrates company-specific t exts on and links to important policy information.<br>- It maintains personal tr aveler profiles through new self-service functions.<br>- It supports subsequent assignment of imported credit card data to expense reports.<br>- It provides sev eral options, including country-specific versions.<br><br>SAP Travel Management provides a fully integrated end-to-end trip life-cycle management solution to im prove processes in pretrip approval, online booking, expense reporting, and data warehousing. This process optimization results in a reduction in indirect trave l costs, lower travel agency transaction fees, enhanced supplier negotiations, a nd higher company policy compliance. For SAP ERP, the major new travel managemen t development is in the area of people-centric user interface redesign, increasi ng user productivity for travelers as self-service users. The enhancements inclu de the redesign of the user interface and the integration of external services s uch as maps and visa, health, and security information.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Easy and direct access to a range of travel services for employees<br>- Improv ed user acceptance <br>- Minimized training costs and decreased help-desk calls <br>- Reduced administrative costs</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in mobile travel expenses for SAP ERP</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP Mobile Time and Travel application has been en hanced as follows: <br> - Usage with the 2004 version of SAP ERP provides the following: <br> > Redesig ned, step-by-step guided data user interface, in complete analogy to the new onl ine self-service application<br> > Enablement of offline users to attach credit card receipts directly to expense reports<br> > Receipt itemization functions to break down complex receipts such as hotel bills <br>- Usage with version 6.0 of SAP ERP provides the above plus:<br> > Travel requests and travel plans tha t are created in the online SAP ERP application can be brought down to the offli ne application<br> > Ability to customize for long-term travel (for example 90 -days-rule) <br> > Integration with Collaberation Projects (cProjects) applica tion</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduced costs, by eliminating paper-based processes and double data entry <br> - Speedier billing cycles for services rendered, which increase cash flow<br>- I ncreased visibility of accounting data</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Self-service for managers (approvers) and travel arran gers</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - Enhanced process support for managers (highlighting of policy exceptions, inst ant access to most important travel data, details of business trips in summarize d Adobe form, and one-click approval function)<br>- Personalized access for trav el arrangers</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Accelerated approval processes and reduced indirect costs<br>- Increased trans parency about anticipated costs for managers<br>- Faster access to data of other employees for team assistants</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Pretrip budget availability control in funds managemen t</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enhances availability control of fu nds management budgets at the stage of travel requests (estimated amounts) and t ravel plan (exact costs of online booking).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - More accurate availability control before start of a business trip, at the tim e of pretrip approval<br>- Elimination of manual availability control and paperbased processes</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Travel planning and online booking</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The direct hotel connects functionality includes a gen eric SAP interface based on SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) to computer reservation software for hotels.<br><br>The low-cost carrier ai rlines and Web fares functionality includes a generic SAP interface based on SAP NetWeaver XI to consolidator systems for low-cost carriers or Web fare with ful l integration into SAP Travel Management booking processes:<br><br>- Services no t registered in central reservation software (for example, taxis, shuttles, and so on) can now easily be requested and their booking status can be updated in a travel plan.<br>- Processing status at the agency side can now be made transpare nt to users, and communication dialogue between traveler, travel preparer, and a gency is improved with an additional status field.<br>- Enhancements for car ren tal bookings include special drop-off and pickup addresses, as well as handling of negotiated fares differentiated by organizational area.<br>- German Rail (NVS ) bookings through the Amadeus global travel distribution program have been inte grated in the Web-based self-service user interface.<br>- Country-specific airli ne fares such as Lufthansa s pay as you fly program can now be booked online.<br> - A new program for the offline synchronization of Amadeus bookings allows for a much faster update of bookings that have been changed outside the SAP software for example, by the travel agent. No additional system components are needed an y more.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Increased flexibility in using different reservation software in the booking p rocess<br>- Lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and implementation costs through service provider specific integration support<br>- Lower direct purchasing costs based on access to a wider range of low-price offers<br>- Significantly reduced costs for interface modifications<br>- Streamlined and more efficient back-offi ce processes for the interaction of traveler and travel agency/shared service ce nters</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td

align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Expense report management and reimbursement</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>This functionality includes the following: - New print forms as Adobe PDF forms, facilitating the configuration and adaptat ion of the look and feel (including the option for bar codes and company logos) of Adobe PDF forms technology<br>- Automatic distance calculations between start -of-trip and end-of-trip locations based on geocoding services, simplifying audi t-proof and tax-proof mileage calculations<br>- Credit card feeds through the ge neric interface in SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP NetWeaver XI) that capture itemized hotel folio statements to populate expense reports<br>- Integr ation with Collaboration Projects (cProjects) to capture travel expenses on proj ect budgets<br>- New user interface for mobile travel expenses</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved usability for online and offline travel management business scenarios <br>- Significantly reduced effort for entering travel and expense data, as well as associated administration efforts, as paper receipts become obsolete <br>- I ncreased flexibility in importing credit card information into the software and, subsequently, reduced total cost of ownership (TCO) <br>- Reduced cost of compl iance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act through deployment of standard, fast-to-implem ent, compliance-relevant workflows</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Optical archive for loan correspondence</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>When you call up the correspondence function, the corr espondence documents are written to the optical archive automatically under the following conditions: <br><br>- You have made and activated the corresponding cu stomizing settings for the basis function archiving in SAP R/3 and the specific functions for loans. <br>- You can specify for each letter whether the letter sh ould be archived. <br>- A file is assigned to the loan. <br>- Only the original document is archived. Copies, such as correspondence to a guarantor, are not arc hived.<br><br>You access the archived correspondence through filed documents. Th e software activates the optical archive by means of the SAP ArchiveLink monitor and then displays the document.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>From SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can store the loan corr espondence generated by the correspondence function in the treasury loans compon ent of the SAP R/3 software in an optical archive.<br><br>You can use this funct ion only if you are using treasury loans file management. This function is where the archived documents are stored and is the only function through which they c an be accessed.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Reversal function</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The appearance of the reversal function is being chang ed to correspond to the existing account statement in order to make it more user friendly and provide a better overview.<br><br>Advantages of the updated functi on are as follows: <br><br>- You have a better overview of the postings made for a loan. This allows you to select the documents to be reversed more easily. <br >- In customizing, you can define which documents are assigned to the individual reversal categories. <br>- You have flexible enhancement opportunities. <br>- P rocessing is more stable as a result of improved internal structures.</span></td >

<td align=left valign=top>The function for reversing posted documents is being u pdated to make it easier to use. In loans management, you need to be able to rev erse posted documents.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Save option for over-the-counter (OTC) net present val ues</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You calculate the net present values as for the standa rd mark-to-market report program for a certain key date. However, you cannot use the function to calculate net present values for business scenario data. In the test run, the software displays the calculated net present values in a list on the screen. In the update run, the software writes the calculated net present va lues and the net present value type specified to the over-the-counter (OTC) net present value table, and it generates a log of the selected transactions. As for the test run, the software produces a list of the valued transactions. Any tran sactions that cannot be valued or cannot be written to the net present value tab le because a corresponding record already exists are listed separately.<br><br>Y ou can run the report program online or in a batch.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This function allows you to store net present values c alculated in SAP Market Risk Management and use them later for other evaluations .</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New interfaces in BAPI for securities class master dat a</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Using the business object financial product, you can l ink external software to securities class master data in theSAP R/3 software. Co mmunication methods are available to perform the following tasks: <br><br>- Call up a list of the securities in the software<br>- Read data relating to a securi ty by specifying the security ID number <br>- Create a new security ID number an d perform consistency checks <br>- Change the data for an existing security</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>Communication between the SAP R/3 software and externa l software is very important. The business objects with their new interfaces in the BAPI programming interface provide the necessary technology, forming an obje ct-oriented interface between the SAP R/3 software and external software. Compat ible external software programs are Internet Applets, Microsoft applications, an d applications based on the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) st andard, defined by the Object Management Group. Later new interfaces in BAPI ena ble cooperation between unlinked systems running SAP R/3 software.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Treasury information function linked to the executive information function</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The treasury information function enables you to extra ct data from the operative treasury software and to present and analyze it by us ing the drill-down reporting tool. It also provides a whole range of auxiliary f unctions, such as the following: <br><br>- Batch processing <br>- Link to the tr ansport function <br>- Translation assistance <br>- User-defined reports <br>- U ser-specific authorization checks <br>- Interface with Microsoft applications<br >- Executive information function<br><br>The executive information function, the management information software for company executives, comprises the following main elements: <br><br>- A database for the entire company, which you can confi gure to suit your individual requirements and in which you can store data you wi

sh to evaluate <br>- A presentation tool similar to the one in the treasury info rmation function, which you can implement by using the drill-down reporting func tion <br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the following new functions are available: <br><br>- In the treasury information system, new characteristics and key figur es enable you to define more complex reports and forms. A link to the front-end product inSight from the company arcplan enables you to make presentations on an alternative GUI. <br>- You can now transfer data from the treasury information function to the executive information function. This allows you to manage your p ositions in the executive information function on any timescale you require (for example, you can manage actual positions on a daily basis and planned positions on a monthly basis). This greatly enhances performance in reading position data , and it enables you to analyze deviations between planned and actual values in the treasury information function. <br><br>The link to the executive information function enables you to do the following: <br><br>- Make your data available to external software by using data retrieval programs delivered with the SAP R/3 s oftware <br>- Manage your positions <br>- Vastly improve software performance du ring position reporting <br>- Determine your average positions (because you can store position data) <br>- Use planning functions <br>- Carry out deviation anal yses (for example, planned/actual comparison) <br>- Transfer data from external data sources <br>- Improve performance by using summarization levels</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The link from the treasury information function to the executive information function means that management reporting can now be perfo rmed for the entire organization. The treasury information function, operating i ndependently of other business areas, used to concentrate primarily on finance.< /span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Offers/quotations</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The trader enters the prices or quotations from variou s business partners for a certain transaction conveniently in one screen in the software and saves them, without having to create an active financial transactio n in the contract activity. The only entries required are as follows: <br><br>Company code <br>- Product/transaction type <br>- Amount <br>- Value date/term < br>- Quoted price/interest rate per counterparty <br>- Partner name and contact person<br><br>The trader can then create an active financial transaction directl y in this entry screen, or save the data and call the screen up again later to c reate a transaction with contract status from the data.<br><br>The offers are st ored in a separate number range. A resulting contract is created in the number r ange for the corresponding transaction type. The software groups all the offers and the contract in a reference for offers/quotations.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Before concluding a foreign exchange or money market c ontract, the trader obtains several offers from various banks. The trader accept s the most favorable offer and concludes a contract. The contract data is saved. <br><br>Up to now, the quotations from the other banks, which did not result in a contract, could not be stored in the SAP R/3 software. However, by saving offe rs and quotations from various competitors in the form of transaction data, the trader can run evaluations on the quality and price competitiveness of the indiv idual business partners.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Correspondence for treasury transactions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Outgoing correspondence is controlled at the activity level (order, contract, settlement, interest rate adjustment, knock-in, and so o n). In customizing and in the standing instructions for the business partner, yo u can define for each business partner which correspondence should be created fo r which activity.<br><br>There is a new function for confirming interest rate de

rivatives (swap, forward rate agreement [FRA], and caps and floors). You can opt to confirm only the conclusion of the transaction or also individual interest r ate adjustments.<br><br>All the central functions for correspondence management are also available for the new correspondence options (for example, displaying c orrespondence in the transaction, optical archive). By double-clicking on a list ed correspondence item, you can call up a display of the correspondence from the optical archive.<br><br>With regard to incoming correspondence, at present you can set a "counterconfirmation required" indicator for outgoing confirmations/co rrespondence (you do this when you assign forms to the individual activities and in the business partner standing instructions for correspondence). With this pr ocedure, there is a fixed link between the outgoing confirmation and the corresp onding incoming confirmation. <br><br>As of SAP R/3 release 4.5B, there is a fun ction for incoming confirmations, which enables incoming confirmations to be man aged independently of outgoing confirmations. This allows you to monitor the cou nterconfirmation status without actually having to send out confirmation first.< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Money market, foreign exchange, and derivatives deals concluded over the telephone are usually confirmed by one or both parties in wri ting. Correspondence may also be required for internal use (for example, dealing slips).<br><br>At present, such correspondence (which you can define and modify to meet your own requirements) can be generated for money market and foreign ex change transactions, and currency options. However, the more complex transaction s, such as swaps and the related interest rate adjustments, particularly need to be confirmed.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Credit management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The credit management function in the treasury managem ent component is based on the existing functions for awarding general loans in t he treasury loans component, which are being extended to cover loans taken. The corresponding product category general loans has been renamed "credit." <br><br> The following options are supported for setting up conditions: <br><br>- Repayme nt<br> > Installment repayment <br> > Annuity repayment <br> > Final repaymen t <br> > Any combination of repayment types <br> > Variable calculation period s and due dates <br> > Variable repayment clearing dates <br>- Interest calcula tion <br> > Fixed interest <br> > Variable interest <br> > Formula-based inte rest <br> > Variable calculation periods and due dates <br> > Various methods for determining the number of days used as a basis for interest calculation <br> - Commitment interest, charges, and so on<br> > Percentage of defined base amou nts <br> > Fixed amounts <br> > Variable calculation periods and due dates <br >- Discount/premium calculation<br> > Pro rata per disbursement <br> > Total a mount with first or last partial disbursement <br><br>The following transaction management functions are supported:<br><br>- Creating, changing, and displaying a loan contract <br>- Loan settlement <br>- Increasing the position for loan pay ables and receivables <br>- Increasing the remaining capital <br>- Increasing in terest calculation capital<br>- Capital waiver <br><br>The following position ma nagement functions are supported:<br><br>- Changing and displaying a loan contra ct <br>- Changing conditions <br>- Manual repayment <br>- Individual rollover <b r><br>A standard letter is available for correspondence.<br><br>The following ac counting functions are provided via the link to the general ledger in financial accounting:<br><br>- Automatic posting (of, for example, interest and repayments )<br>- Manual posting <br>- Balance sheet transfers (restricted scope) <br>- Acc rual/deferral of expenses <br>- Document reversal <br>- Information system<br><b r>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you run your evaluations by using the SAP R/3 drill-d own reporting tool.<br><br>In addition, an internal account statement and a mast er data sheet are available.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As of SAP R/3 release 4.5B, initial functions are avai lable for managing credit within the treasury management function.<br><br>This f

unctionality allows customers in industry to manage credit they grant and credit they are given in the software by using a link to the general ledger in financi al accounting.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cross-treasury reporting/reporting for securities: rei nstated original value according to Section 280 of the German Commercial Code</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the write-up calculated thr ough the revenue method is also represented as a key figure in drill-down report ing.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>According to Section 280 of the German Commercial Code (HGB), German companies may be required to reverse write-downs and reinstate th e original value of an asset, depending on the value in the tax balance sheet. A ny required write-ups which have not been performed must be disclosed in the app endix to the balance sheet.<br><br>There are two principles which can be applied : <br><br>- Cumulative method <br>- Revenue-oriented method <br><br>Up to now, o nly the write-up calculated using the cumulative method was included as a key fi gure in drill-down reporting.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Master agreement: integration of fixed-term deposit/de posit at notice</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are supported: <br><br>- Enter ing and editing master agreements <br>- Option to assign the master agreement to the transaction directly when you enter the transaction or at a later stage thr ough an extra function (in both cases, the SAP R/3 software checks whether the c onditions of the master agreement are fulfilled) <br>- Evaluation of the extent to which the total volume of the master agreement has been utilized by the trans actions assigned to it</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>A master agreement is used to define the arrangements and conditions with which individual transactions under the master agreement mus t comply. It comprises the following details: <br><br>- Term <br>- Permitted com pany codes <br>- Permitted business partners <br>- Permitted transaction types a nd the minimum and maximum terms of the corresponding transactions <br>- Permitt ed currencies and the minimum amount, the tranche, and the total volume of trans actions per currency</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Loans Taken</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The existing functions for managing loans given are be ing enhanced to cover loans taken. There are also functions for debt/credit mana gement in the treasury management component (see Development News TR-TM [treasur y management] Credit Management).<br><br>The following options are supported for setting up conditions: <br><br>- Repayment <br> > Installment repayment <br> > Annuity repayment <br> > Final repayment <br> > Any combination of repayment types <br> > Variable calculation periods and due dates <br> > Variable repay ment clearing dates <br>- Interest calculation (planned principle) <br> > Fixed interest <br> > Variable interest <br> > Formula-based interest <br> > Varia ble calculation periods and due dates <br> > Various methods for determining th e number of days used as a basis for interest calculation <br>- Commitment inter est, charges, and so on <br> > Percentage of defined base amounts <br> > Fixed amounts <br> > Variable calculation periods and due dates <br>- Discount/premi um calculation <br> > Pro rata per disbursement <br> > Total amount with first

or last partial disbursement <br><br>The following transaction management funct ions are supported: <br><br>- Applications and offers <br>- Creating, changing, and displaying a loan contract <br>- Link to collateral and collateral objects < br>- Loan settlement and loan disbursement <br>- Increase position for loan paya bles <br>- Increase remaining capital <br>- Increase interest calculation capita l <br>- Capital waiver <br><br>The following position management functions are s upported: <br><br>- Changing and displaying a loan contract<br>- Changing condit ions <br>- Manual repayment <br>- Individual rollover <br><br>A standard letter is available for correspondence.<br><br>The following accounting functions are p rovided via the link to the general ledger in the financial accounting component : <br><br>- Automatic posting (of, for example, interest and repayments) <br>- M anual posting <br>- Balance sheet transfers (restricted scope) <br>- Accrual/def erral of expenses <br>- Document reversal<br>- Information system<br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you run your evaluations by using the drill-down reporting too l.<br><br>In addition, an internal account statement and a master data sheet is available.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With SAP R/3 release 4.5B, initial functions are avail able for managing loans taken in the treasury loans component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Loans: summarization of flow data</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can summarize regular condition-based loan documen t items (and the corresponding payment flows) for each flow type by using a new function. The flows are summarized from the start of the term up to a loan-speci fic summarization date. This improves the performance of several application fun ctions.<br> Several application functions and central calculation functions can then retriev e the condition-based loan document items in the summarized form through a centr al read routine, instead of retrieving all the records.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>At present, the software calculates the capital amount s and cash flow for loans by taking all the posted flows in ascending chronologi cal order, beginning with the start of term for the loan.<br><br>Reading all the posted loan flows and processing these flows sequentially to calculate the cash flow and the capital amounts is time consuming. This can restrict performance i f there are numerous items.<br><br>This development improves performance by summ arizing loan document items to create carry-forward records. These records can b e used as a basis for financial mathematics and calculating capital amounts, as well as for reporting and processing in the corresponding application functions. <br><br>Loan position items are not influenced by the summarization. Hence, cust omer developments in the customer name space that access the table entries are n ot affected.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Securities: exercising rights</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The software automatically creates rights when you cre ate the corresponding class:<br><br>- 1RWH? When you create class data for warrants, you can choose not to specify the optio n category (call or put) or the mode of settlement (cash settlement or delivery) until later. As a result, several "rights" are generated for the warrant. The s oftware generates the right to call and the right to put, or the right with cash settlement and the right with delivery. The software always creates a right for a warrant. This lets you take the warrant off the books when it expires (expira tion right).<br>- ([DPSOH? If you do not enter the settlement indicator in the class data for an equity war rant (for example, stock warrant) and the option category is a call, the softwar e generates the following rights:<br> > Expiration right<br> > Call with cash

settlement<br> > Call with delivery<br><br>When you exercise the warrant, you c an choose which of these rights to use.<br><br>You can now exercise rights by us ing one transaction. The user receives all rights that are active on a certain e xercise date for a security ID number in a given company code.<br><br>For each s ecurities account, you can specify which right you wish to use for each part of the position.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The functions for exercising rights are being redesign ed to standardize the procedures and to let your exercise all rights by using on e transaction. Other rights, which were not represented in the software, are bei ng added. (See detailed Development News).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Securities: new dialogue for class data</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following features simplify class data processing: <br><br>- Tab strips<br>- List boxes<br>- Table controls<br><br>You have quicker access to frequently used class data, such as conditions, the exchange, and sec ondary indexes, and this data is easier to process. The initial entry screen has been changed for faster processing.<br><br>You can use the new transaction to p rocess all product categories previously available in the securities component:< br><br>- Stocks, shareholdings, and investment certificates<br>- Bonds, warrant bonds, and convertible bonds<br>- Subscription rights<br>- Index, equity, curren cy, and bond warrants<br>- Listed options and futures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The transaction for processing securities class data i s being replaced by a new transaction with a new user interface.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Transaction management: new user interface</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Transaction management is used for entering and proces sing financial transactions of the following product categories:<br><br>- Fixedterm deposits and deposits at notice<br>- Commercial paper<br>- Spot exchange tr ansactions and forward exchange transactions<br>- Interest derivatives<br>- Over -the-counter (OTC) options and listed options<br>- Futures<br>- Securities order s<br><br>Each financial transaction contains the following information:<br><br>Structure characteristics such as the product type and transaction type, compan y code, business partner, contract data, and product-specific characteristics su ch as conditions and flows or underlyings)<br>- Administration information that allows you to control processing and to assign a transaction to a portfolio or a master agreement<br>- Status data that provides information on the current proc essing status of a transaction<br>- Payment details that control the processing of incoming or outgoing payments resulting from a transaction<br>- Correspondenc e data that provides an overview of incoming and outgoing confirmations and deal ing slips linked to a transaction<br>- Memos that allow you to store additional transaction information as text<br><br>The functions for entering and processing transactions for the above product categories are being revised to improve the usability of transaction management. The aim is to simplify the way in which str ucture characteristics are represented for transactions whose product categories differ considerably, while presenting information that is the same for all prod ucts in a uniform manner.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The objectives of this revision are to simplify, speed up, and standardize the entry and processing of financial transactions in the t reasury management component and to improve access to important transaction info rmation.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Transaction management: cash flow based financial trans actions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cash flow based transactions let you represent a broad spectrum of transactions by manually entering the cash flow resulting from the s tructure in addition to the term. A cash flow is a chronological sequence of flo ws that describes position changes, expenses and revenues (such as interest and charges), and payments related to the transaction through the following informat ion:<br><br>- Flow types<br>- Amounts and currencies<br>- Dates<br>- Calculation bases<br><br>On this basis, the software supports transaction entry and process ing at the trading stage and the related processes in the back office and accoun ting areas.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>A new function is being developed to let you manage tr ansactions whose structure characteristics cannot be represented with the produc t categories currently available in treasury management. There is a new product category that allows the user to create and process transactions by entering the cash flow.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Treasury information function: new features</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>The drill-down reporting function has been expanded an d its usability improved. The new features enables you to accomplish the followi ng:<br><br>- Define reports without using a form<br>- Enter hierarchy nodes in f orms and reports<br>- Use the ABAP list viewer to display drill-down lists</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>Cash management has been connected to the former SAP B usiness Information Warehouse (now part of SAP NetWeaver).<br><br>This allows yo u to link cash management data with other operative data.<br><br>The cash manage ment, money market, foreign exchange, and derivatives components have been conne cted to the SAP executive information function. In this software, all treasury m anagement components can now be managed together.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Treasury information function: standard reports</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>The installation of the ABAP list viewer as an optiona l output format improves the display options for the drill-down reporting tool:< br><br>- The currency display is improved.<br>- You can position the report data for the display or printout by using up to three rows per item.<br>- All charac teristics can be displayed simultaneously.<br>- There is a user-specific initial screen layout for report execution.<br><br>In addition to the extensive drill-d own and online functions with which you are familiar in drill-down reporting, yo u can now display and print the reports you generate as a user-defined structure d list.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The structure and content of the cross-treasury and ap plication-specific reporting functions are being enhanced. Standard reports and reports generated by the drill-down reporting tool are stored in the same report ing tree. Customers can use this tree to create report hierarchies.<br><br>Drill -down reports delivered with the software replace many of the standard reports. This increases the flexibility of the reporting structure and report analysis an d establishes a standard procedure for treasury reports.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Financials</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI, CO, AM, FSCM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Volume notation of foreign exchange rates</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>If you are using volume and price notation simultaneou sly, a number of new developments on the GUI help you keep track of the differen t options:<br><br>- New, user-friendly input help for exchange rates<br>- Config urable input conventions for differentiating between exchange rates quoted in te rms of price or volume<br>- Improved maintenance of exchange rate tables<br><br> Interfaces usually provide a second exchange rate field for volume notation. Thi s guarantees maximum compatibility, particularly for communication with other sy stems running non-SAP software.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With the dual-currency phase of European Monetary Unio n (EMU) now well under way, exchange rates in Europe are being increasingly used and published as volume notations rather than as price notations. Volume notati on of exchange rates is already a widely used standard in countries outside Euro pe, such as the United States. Whether exchange rates are fixed and published as volume or price notations depends on the respective market standard and might even depend on individual business transactions.<br><br>In line with market requ irements, all the functions and applications of SAP R/3 software can now handle exchange rates quoted in terms of volumes. This was not always possible in previ ous SAP R/3 releases. The use of volume notation impacts the GUI (manual entry a nd batch input), internal and external interfaces, customizing, and the storage and retrieval of all data structures.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality management/plant maintenance/service managemen t: simplifying notification processing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions have been added in SAP R/3 rel ease 4.5B: <br><br>- Simplified operation through configurable user interface <b r>- Follow-up functions <br>- Several causes for each item <br>- Automatic partn er determination <br>- Creation of follow-up notifications <br><br>You can deact ivate individual objects in the notification, on the basis of the notification t ype. These objects do not then appear on the screen. This enables you to define a notification structure that is tailored to meet the needs of each of your busi ness transactions.<br><br>For example, the following notification structure is r equired for a specific notification type: <br><br>- Notification header <br>- No tification items <br>- Tasks for the notification items <br> No other object types appear.<br><br>You can freely define the data entry templa tes for the notification header data to simplify the creation of a notification. <br><br>Automatic follow-up functions are available. There are predefined functi ons readily available in an action box. You can choose various types of function s to implement and can predefine these functions for each notification type: <br ><br>- Create activities (for example, to document a telephone call) <br>- Creat e tasks (for example, to print a confirmation document) <br>- Create tasks and t rigger an SAP Business Workflow task (for example, to generate a credit memo req uest) <br> In addition to the functions available in the action box, SAP offers you a range of predefined activities. These include, for example, resetting the quality lev el and changing the quality information record. You can also amend other activit ies.<br><br>You can now enter several causes, instead of being limited to enteri ng only one cause, for each notification item.<br><br>Automatic partner determin ation is available. If you assign an organizational unit (for example, work cent er or department) to a notification, the system uses this information to determi ne all the assigned employees and lists them for selection.<br><br>You can creat e follow-up notifications. In complex business processes, it is sometimes necess ary to divide a notification into separate, independent notifications. This coul d happen, for example, during the processing of an internal problem notification if the vendor caused the defect. The notification must then be pursued as a com plaint against the vendor.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The notification functionality in the quality manageme nt, plant maintenance, and service management functions plays an important role

in the active processing of the following: <br><br>- Complaints <br>- Problem no tifications<br>- Malfunction reports <br>- Service notifications <br><br>The str ucture of the notification (for example, notification header, items, tasks, acti vities) can be modified by the customer, as required.<br><br>This enhancement au tomates and enriches the notification process to satisfy the demand faster and m ore efficiently.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Notification call from maintenance plan scheduling</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>A new type of maintenance plan controls the periodic t riggering of notifications. You can put these notifications in process as orders , use them directly as a work request, or use them for documenting inspection or maintenance results.<br><br>You can also use maintenance plans to trigger the t echnical implementation of inspection or maintenance activities, without creatin g a maintenance order at the same time.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality optimizes and improves maintenance plan with automatically triggered notifications.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Material stock management for single units (material s erial numbers)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Single units of a material, which you identify by usin g a material serial number, are recorded while being stored through a serial num ber stock segment. This serial number stock segment contains the following infor mation:<br><br>- Plant <br>- Storage location<br>- Batch or valuation type <br>Special stock (for example, consignment) <br>- Stock category (for example, unr estricted use, whether blocked, whether being inspected) <br>- Special stock key (customer/vendor number, work breakdown structure [WBS] element) <br><br>You ca n differentiate between the single units of a material, select from suitable ser ial numbers for goods movements, or check the stock data of selected serial numb ers against the posting data:<br><br>- List of stocks also at batch, valuation t yi D pf ef ,er ae nn dti sa pt ei co in alof stt oh ce k s lt eo vc ek l c (a pt reg vo ir oy us( lu ynr oe ns lt yri pc lt ae nd t u as ne d stoc rk a, geblock ae td ios nt )o <c bk r, >-in spection stock, and so on)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality offers more security, flexibility, and visibility on stock management. It also improves usability and efficiency.</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of the installed-base installation manageme nt</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You manage the installations using an installation num ber. The function contains the following:<br><br>- Identification of installatio ns through an installation number Installation components are as follows: <br> > Materials<br> > Pieces of equip ment<br> > Material serial numbers<br>- Documents <br>- Structure of an install ation (relation: "Object consists of...")<br><br>Installed base components are s uitable for companies that provide service and support in addition to product sa les and are used as the basis for the following:<br><br>- Maintenance contracts <br>- Preventive tasks <br>- Service calls <br>- Service orders <br><br>Good doc umentation for the installed base is essential for customer support and also pro vides an important source of information for new businesses.<br><br>You are prov ided with a structure list (for example, as-built, as-modified) with a validity period for the installations.</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>The installation number comprises a comprehensive stru cture of information to identify and manage all types of installed base componen ts.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in the time sheet</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Developments in the cost accounting area are as follow s:<br><br>- Assigning personnel costs In addition to the current option of posting working times assigned to a control ling object (for example, an order or a project) as costs by using an activity a llocation in the controlling component, you can transfer the working times toget her with their controlling object assignment to human resources functionality. T he working times are then available in the payroll accounting component, which t hen determines the proportionate personnel costs according to customer-specific regulations. The personnel costs are debited to the controlling object as primar y costs.<br>- Taking account of the master cost center Employees have a master cost center that is debited with their personnel costs a nd for which they perform work. The work performed is settled in the controlling object, and the master cost center is credited again. This process enables you to trace and analyze costs. If an employee performs work for another cost center (either as an exception or regularly) and the other cost center is credited for his or her work in controlling, the master and other cost center are unbalanced . However, this imbalance is settled automatically if you record the data on the time sheet and either assign the employee to the other cost center or carry out an activity allocation from the master cost center to the other cost center.<br >- Distributing the time sheet and the human resources functionality Distributing these in different systems running SAP R/3 software not only ensure s a better performance of the global system but also allows you to have a separa te human resources system in which you can store confidential personal data (for example, information on employees' salaries). You do not need this information to implement the time sheet. <br><br>The distribution is performed through the u se of application link enabling (ALE) and BAPI technologies. A synchronous link to the human resources functionality allows you to use all the time sheet functi ons. Even during human resources functionality downtimes, asynchronous linking t echniques allow you to use the time sheet with reduced functionality.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>You can use the cross-application time sheet function for standardized, cross-application time recording. The following major developm ents are new in SAP R/3 release 4.5B: <br><br>- Developments in the cost account ing area to allow you greater control over recorded working times. With this aim in view, methods are supported that include data and functionality from the hum an resources functionality, particularly the payroll accounting function. <br>You can distribute the time sheet function and the human resources functionality in different systems running SAP R/3 software. This allows you to divide the gl obal software into one part human resources and another part that includes logis tics, accounting, and the time sheet (for example, in order to protect confident ial personal data). If you want to record only times for human resources, you ca n use the time sheet in stand-alone human resources software, without any furthe r components. This function allows transparency and improves cost control on emp loyees.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Mobile Asset Management version 2.5</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP Mobile Asset Management application assists th e field service and the field maintenance technicians in performing their daily activities at customer sites and within plants with all the needed data synchron

ized onto their handheld devices. Also, the field technicians have the ability t o capture related data on their devices and then synchronize up with the back-en d software. This functionality enables the following:<br><br>- Radio frequency i dentification management<br>- Order management, in which time/material confirmat ion resides on device until final confirmation<br>- Measurement and counter read ing: condition recording<br>- Technical object management: display characteristi cs/classification data for equipment and functional locations<br>- Usability imp rovements<br> > To show enhancement links on the front end for activated busine ss add-ins (BAdIs)<br> > To display counterinformation for warranties and measu rement points related to equipment and functional locations</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables easy and fast access to tim ely information from everywhere, anytime:<br>- Field technicians can resolve pro blems faster and better.<br>- It reduces travel time and lowers costs per work o rder.<br>- It eliminates or decreases the need for paper-based orders.<br>- It e nables easy access to the latest stock information based on actual usage.<br><br >Technician can enter data directly on site, which results in the following bene fits:<br>- Data entry accuracy (for example, notification or counterreading data ) is improved.<br>- Data entry is direct, and there is no loss of data.<br>- Cle rical time spent in the back office re-entering field information is reduced.<br >- Total cycle time from job completion to invoice submission is reduced, with a ssociated cash flow benefits.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Maintenance cost budgeting</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With maintenance cost budgeting functionality, SAP off ers a cross-application component for product life-cycle management that enables planning a maintenance cost budget. Maintenance cost budgeting in general helps you budget for all costs for maintenance, inspection, and repair of technical a ssets. In the stricter sense of SAP R/3 software, maintenance cost budgeting hel ps you budget for plant maintenance order costs.<br> Maintenance cost budgeting provides the following planning scenario with preconf igured standard entries:<br> - The history-based scenario is derived from records, and the budget categories are combined in one overall planning scenario. In this scenario, you can create rb eu cd og re dt s c wa ite hgo tr hi ees. preventive, planned, and unplanned - The ad-hoc (hist) scenario is<br>- The maintenance plan scenario is zero based , and in it, you can create records only with the "preventive" budget category. <br>- The task list scenario is zero based, and you can create records only with the "planned" budget category. - The ad hoc (plan) scenario is zero based, and you can create records with the pb lu ad ng net d cat ne dgor ui ne ps l. a< n/ ns ep dan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The benefits of an appropriate budgeting tool include the following:<br> - Driving down maintenance costs<br>- Better data integrity than with spreadshee t-based budgeting<br>- Access to your plan data from everywhere with a user-frie ndly front end (Web interfaces)<br>- Ability to reflect changes in the near futu re<br>- Flexible and accurate reporting<br>- Integration with other enterprise s oftware<br>- Automatic extraction of data from back-end software<br>- Reduction of the budget preparation time<br>- Continuous planning with standardized, autom ated budget processes<br>- Better transparency of the budget planning process<br >- Support of planning as a company-wide effort, with a great number of managers and employees contributing<br>- Analytical applications, in addition to use as a tool</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Mobile Asset Management version 3.0</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>This application provides new functionality:<br> - Push alert for technicians<br>- Ability to change orders (created in the back end)<br>- Geographic information system (GIS) integration<br>- Signature capture <br>- Free-sorting functionality<br>- Ability to create and change equipment and functional location<br>- Usability improvements<br> > Confirmation process (ti me and material)<br> > Optimized inspection result recording<br> > Enhanced se arch functionalities<br> > GUI for laptop/Tablet PC </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It alerts technicians to download new work orders or notifications.<br>- It im proves productivity.<br>- It improves data capture quality.<br>- It provides bet ter information for route planning.<br>- It improves the user's experience.<br>It improves and expedites the billing cycle.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Basic order view</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new basic order view functionality comes with 19 p redefined subscreens that can be used to create order types tailored to customer -specific needs, including the following: - Responsibilities - Technical reference object - Dates (basic or enhanced view) - Description (short or long text) - Operation data (with selected fields or detailed data) - Partner overview (basic or enhanced view) - Address data with dynamic tabs, depending on the number of available addresses - Service-specific data (being invisible for plant maintenance orders) - Notification data (if customized for the order type to be visible) - Table control with operations - Ability to switch between old and new GUI at any time</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Benefits of the new basic order view are summarized as follows: - Improved flexibility of user interface - Adjustability to business needs and different users - Faster identification of important data - Speeded-up data entry</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Maintenance technician role</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides an overview for orders and notifications, including technical obje ct details.<br>- It enables technical structure display with the option to acces s further relevant information and services.<br>- It offers recording of orders, notifications, and confirmations, including after-event order recording for eme rgency work.<br>- It provides easy access to analyses and reporting.<br><br>The maintenance technician role provides a simple user interface for maintenance exe cution, request processing, confirmations, and reporting, and it offers a displa y of the asset structure.<br><br>This role is used mainly by maintenance technic ians. They need to get an overview, always up to date, of the maintenance work a ssigned to them, and they also need to check the status of the technical assets for which they are carrying out maintenance work. In addition, they need a tool that easily makes timely confirmations of the work they have done.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits:

- Easy maintenance processing ensures high user acceptance<br>- Information is a lways up to date, which leads to time savings and error reductions.<br>- Persona lization of the information improves efficiency and effectiveness.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Storage resource</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, storage or production resourc es are reproduced as storage resources that combine the characteristics of stora ge facilities and resources. This means, for example, that available capacity ca n be allocated to them, process orders can be dispatched for them, material stoc k can be allocated, and goods movements can take place for them.<br><br>The deve lopment includes the following areas:<br><br>- Storage resource maintenance and classification <br>- Master recipe maintenance with storage resources <br>- Proc ess order maintenance with storage resources <br>- Planning with storage resourc es <br>- Goods movement postings <br><br>The production optimization interface h as been enhanced. By maintaining and classifying storage resources, you create t he prerequisites for the selection of suitable storage resources in the master r ecipe and process order. Allocating storage resources to a resource network ensu res that the storage resource is integrated at the right place in the production line. Preceding and succeeding resources must, for example, be reached through pipes.<br><br>Using the classification system, you can assign characteristics to the storage resource, and use these characteristics to check whether a particul ar material may be filled into the resource. Classifying resources also facilita tes the selection of storage resources in planning. It ensures that storage reso urce commitment is suitable for the materials in the recipe. You can also use cl assification to check whether the storage resource can be used for a particular activity (for example, cooling). In addition, you can determine in the master re cipe whether material receipt, and issue to and from the storage resource, takes place at a certain time during an operation or continuously.<br><br>For capacit y requirements planning, storage resources are planned in the same way as all ot her production resources. Because available functionalities are assigned to them , you can plan production activities for them in the same way. For material requ irements planning, storage resources are treated like storage locations that is , the materials they contain are available for planning as part of the plant sto ck. If you exclude the storage resource from material requirements planning, its material stock is not contained in the available plant stock or subjected to ma terial requirements planning. However, stock withdrawals are unrestricted for th e storage location stock. <br><br>Goods movement postings (for example, a goods issue, goods receipt, or transfer posting for a material) result in a change in stock for the storage resource. Transfer postings can occur either within the sa me plant or between different plants.<br><br>The storage resource is included in the production optimization interface, which is used to transfer data between t he SAP R/3 software and external planning and optimization tools.<br><br>With re gard to manufacturing gases, granulates, and liquids in continuous production, t he differences between storage and production resources are becoming even less c lear than in discrete manufacturing. In the manufacturing process, a tank can be regarded as part of the production line. A tank serves, for example, as a buffe r between two processing units that produce or further process an intermediate p roduct at different speeds. If material remains in the tank after manufacturing has been completed, the tank takes over the role of a storage resource. The mate rial is again available as warehouse stock.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement provides more flexibility and efficie ncy in optimizing storage resource management (for example, allocations, product ion planning, and movements).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Production lot planning</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As of SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the SAP R/3 software is ex tended to include the following functions:<br><br>- You can define production lo ts. <br>- You can create bills of material for each production lot or model. <br >- You can create routings for each production lot. <br>- You can plan each prod uction lot separately. <br>- You can have a multilevel pegged requirements displ ay for each production lot. <br>- You can determine planned and actual costs for each production lot. <br>- You can have material stock for each production lot. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The necessity to upgrade products and reduce costs con tinuously means that in the mechanical and electronics industries, for example, production lots of finished products and semifinished parts have to be planned a nd produced with different bills of material or routings. Production lots can va ry because of, for example, the use of another component or another manufacturin g process. In this case, a specific cost determination and evaluation for each p roduction lot are necessary. In particular, planned costs and actual costs incur red by a production lot of an assembly can be determined before receipt of the s ales order.<br><br>You can achieve this by defining production lots. This proces s entails giving each production lot a number, for which a specific bill of mate rial and, if necessary, a specific routing have been created. The planning, prod uction, and costs evaluation is carried out in relation to this number. This pro cess enables you to evaluate the costs of the various production lots that have already been planned (before receipt of the sales order) and compare them to one another. <br><br>This type of planning is known as preplanned "seiban" in Japan .<br><br>Until now, separate planning and cost evaluation has been possible only for make-to-order and engineer-to-order productions, after the receipt of concr ete customer requirements. For this reason, the planning of production lots is b eing introduced with SAP R/3 4.5B to reduce costs and optimize production.</span ></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order progress report</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The order progress report shows clearly which document s, material requirements planning elements, stocks,and deliveries exist for prod ucts ordered by customers and for their components. You also receive information regarding the status and progress of each component. This information enables y ou to predict whether the delivery dates will be met or delayed.<br><br>The orde r progress report offers selection and filter functions that allow selected elem ents to be viewed for example, all elements belonging to a particular material. You can use profiles to generate individual views of each element. This is done by means of a hierarchical structure that can be expanded. First, all procureme nt elements, stocks, and deliveries relating to a product are displayed accordin g to the selection criteria. You can then "explode" the corresponding component structure for each internal procurement element. All existing elements for each of the components in the bill of materials are then displayed. Elements that wer e created manually and accounted to a sales order or work breakdown structure ar e also displayed.<br><br>The following elements are displayed:<br><br>- Planned orders <br>- Production orders <br>- Process orders <br>- Networks <br>- Purchas e requisitions <br>- Purchase orders <br>- Contract release orders <br>- Schedul e lines <br>- Reservations, dependent requirements <br>- Deliveries and goods is sues from sales and distribution <br>- Sales order stocks and project stocks <br >- Plant stocks and goods receipts from materials management <br><br>The softwar e displays the progress or delay for each procurement element individually. You can branch into display or change mode for each procurement element. You can als o branch directly into the stock/requirements list, the material requirements pl anning list, and the stock overview. You can update the report directly at any t ime by using the "Refresh" function.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In make-to-order and project-oriented production, it i

s important to have a report that provides an overview of the current status of procurement and production. The new order progress report enables you to determi ne whether the delivery date will be met or delayed. It also allows you to react to delays or bottlenecks from within the report. The order progress report allo ws control and transparency, and it facilitates decision making in real time.</s pan></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Material requirements planning area<br><br></span></td > <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you to accomplish the follo wing: - You can define material requirements planning (MRP) areas within a plant. <br> - You can define several MRP parameters for each MRP area, such as planned deliv ery time, MRP procedure, lot-sizing procedure, or special procurement type. <br> - You can carry out the planning run for an MRP area by using MRP procedures. <b r><br>In the evaluation function in the MRP functionality, you can display and p rocess the planning results for each MRP area.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As of SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the software includes the material requirements planning (MRP) area, which provides even more clarity and a more refined method of such planning within a plant. With this method, the MRP area represents an organizational unit, for which you can carry out the plannin g independently. The results of the planning run are displayed specifically for each MRP area.<br><br>With SAP R/3 4.5B, an MRP area can include one or several storage locations of a plant or a subcontractor for the materials planning of th e parts to be provided. You can assign a material to various MRP areas. <br><br> Every MRP area can, for example, correspond to an assembly line, a service stora ge location, or stock with a subcontractor. You can specifically plan independen t requirements for spare parts or other special requirements for individual MRP areas.<br><br>Until this release, you had carried out MRP at plant level. The va rious requirements were combined in the planning run and procurement elements we re created for these pegged requirements with unknown sources. This new function allows you to run MRP more flexibly and closer to the organizational reality.</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Change management for production orders</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following individual functions are included in the order change management process:<br><br>- Creating an order change request An order change request is created when changes are made to a sales order or whe n engineering/design or production changes are released. This request initiates the change process and manages the change activities. <br> - Selecting the objects to change All production orders affected by the changes in an order change request are sel ected. For the change management process, new order change requests are created for all of the affected production orders. - Creating simulation orders In the case of complex changes, the production order can be simulated before the changes are carried out in the operative order. This simulation order contains data from the newly "exploded" bills of material and routings. Actual data from the operative order can be included in the simulation order. This enables you to ask the question "What would happen if....?"<br> - Comparing changes: the software compares the data in the production order to t he following:<br> > Simulation order <br> > Bill of material <br> > Routing <

br>The result of this comparison can be saved and is displayed in a synchronizat ion (plus/minus) list in the order information software. The comparison can be c arried out for the order objects, order item, sequence, production resources and tools, operation, and components. In addition to the object comparison, it is p ossible to compare the structure of a collective order.<br> - Integrating changes The changes can be integrated into the production order. You can decide when an integration can take place and set the software accordingly. You can confirm tha t the changes have been carried out. <br> - Change process The entire change process, from the creation of an order change request to the i ntegration of changes in the production order, can run automatically in the back ground. Any errors that occur during this process are recorded in a log.</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>In the production and procurement process, it is often necessary that changes to master data for example, in bills of material and ro utings be copied to the production and purchase orders.<br><br>In make-to-order production, especially in the engineering and construction field, customers oft en request changes to be made. You should be able to implement these changes in the production and procurement processes, even when these processes are already operative.<br><br>Changes that occur in the area of engineering/design or produc tion for the make-to-stock production must be integrated into existing procureme nt elements. It is therefore necessary to have flexible change management for pr oduction orders in make-to-order and make-to-stock production that allows the fo llowing actions:<br><br>- The selection of procurement elements that are affecte d by changes <br>- The synchronization of these changes <br>- The integration of changes into the procurement elements <br>- The automation of the change manage ment process</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Characteristics planning with characteristics combinat ions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables the following: - Characteristics combinations can be maintained manually.<br>- Requirements can be entered for characteristics combinations.<br>- Information structures can be updated in the logistics information software at the characteristics combinatio n level.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>By creating characteristics combinations, you are able to manage the large number of possible combinations of characteristics more eff iciently. Characteristics combinations comprise one or more mutually dependent c haracteristics that are used frequently for planning in demand management.<br><b r>After the characteristics combinations have been determined, you can conduct c haracteristics planning on the basis of these combinations. You no longer need t o enter the planning data of characteristics individually. Consequently, the amo unt of time and effort necessary for the management of characteristics planning is reduced significantly.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Grouped just-in-time call</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are available in SAP R/3 relea se 4.5B:<br><br>- By setting a material requirement (kanban) to empty, you can c reate a grouped just-in-time (JIT) call and save it in a separate file. <br>- On e grouped JIT call can contain several kanbans. <br>- You can use various media and formats to transmit the grouped JIT call.<br>- Although the grouped JIT call and the scheduling agreement schedule line exist in parallel, only the scheduli

ng agreement schedule line (forecast or JIT delivery schedule) is relevant for m aterial requirements planning. <br>- On goods receipt, the SAP R/3 software upda tes both the JIT call with the kanban and the corresponding scheduling agreement . You can post the goods receipt to the kanban, to the grouped JIT call, or to t he scheduling agreement item. Whatever procedure you choose, the software update s all three.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The grouped just-in-time (JIT) call creates a delivery -relevant JIT call from production with reference to a scheduling agreement and improves usability. The JIT call can be administered and transmitted as a separa te document.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Dialogue control in the pull list: specific user guida nce</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can adapt the procedure in the pull list to suit y our requirements. You can define which steps to perform online and which to perf orm in the background. This means you can automate the steps that are constant. A new procedure supports error processing.<br><br>All selection parameters are r ecorded in groups on one screen. This provides clarity and ensures that the pull list is easy to access.<br><br>New links to bordering components are available from the pull list. For example, you can move to the following displays:<br><br> - Warehouse management stocks<br>- Material display<br>- Kanban board display<br >- Kanban control cycle<br>- Pegged requirements<br><br>In all material replenis hment transactions, you can work with different units of measure.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - An enhanced initial screen, more links to bordering components, and improved u sability provide you with more support when you work with the pull list.<br>- Yo u can perform the steps for replenishing material online or automatically in the background. This simplifies the complete procedure in the pull list.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Electronic batch record</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new structure of the batch record and functional e nhancements in the SAP R/3 software improve batch record navigation and layout. Examples of actions are as follows:<br><br>- Navigation in a tree structure in w hich the batch records and their documents are presented in a clear and hierarch ical way<br>- Customer-specific configuration of batch record layout and content s<br>- Creation of a separate deviation list containing irregularities connected with the batch<br><br>For a more detailed description of these improvements, se e below. They add to existing benefits, such as the following:<br><br>- Facility to add external archive files to the batch record to include, for example, raw data documented in the process control software or data of legacy software in wh ich change management does not comply with requirements stipulated in Title 21 o f the Code of Federal Regulations (21 CFR) Part 11<br>- Ability to use any outpu t format that suits the data type and information type, such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, or HTML, and standard navigation offered by Internet browsers<b r>- Approval procedure for batch records that involves reliability of records' b eing guaranteed by digital signatures<br>- Version management for batch records to let you add data to approved batch records and approve the new batch record v ersion<br><br>Regulations for the pharmaceutical industry require pharmaceutical companies to provide detailed documentation of the manufacturing process, the m aterials used, and the distribution of the products manufactured. For this reaso n, all information gathered about the batch during the production and packaging of a product is kept in one document. This document is known as the "EDWFK UHFRU

G." It contains the following information:<br><br>- Instructions and processes f or the line operator<br>- Data collected during the production process<br>- Resu lts of in-process quality inspections<br>- Information on deviations and measure s taken as a result<br>- Process parameters of production lines used<br>- Result s of postprocess quality inspections<br>- Samples of the materials used, such as cartons and labels<br><br>The batch record contains all information required fo r releasing a batch, using it in another process, or selling it. Depending on le gal requirements, the head of quality control alone or the head of quality contr ol and the head of production check and approve the batch record. The approval i s part of the batch record.<br><br>As a result of increased use of computers to record measurement results, to document process steps, and to guide employees du ring order execution, much of this information is available electronically. Howe ver, it must also be compiled on paper to comply with legal requirements.<br><br >According to new laws, such as the final rule on electronic records and electro nic signatures, 21 CRF Part 11, issued by the FDA, it is not sufficient to evalu ate electronically recorded data, sign these evaluations, and add them to the ba tch record. The source files must also be stored in a way that guarantees comple te documentation of changes, including original and changed values. Therefore, i t makes sense to keep a batch record electronically and to convert paper documen ts into electronic documents that can be allocated to the relevant batch record. The electronic batch record was first made available in SAP R/3 release 4.0. At that time, the specification of batch record functions and features was based o n the procedures and requirements of paper documentation. The entire document wa s to have continuous page numbers so that it could be checked for completeness. For this reason, different types of information were combined and put into a fla t structure. <br><br>Today it is accepted that the completeness of batch records is guaranteed by the software, provided that the software is validated. Therefo re, the electronic batch record can have a different structure. It can now consi st of several documents that contain data of different origin and type. The soft ware automatically creates a table of contents to provide an overview of all the documents that a batch record contains. Continuous page numbering is now requir ed only when documents are printed.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement aims at completing the functionality of the SAP R/3 software to comply with the legal requirements for the pharmaceut ical industry.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements for confirmation transactions</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The most important innovations are as follows:<br><br> - Single screen entry with configurable screen A new confirmation transaction lets you make confirmations on a single screen. A fter saving a confirmation, the screen is ready for the next entry. There is no need to move to another screen. The screen for this transaction can be configure d according to specific needs. Entry fields can be arranged to suit customer req uirements.<br>- Customer fields and detail screens in confirmation transactions A new option makes it possible, through a customer enhancement, to include a cus tomer s fields in the confirmation table. These can then be included in an additi onal, customer-specific detail screen, or in the table controls for collective o r fast entry transactions, in order to be maintained. You can include a customer s fields on the single entry screen.<br>- Configurable texts and units for activ ities If the text assigned to the activity type does not describe the activity, you ca n define alternative texts.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To enhance the usability of SAP R/3, there are numerou s large and small developments and changes in production orders for confirmation s and goods movement. The software becomes more intuitive for you to use. Time t icket confirmation for an operation has been a priority because this is the most

frequently used transaction in this area. Particular attention has been given t o the following goals:<br><br>- Increased user-specific tailoring: for example, through configurable detail screens<br>- Making customer-specific enhancements e asier: for example, for the integration of a customer s fields and detail screens in confirmation transactions<br>- A reduction in the number of process steps: f or example, by using single-screen entry<br>- Improving processing speed: for ex ample, by combining similar warning messages and removing unnecessary messages, or by including more default values for confirmations<br>- Making the software e asier to understand: for example, by eliminating abbreviations and having contex t-sensitive field descriptions<br>- Avoiding errors: for example, by improving F 1 help actions and context-sensitive input help actions</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Focus on material requirements planning controller and usability</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The general handling of material requirements planning (MRP) functions (MRP list, stock/requirements list) has been simplified and mad e more consistent. The following new developments simplify working in MRP:<br><b r>- The safety stock and replenishment lead time are displayed in individual row s in the MRP and stock/requirements lists.<br>- The processing indicator for ind ividual MRP lists can be set directly in the collective display of MRP lists.<br >- In the collective display of the stock/requirements list, the user can select by exception messages occurring within a period of time.<br>- The collective di splays of the MRP and stock/requirements lists can be printed in various ways.<b r>- User-specific display and import filters enable the selection of specific MR P elements (such as planned/production orders, purchase requisitions, and so on) ; the MRP controller can use the filter function to receive only the information that is relevant for him or her, thereby obtaining a faster overview of the cur rent planning situation.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The material requirements planning (MRP) work environm ent can be adjusted to suit the requirements of the MRP controller.<br><br>Enhan ced integration in the logistics chain allows quicker access to important inform ation that is relevant for planning. The MRP functions have been optimized to si mplify their execution and increase user friendliness. The main optimizations ar e as follows:<br><br>- Enhanced integration of individual and collective evaluat ions<br>- More flexible call sequences, enabling quicker switching between relat ed work areas<br>- Simplified, faster access to MRP-relevant information<br><br> These enhancements consolidate the SAP R/3 software s extensive support of the MR P controller s work processes.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Graphical kanban board</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new GUI lets you select the information displayed in the kanban board and configure the display according to your requirements. Th e following can be set:<br><br>- Data that is displayed for each control cycle<b r>- Control cycle sorting<br>- Colors used to display status<br><br>Quick inform ation and sorting for the kanbans can be defined in the control cycle. You can n ow use material requirements planning (MRP) for materials for which kanban gener ates run schedule quantities or production orders. Integration of kanban and MRP is complete.<br><br>Until this release, materials for which production was trig gered through kanban had to be excluded from MRP if kanban generated run schedul e quantities or production orders. In this case, only manual information could b e created from kanban, and this was used to trigger production. Now, materials f or which kanban generates run schedule quantities or production orders can be in cluded in MRP.<br><br>The MRP run, on the basis of independent requirements, cre ates planned orders as a forecast and dependent requirements for the components.

When a run schedule quantity or a production order is generated from kanban, th e planned orders in MRP are reduced. This makes sense if the components are proc ured by planning or if the forecast for the component requirements takes place i n operative MRP (rather than long-term planning).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The kanban board has been converted into a GUI and thu s allows user settings. This facilitates use of the planning board and allows fa ster access to relevant information, which in turn accelerates the planning proc ess by providing more usability.<br><br>Materials for which kanban controlled ru n schedule quantities or production orders are created can be planned in the MRP run and "exploded" in the bill of materials.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>GUIfor engineeringworkbench</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The most important features of the browser are as foll ows:<br><br>- Call up The browser can be called up from every screen in the engineering workbench. The screen has two parts: one each for the graphical browser and the engineering wo rkbench. You can use normal navigation methods. The browser is an additional nav igation tool that you can hide or show.<br>- Display details Because of the multiple relationships that exist between routing objects and obj ects of the bill of material, the displayed structure takes the form of a simple hierarchy.<br>- Context menu This appears if you select an object and click the right mouse button. Depending on the object type and status, all available object-specific functions are on t his menu.<br>- Graphical processing Selected objects can be copied or transferred to a clipboard with the drag-and-d rop function and, afterwards, inserted in or copied to other objects. All necess ary plausibility checks can be performed.<br>- Find object function The browser provides an overview of the objects in the work list. When you are w orking with large structures, this may not be enough. An extended search functio n will be added that lets you find objects quickly. The search result is display ed in a list, and by using the drag-and-drop function, you can insert the object s into the structure displayed in the browser.<br>- Document display The relevant external application or the viewer embedded in the GUI can be used to display original documents that are managed by document information records, if the necessary viewer or application is installed on the front end.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>The engineering workbench browser simplifies both navi gation in the workbench and object processing. You can find information more qui ckly. This reduces processing time. The graphical display illustrates the struct ures and their processing contexts.<br><br>The browser optimizes both navigation and processing of the objects displayed. It displays all object types that are processed in the engineering workbench and all relationships between these objec t types in a clear way. You can navigate by expanding hidden objects in the stru cture. You can limit the objects displayed by using selection parameters and fil ters. During object processing, you can directly call up all general and objectspecific functions. Direct processing in the GUI for example, by means of the d rag-and-drop function is also possible.<br><br>You can also move from the gener ic product structure browser into the engineering workbench.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability and Process Optimization in Repetitive Manfa cturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following developments simplify the planning table :<br><br>- The new initial screen simplifies the selection procedures for access ing the planning table.<br>- The flexible time buckets provide new options for d

isplaying the period of examination. For example, you can display the first few days in shifts, the following weeks in days, and the rest of the period in weeks and months.<br>- There is more consistency in the detail screens for planned or ders and production orders.<br>- There is an option for setting the planning tim e fence manually as in Material Requirements Planning.<br>- It is easy to conver t the units of measure of all materials displayed in the planning table.<br>- Na vigation in the planning table is improved (go to individual periods or material s directly).<br><br>The different types of back-flush are grouped into one backflushing transaction from which you can move directly to document logs and repro cessing functions. You can also use transaction variants to define user settings . This simplifies back-flushing processes because the user only sees the fields and back-flushing functions required (for example, back-flush yield, scrap, and so on).<br><br>Various flexible selection options are available to display the d ocument log. Until now, it was possible to schedule using material-dependent rat es. The production rates of the line are entered with a standard unit of measure . For these units of measure, you enter a conversion factor to the base unit of measure in the master record of the materials in question. This procedure has be en simplified so that you can now enter a material-dependent production rate dir ectly in Line Design.<br><br>Together with the production rates of the line, thi s material-dependent production rate controls the planned production quantity of individual materials and the calculation of order dates in a planning period. E valuation can now be performed in definable time buckets as in the planning tabl e for repetitive manufacturing.<br><br>The run schedule header for planning and controlling has been abolished. In future, for make-to-stock production, you onl y create a production version (basic data, BOM and planning data) and a product cost collector.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Because of the new initial screen, flexible time bucke ts and faster navigation, your work in the planning table becomes more effective :<br><br>- The back-flushing functions are more user-friendly. Back-flushing is now performed from one screen for various scenarios (for example, make-to-stock production, make-to-order production, or production by lots). Entry can be adapt ed for each user.<br>- In sequencing, you can schedule orders by using productio n rates and takt times. Now, you can also use a material-dependent production ra te.<br>- To standardize and simplify the processes in repetitive manufacturing, the run schedule header has been abolished.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order bill of materials and the product structure brow ser</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can switch from order bill of materials (BOM) main tenance directly to the product structure browser. On the initial screen, you mu st enter the order and the order item, as well as the BOM "explosion" date or th e change number (effectivity parameter) if necessary. Navigation starts automati cally at the BOM header material in the sales document.<br><br>The software disp lays only the node for the BOM header material. This is the order BOM assembly f or the current order. If you have not created an order-specific assembly on the top level, the non order-specific material in the BOM is displayed. If the assemb ly is configurable, the configuration editor is called when you choose to mainta in the assembly, because to do this, you need information about the configuratio n structure.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the area of sales order oriented processing, the mai ntenance of the individual product structure has now been made considerably easi er, by the incorporation of a browser. This benefits users who need an overview of the current situation of a sales order and want to maintain it or use reporti ng functions.<br><br>This is made possible by the product structure browser. Thi s browser graphically displays and clearly formats the multilevel tree structure of a sales order bill of materials (BOM). The product structure browser meets t he demands of sales order oriented processing. Even during the development phase

of the product structure for a sales order, it shows the level on which individu al order BOM assemblies have already been created and the level on which the non order-specific material in the BOM assembly is "exploded" in the sales order.<br ><br>The following requirements have been met:<br><br>- When you display the ass embly BOM structure, configurable and nonconfigurable assembly BOMs are "explode d" on screen.<br>- On each level of the navigation structure of a sales order, y ou can view whether an assembly has multiple levels, whether an assembly is conf igurable, and whether a result-oriented BOM exists on that level for the sales o rder. Graphical structure indicators help you follow the navigation structure.<b r>- In the result-oriented assembly BOM, you can switch directly to the maintena nce environment. A configurable assembly must access the configuration editor th at provides all necessary information.<br>- When you start the browser, you can choose which data is used to "explode" the structure:<br> > In a sales order co ntext, the relevant BOM "explosion" date from the sales order is used automatica lly as a reference for navigation in the assembly structure. <br> > In an engi neering change context, you begin sales order navigation, independently of the s ales order, by entering the general effectivity parameters for engineering chang e management.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order information function and high-volume order manag ement</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The tool selects orders according to selection criteri a or a user-specific work list. While the selected data is processed, orders can be added or removed from the work list. The user-specific list can be saved, so that the user can continue working with it at a later stage, without having to reselect data. In addition to this, the user can add processing notes and a proc essing status to the work list.<br><br>The user can choose between separate list s for displaying order headers, operations, components, or production resources and tools. The standard ABAP list viewer is used to display these lists. The lis t layout (field selection, sorting, filtering) can be customized and stored indi vidually. Because this viewer is widely used in the SAP software, most users are familiar with its operation.<br><br>The current order information function is e nhanced by additional functions for individual and mass processing of displayed objects, including the following:<br><br>- Comprehensive navigation by selecting objects with the mouse: for example, materials, work centers, or production res ources and tools<br>- Creation and cancellation of confirmations</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The already existing order information function is oft en used to create a list of orders to be processed.<br><br>You can move from thi s list to display or change single orders. Within the framework of high-volume o rder management, mass and background processing functions for releasing and sche duling production orders are available in the order information system.<br><br>T he main goal of the enhancements in this area is to make it easier for you to up date and process their daily workload by using the order information function. A standardized user interface has been added to the function to improve usability , and more transactions and mass processing functions have been included to incr ease the versatility of this standard entry point for user tasks.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Order split</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are provided:<br><br>- Structu re The structure of the "parent" order does not change. The structure of the "child " order is a copy of a subset of the parent order objects. This subset contains the split operations, all subsequent operations, all objects allocated to these operations (for example, material components), and all sequences to which the op

erations are assigned.<br>- Quantities The header, operation, and component quantities of the parent and child orders a re automatically determined by the split quantity chosen.<br>- Dates The parent order is rescheduled after the split. The dates of the child order ar e automatically determined by the chosen basic dates and scheduling parameters.< br>- Planned costs: The parent order is recalculated after the split. The planned costs of the child order are automatically determined by the parameters of the chosen order type.< brA >ctual costs: Because all actual costs posted before the order split are charged to the parent order, this can lead to differing costs for each piece. To prevent cost varianc es, parent and child orders are settled to a common product cost collector.<br>Systems status A system status is assigned to the parent order, and another is assigned to the cp S hl ii lt d h oi re dr ea rr .c <h by r>Parent and child orders can be split several times. The result is a split hierar chy.<br>- Navigation You can navigate in a split hierarchy by using a navigation tree. The navigation tree, which is situated on the left side of the order screen, hierarchically di splays all selected orders that are linked through one or more splits. The order that is currently being processed is highlighted.<br><br>Because all orders in the split hierarchy can be changed before saving the order split, the function c an also be used for simulation.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement enriches production order management by providing a new comprehensive set of functions. In a production process, all materials in a production order usually progress together from one operation to the next. There can be a logistical need to divide the materials into two groups that are then processed separately. This occurs in the following situations:<br ><br>- Material components assigned to the production order are not available in the required quantity. The materials to be produced can be separated into two g roups, so that material components are available for processing at least one of the groups.<br>- Because of a change in requirements, the materials to be produc ed have different requirement dates. By separating the materials, they can be pu t into groups with different requirement dates.<br>- Because of capacity bottlen ecks, only material that is required immediately must be processed first.<br>- M aterials fail the quality inspection. These materials must be processed differen tly than those that pass quality inspection, and they require different or addit ional operations.<br>- The production order cannot be finished on time. The mate rials results can be separated into a smaller quantity for each group that can b e processed faster than the complete order quantity.<br><br>To process materials separately, you have to create a second production order. The new "RUGHU VSOLW" function automatically creates the second production order. It divides a partia lly completed discrete production order into a parent order and a child order. T he software adjusts quantities and dates and handles the costs of the two orders .<br><br>You can select the operation from which the materials will be separated , and then you define the split quantity and scheduling parameters. You can upda te split orders after the order has been split.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability enhancements for production orders</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality has the following features: - Configurable detail screens Using customizing settings, you can assign predefined subscreens to individual d etail screens. You can also rename detail screens. The function of existing batc h inputs is guaranteed using the default settings.<br>- Additional user exits fo r customer enhancements

The user exits available in a production order have been increased for important fields, such as the following:<br> > User exit for including a customer s field s in all central order tables (header, operation, and components) When these fields are integrated into a customer s subscreens, they can be includ ed either in available detail screens by means of customizing settings or as a h eader subscreen (area above the tab strips). <br> > User exit for integrating one more customer detail screen (tab strip) for all central order objects (heade r, operation, and components) On this detail screen, you can also integrate a customer s subscreens, in order t o maintain fields from customer enhancements of order tables. A corresponding me nu entry also becomes active.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>To enhance the usability of SAP R/3, there are numerou s large and small developments and changes in the area of shop floor control. Th e software is more intuitive to use. Maintenance transactions for a production o rder have priority because they are the most frequently used transactions in thi s area. Attention is given to the following:<br><br>- Increased user-specific ta iloring and personalization: for example, through configurable detail screens<br >- Making customer-specific enhancements easier: for example, with an additional user exit for the integration of a customer s fields<br>- Improving processing s peeds: for example, by double-clicking to move to the object concerned and placi ng object-specific push buttons below overview screens<br>- Improving orientatio n: for example, by consistently positioning push buttons for the most frequently used functions and showing user status beside software status<br>- Making train ing easier: for example, by eliminating abbreviations and displaying short texts <br>- Avoiding errors: for example, through better F1 help and context-sensitiv e input help</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Material reconciliation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality has the following features: - The goods movements for the process orders represent the basis for material re conciliation for example, all goods receipts with all returns and all cancellat ions, as well as all goods withdrawals with all returns and all cancellations.<b r>- The material reconciliation can be structured according to information requi red in production. <br>- The goods movements that are to be included in the mate rial reconciliation can be redefined for each production run.<br>- The component s that are to be included in the material reconciliation can be redefined for ea ch production run.<br>- The results of the material reconciliation are recorded in the batch record and are used to document the production process. <br><br>You use material reconciliation to analyze and verify ingredients at the end of a p roduction process. It allows you to compare the material quantity that actually flowed in with the planned quantity or the quantity of the produced material. Fu rthermore, any other information based on movement types can be displayed for th e ingredients. <br><br>Because it enables the used material quantities to be mon itored, the material reconciliation function is particularly significant in the production of pharmaceuticals.<br> Material reconciliation deals with material quantities exclusively and should no t be confused with reconciliation in the sense of controlling.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Material reconciliation allows control and transparenc y by monitoring used materials quantities. It provides the ability to analyze an d verify ingredients at the end of the production process.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Material identification in production</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The material identification functionality is divided i

nto two areas:<br><br>- Material identification by means of material and batch n umbers This refers to materials that carry a material identification directly, such as packaging materials. In this case, the materials are identified by their materia l number or, in the case of materials handled in batches, by their batch number. A start quantity check is sufficient here that is, at least one unit of the re quired materials must be present for production to be started or continued. This is the case with packaging materials in particular. A component check is then c arried out in which the material number is compared to the bill of material for the process order. This ensures that the material being identified is part of th e process order.<br><br>- Material identification by means of handling units This is relevant for materials that have to be weighed or measured, such as powd ers, and that are packed in containers or handling units soon after they have be en weighed. In this case, the handling unit carries the material identification, such as a bar code. The materials are identified by the number of the handling unit, whereby a handling unit can contain more than one material. Material ident ification with handling units includes the following checks:<br> > Completeness check<br> > Sequence check<br>The ingredients must be picked in the handling u nits for material identification through handling units. The following functions can be used for this purpose:<br> > Manual picking through online function<br> > Automatic picking through process message and external weighing system<br>Th e completeness check can be carried out at different stages in production. For e xample, it can be carried out both at the start of production for all the materi als in the process order and for a certain operation or a specific phase in prod uction. The following can be checked in each case:<br> > Complete quantities: a ll handling units that have been picked for the process order up to now. This ca n also be just some of the handling units that are required for the order.<br> > Start quantities: at least one unit of measure of each material to be used mus t be available so that production can be started.<br>In the sequence check, diff erent types of production (particularly in the pharmaceutical industry) may dict ate a specific sequence of materials for a specific operation. This sequence mus t be followed and checked. This check, too, can be carried out for the entire pr ocess order at the start of production or at the beginning of an operation or ph ase.<br><br>For logging by means of batch records, the material identification d ata is transferred to the batch record automatically.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement allows you to identify and verify mat erials before they are used in production. The results are then logged in the ba tch record.<br><br>Because it allows the use of materials to be monitored, this function is particularly relevant in the production of pharmaceuticals. This is also stipulated by the European Union's Good Manufacturing Practices, which requ ire that every material provided, including its weight and volume, be monitored independently. The results are then logged and can then comply with the legal re quirements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Business-to-business planning data access in material logistics</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The planning data from the material requirements plann ing (MRP) list and the general stock/requirements list is opened to external acc ess through the Internet. A customer can thus keep track of the status of an ord er with a vendor, for example, and a vendor can see the orders that a manufactur er has already planned for that vendor in the next months.<br><br>The filter and authorization concepts ensure that only data that is meant for the respective p arties is displayed.<br><br>The following user roles and authorizations are impl emented:<br><br>- Internal employee: no restrictions<br>- Vendor: all orders for the respective vendor are displayed<br>- Customer: individual customer segments and sales orders for the respective customer are displayed<br><br>The smooth ru nning of planning processes is also supported on the Internet by a direct e-mail

connection from the MRP list and the general stock/requirements list. When you access this function, certain planning data is transferred directly into the e-m ail as standard text. The MRP controller can therefore contact suppliers, custom ers, and internal employees quickly and efficiently in critical planning situati ons.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Planning data in material logistics for example, as p rovided by the material requirements planning (MRP) list and the general stock/r equirements list is no longer just a tool for the MRP controller; it is also a valuable source of information for other target groups. The new technologies, wh ich have been used to open SAP applications to Internet access, enable business partners to view each other s planning data within the limits of sophisticated fi lter and authorization concepts.<br><br>The transparency and constant availabili ty of planning data across company borders help improve business relationships a nd increase the accuracy of a company s planning.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Object linking and embedding for process control Data Access (SAP ODA)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The functionality object linking and embedding (OLE) f or process control (OPC) data access supports the following specifications of th e OPC Foundation:<br><br>- OPC data access During configuration, you can request a list of all available OPC servers. You c an create a separate server alias for each OPC server in the SAP R/3 software. I f an alias is supported by the OPC server, you can select data points (tags) dir ectly from the chosen OPC server within the SAP Business Suite family of busines s applications, using name space browsing. This facilitates the creation of item aliases for every OPC data point used in the software. Once the data points (it em aliases) are defined, they can be used for the synchronous writing and readin g of values from or to SAP Business Suite applications. Value change subscriptio n mechanisms enable you to inform a component or user of SAP Business Suite (for example, the browser-based process instruction sheet) if a value within an OPC item changes. Quality changes of the OPC data point value can also be reported. Parameters for update rates and dead bands as specified in the OPC data access s pecification are supported. Asynchronous read and write operations, as specified in the OPC data access Specification 2.0, are not supported. In addition, value s can be manipulated by a conversion exit in the case of synchronous read and wr ite operations. You can relate item aliases to message characteristics of proces s message categories of the SAP NetWeaver Process Management component. This ena bles you to schedule a job periodically, which creates process messages with the related OPC item values (polling for data collection).<br><br>- OPC alarms and events You can maintain subscriptions in SAP R/3 to receive alarms and events. If suppo rted by the OPC alarms and events server, you can specify the event types (simpl e, tracking-related, or condition-related), event category, and event area in wh ich an application is concerned.<br><br>- Integration of OPC data access OPC data access is fully integrated with the browser-based product information s heet and manufacturing cockpit of the SAP Supply Chain Management application. A ddressing OPC data access for many other application components (for example, pl ant maintenance within the SAP Product Lifecycle Management application) is not part of the standard shipment, but this can be realized in a customer project. O PC data access acts as a request-for-comments (RFC) server and client for the my SAP.com e-business platform (no longer used) and as an OPC client for the OPC se rver. Reading and writing multiple tags is supported within one call to a given OPC server.<br><br>The OPC specifications define a nonproprietary set of standar d interfaces maintained by the OPC Foundation (http://www.opcfoundation.org/). T he new OPC data access technical component is available to support better integr ation of automation software through OPC technology.<br><br>This functionality a cts as an OPC client that supports the OPC data access specifications and the al

arms and events specifications: it is a connector for all of the more than 100 O PC data access and alarms and events servers available on the market.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>Object linking and embedding (OLE) for process control (OPC) data access adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It reduce s setup and configuration efforts through the use of plug-and-play mechanisms; n o customer-specific programming or additional middleware is required.<br>- It pr ovides an interface for every component of SAP Business Suite with the OPC indus try standard.<br>- Reduces potential errors by the process operator during data input through its integration into the browser-based process instruction sheet.< /span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Manufacturing execution</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized as follows: - Dynamic process instruction sheet Within the browser-based process instruction sheet, you can activate or deactiva te, lock, and unlock execution steps and process instructions manually, or in an automatic, condition-based manner. All these activities can be logged. The log becomes part of the process instruction sheet in the electronic batch record. Yo u can lock or unlock a process instruction sheet, or parts of it, depending on t he status of another process instruction sheet of the same process order. In con trast to deactivated steps, you cannot complete the process instruction sheet if there are still locked execution steps. Also, you can use digital signatures to authorize manual activation, deactivation, locking, or unlocking. If necessary, fields within the browser-based process instruction sheet can be updated dynami cally by the value of an object linking and embedding (OLE) for process control (OPC) server tag or item, or a global variable, without choosing the "Refresh" o ption.<br><br>- OPC The OPC specifications define a nonproprietary set of standard interfaces, maint ained by the OPC Foundation (http://www.opcfoundation.org/). OPC data access is a technical component that integrates with the automation world by using the OPC standard in a plug-and-play manner.<br><br>- Soft logon mechanism A group user (service user) with limited authorizations can be used to log on to the system and start the application. If operators start a browser-based proces s instruction sheet in the change mode, they must identify themselves again with their personal authorizations. Before users leave the workstation, they need to log off, but they do not need to exit the application or maybe even the softwar e. If required, they or somebody else can continue later, which is useful at a p roduction line or manufacturing facility.<br><br>- Central alert management A new process message destination is available that updates the new central aler t management of the SAP R/3 Enterprise software. Messages can come from the brow ser-based process instruction sheet or from an external system in which the proc ess instruction process control system interface is used.<br><br>- Digital signat ure A new generic tool supports digital signatures. As a user, you can benefit from the new user interface: comments, remarks predefined by the relevant application , and a history of the signature process are at your disposal. New asynchronous signatures enable you to postpone the creation of process messages until another person (for example, the shift or plant manager) has signed. This is no longer limited to the completion step of a process instruction sheet. <br><br>- Documen t management system integration Documents maintained in the SAP Easy Document Management application can now be integrated with the browser-based process instruction sheet through the use of i frames or framesets. These documents can be archived in the electronic batch rec ord.<br><br>The manufacturing execution function in SAP Supply Chain Management is based on the SAP NetWeaver Business Process Management component. It has addi

tional production execution features and serves as generic manufacturing softwar e. It aims at better supporting users in the plant and making the plant a more v isible and agile part of the supply chain.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The manufacturing execution enhancement adds business value in the following ways:<br><br>- It reacts faster in exceptional situations and improves flexibility and speed through dynamic, event-driven execution. <br >- It processes events in "near time" and offers central alert management.<br>It facilitates integration and collaboration with the automation world at the sh op floor by using the oject linking and embedding (OLE) for process control (OPC ) standard.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Documentary batch</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports batch tracking, eliminating the need to manage batch inventory.<br >- It manages all required data such as material-tracking numbers to support leg al regulations.<br><br>Industries such as consumer products and automotive suppl iers face legal requirements to store where-used data of materials used for prod uction and delivered to customers. Enabling recall actions is mandatory and a cr itical issue for these industries. Although this could be achieved by managing o f all relevant materials in batches, this approach has a negative impact on data volume and subsequent processes. When batch management is turned on, entering a batch number becomes obligatory for all goods movements. Furthermore, inventory postings must be executed on batch level; therefore, costs for inventory manage ment may drastically increase.<br><br>Documentary batches are integrated in the following processes:<br><br>- During goods movements documentary Batches can be entered.<br>- Manufacturing orders In contrast to real batches, entering documentary batches is possible only at ba ck-flush and not when maintaining manufacturing orders (for example, in componen t overview).<br>- Entering documentary batches for deliveries Delivery transactions must be enabled for entering documentary batches during pi cking.<br>- Entering documentary batches for transport orders Entering documentary batches must be enabled during transport order confirmation .<br><br>Radio frequency transactions are not in scope, inasmuch as end-customer s already use their own transactions or screens. In task and resource management , mainly radio frequency transactions are used. Therefore, entering documentary batches is not intended.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It fulfills the tracking requirements of many industries without the need to m anage inventory in batches.<br>- It simplifies internal logistic processes.<br>It allows traceability of material flow with minimal total cost of ownership (T CO).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Plant or production manager role</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides overview of the current status of key performance indicators.<br>It provides exception alerts.<br>- It offers real-time event management.<br>- I t enables easy access to integrated decision support.<br><br>This role offers ag gregated information for managers that are responsible for production processes in one plant or different production plants in one company. The information is p rovided on one portal page in a structured format. The portal technology offers easy integration of information from different sources and easy handling. <br><b

r>The role addresses plant managers in all industries and in companies of all si zes.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The plant production manager role improves efficiency and effectiveness through the personalization of the information to accomplish t he following: <br> <br>- Proactively respond to production events and exceptions to preclude fire fighting<br>- Look up and analyze pertine nt key performance indicators to continuously improve operations</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PP</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Production supervisor role</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports production personnel in order to respond to exceptions and unfores een changes in demand or supply and to deliver superior production performance t hrough higher transparency.<br>- Manufacturing intelligence dashboards provide c onfigurable entry pages that display alerts, key performance indicators, manufac turing content, work lists and production confirmations, and decision support.<b r><br>Dashboards have also been created for the new maintenance technician and q uality inspector roles to further leverage transparency and promote collaboratio n on the shop floor.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - You can execute production plans on time and within budget.<br>- You can find and resolve production problems quickly and proactively with real-time exception detection and workflows. <br>- You can monitor, measure, control, and improve p roduction performance.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Production campaign</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new function of campaign management in SAP R/3 rel ease 4.5B is designed for batch-oriented manufacturing. Campaign management enha nces planning and process order management, and it comprises planning, execution , and settlement of production campaigns. A production campaign consists of plan ned orders and process orders representing the batches to be produced and servic e orders representing setup and clean-out operations. Planned orders and process orders can be based on one or several master recipes. In this way, you can repr oduce a campaign as a sequence of identical production charges. Or, you can repr esent a repeated sequence of varying manufacturing procedures in a campaign.<br> The main planning and execution functions of campaign management are as follows: <br><br>- Campaign creation This function allows you to create a campaign from different starting points (fo r example, a requirement, a material, a recipe, or a production line). In this w ay, the production line used, the start and finish dates, and the required quant ities and yields are known. You determine the dates for each production charge a nd for the setup and clean-out processes. In doing this, the software also takes into account the fact that manufacturing production charges can be serial or pa rtially parallel.<br>- Campaign processing This function allows you to move the entire campaign or individual production ch arges on the time axis. You can also change, add, or delete production charges.< br>- Campaign conversion This function allows you to create a process order for every production charge. You can then further process them in process planning.<br><br>The software confi rms material receipts, issues, and resource consumptions for individual process orders.<br><br>You can calculate costs both for the individual orders of a produ ction campaign and for the entire campaign. You can also perform preliminary and final costing, enter actual costs, calculate work in progress, determine varian

ces for the process orders and campaign service orders in a production campaign, and display the results in reports. In addition, you can enable the orders to c umulate in a production campaign to decide on its cost effectiveness. <br><br>Th e concept of this function and the way it is realized are based on business proc esses. The costs for clean-out, setup, and so on, which cannot be directly relat ed to one order, are settled to one or more business processes. The system perio dically debits the individual process orders with the costs for the business pro cesses according to the process quantities used. You can flexibly define the cri teria for debiting process orders (for example, according to the quantity ratio of the process orders). This enables the settlement of product-specific setup an d rework costs to the products that actually caused them.<br><br>The main new ca mpaign management functions in product costing are as follows:<br><br>- Allocati on of fixed campaign costs to the material list Using business processes, you can settle the fixed campaign costs such as setup, clean-out, and teardown costs to the cost origins and plant-specific materials in a campaign.<br>- Preliminary costing of a production campaign Because the preliminary costing data of all planned orders and process orders is cumulated in the campaign, you can perform preliminary costing of the entire pr oduction campaign when you create the campaign.<br>- Cost report for a productio n campaign This compares the target/actual costs and planned/actual costs of the individual process orders in a campaign. This enables you to analyze the data on the proce ss orders with and without material.<br>- Cost reports for business processes in volved This includes the business processes that are involved in at least one productio n campaign. The cost report assumes that one business process is involved and co nsiders the way in which the business process is debited and credited to compare the planned and actual costs for production campaigns. This enables you to dete rmine deviations in the business processes and improve their plan activity price .</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Because of the type of products manufactured or the pr oduction technologies used, batch manufacturing in the process industries is oft en performed in production campaigns. This enhancement offers a comprehensive se t of new functionalities that offers a sophisticated campaign management tool to reduce costs in production. A production campaign comprises the production char ges (batches) that are manufactured in a production line. Costs can be reduced i n a campaign by minimizing the number of changeovers and clean-outs at this line . Moreover, it might be that the product quality does not reach the desired leve l in the first batch, and so it is manufactured in campaigns to allow improvemen t over time.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Multiple-signature principle for digital signatures</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The multiple-signature principle is based on the defin ition of signature strategies. A signature strategy lays down the number of digi tal signatures from now on referred to as "individual signature" that must be executed by users of one or several authorization groups. A sequence is defined for the individual signatures.<br><br>An authorization group (for example, heads of production, line operators, and so on) can have any number of persons who ma y execute an individual signature for a group allocated to it. A person can be a llocated to several authorization groups.<br><br>The following functions are int roduced for the multiple-signature principle:<br><br>- Definition of signature s trategies <br>- Execution of individual signatures and canceling of signature st rategies <br>- Information functions <br>- Enhanced search function for digital signatures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In February 1997, the U.S. Food and Drug Administratio n (FDA) published its final rule on the acceptance of electronic signatures, whi

ch became effective on August 20, 1997. To ensure compliance with this guideline , the digital signature was implemented in SAP R/3 release 4.0B. The digital sig nature is now to be enhanced so that it can meet the various requirements for a multiple-signature principle.<br><br>The main objective of the multiple-signatur e principle is to comply with the legal requirements of the FDA's Good Manufactu ring Practices. However, because these rules and guidelines do not apply only to pharmaceutical companies, the function can be configured in numerous different ways.<br><br>The following multiple-signature principle was discussed in SAP use r groups, and members ideas and suggestions have been included in the specificat ion.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S): occupatio nal health</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Within the SAP R/3 organizational management functiona lity, you are able to link different units (positions and other organizational u nits) to factors influencing employees health. In addition, you are able to reco rd details of preventive medical examinations and ordinary medical examinations carried out on your employees in the software. In this way, SAP R/3 release 4.5B enables you to store data from a thorough workplace analysis and subsequently l ink all agents to the people who are exposed to them by using the organizational management functionality.<br><br>Furthermore, you are able to process informati on on all health screening required in your company, including how often employe es should be screened; the exposure limits to, for example, particular substance s; and the medical examinations required in relation to the exposure.</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>Employers are bound by many laws and regulations to pr ovide medical screening for employees who carry out particular duties. Planning and administering these occupational health responsibilities can be a complex an d time-consuming task which can be accomplished more quickly and effectively thr ough software.<br><br>To enable employers to meet these statutory requirements, the SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S) application is extended to inclu de occupational health functionality.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S): dangerous goods management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With regard to dangerous goods classification by means of legal data, SAP R/3 release 4.5B enables you to store legal data for each da ngerous goods regulation and United Nations number. The data is stored in a stru cture within the substance database.<br><br>SAP AG developed functions for the m anagement of dangerous goods in the logistics functionality of SAP R/3 release 4 .0B. Developments consisted of the following:<br><br>- Dangerous goods material master <br>- Dangerous goods documents <br>- Dangerous goods checks for deliveri es <br><br>In SAP R/3 4.5B, dangerous goods management is enhanced to include th e following functions:<br><br>- Dangerous goods classification by means of legal data <br>- Filling the dangerous goods material master <br>- Integration of dan gerous goods checks into the transportation function <br>- Integration of danger ous goods data into electronic data interchange (EDI) database for each dangerou s goods regulation</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can now maintain dangerous goods classifications f or many allocated substances or materials very effectively by using the new mast er data record dangerous goods classification. In this data record, the user spe cifies the United Nations number relevant for dangerous goods classification and the corresponding risk potential (for example, packing group II) within the sub stance.</span></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Download of user interface design from SAP R/3 to sale s configuration engine</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The sales configuration engine runs in a mobile or web environment, with or without a direct connection to SAP R/3, providing configur ation capability at the point of sale. It provides advanced configuration concep ts for mapping a configuration and the dependencies between elements of the prod uct model.<br><br>The sales configuration engine consists of the configuration e ngine and a standard user interface. You can use the tools available in SAP R/3 to design your own standard user interface for the SAP R/3 configurator. You can group characteristics under tab strips (in folders), and you can determine the characteristics relevant for printing. Your interface design is now also downloa ded to the sales configuration engine as part of the knowledge base, so that you can use the same user interface design in both the SAP R/3 software and the sal es configuration engine.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The sales configuration engine is a new SAP business f unction that complements the variant configuration functionality in SAP R/3. It was designed in cooperation with a consortium of SAP customers interested in wor king continuously to improve SAP product configuration. The sales configuration engine is designed to provide configuration functionality in SAP R/3 for the SAP products "Mobile Sales" and "Mobile Service" to allow personalization of user i nterfaces and improve usability of the software.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhanced original application file storage for documen ts</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The model for original application files has been enha nced. Instead of two original application files, Q originals are supported for e ach document information record (main original application files). Examples of m ain original application files for a document are as follows:<br><br>- Computeraided design (CAD) original model<br>- Corresponding Virtual Reality Modeling La nguage (VRML) model for three-dimensional viewing tools and digital mock-up<br>Corresponding standard for the exchange of product (STEP) model for data exchan ge with suppliers<br>- Corresponding two-dimensional drawing as TIF file<br>- De scriptive text<br><br>You can store each main original in Q content versions or statuses. You can use these statuses to track the development history of the doc ument.<br><br>You can still store additional files for each original, but the nu mber (previously limited to 99) is no longer limited.<br><br>Storage of original application files in the knowledge provider is enhanced. Until this release, yo u decided where to store the originals. You could use the file system, the SAP d atabase, a vault, or an archive. Now the knowledge provider can be used for stor ing originals. The document management functionality uses the standard functions of the knowledge provider.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document management in SAP R/3 is a central tool that lets employees access the current version of all types of document in a company. <br><br>Until this release, you could only store two original application files for each document info record. Many customers requested an enhancement to link s everal versions in a different format or language to a document information reco rd.<br><br>There is no longer a limit to the number of original application file s you can have. You can now link each document info record to as many original a pplication files as you wish. The knowledge provider is now also used for docume nt storage. The knowledge provider is a central tool in SAP R/3 for storing as m uch unstructured data as you wish with all the flexibility required.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Handling documents made easy by improvements to the in terface</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality helps you in the following ways: - Use of tree controls helps you display the structure of original application f iles.<br>- Important functions are accessible directly (for example, checkin and checkout).<br>- Application-specific settings in customizing help you define de faults and determine which fields are displayed (for example, fields for a power user or an occasional user).<br>- Direct integration of the viewer helps you di splay originals.<br><br>Document management in SAP R/3 is a central tool that al lows employees access the current version of all types of document in a company. <br><br>As part of the Enjoy initiative, functions for document management and d ocument searches have been enhanced.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement improves navigation between the areas of basic data, texts, object links, classifications, and original application f iles through tab strips. The focus of Enjoy is on the interests of users. The so ftware then gives to users the maximum possible support in performing their dail y tasks, improving their productivity and efficiency.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product structure browser</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In this release, the product structure browser has the following features:<br><br>- You can configure the attributes displayed for eac h object in the control display for each user, as in the list display.<br>- The control display is extended so that you can now use it to browse across multiple software systems. Until this release, you could use the control display for the product structure browser only for the local software. For each destination, an additional node is displayed in tree structure. This enables you to compare the presentation of an object in multiple software systems directly.<br>- There is now an alternative way to navigate through a structure by using context menus to select the desired type of relation the user wants to explore. Until this relea se, the available object links were displayed as nodes in the structure tree. By using context menus attached to a node, the number of displayed nodes in the di splay is greatly decreased.<br>- You can create a new tree structure display dyn amically in one session. Therefore, you can select an object that appears as a n ode in the product structure as root node for a new tree structure. You can reta in or delete the original product structure display.<br>- The customizing functi ons can now be used to generate a set of predefined filters for systemwide use i n the product structure browser, in addition to the individual filter definition .<br>- A document viewer is integrated into the browser. Depending on your setti ngs in customizing for document management, you can display original application files in the integrated viewer. The original is displayed in the GUI, rather th an starting the viewer as an external process. Another splitter control is used for this.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The product structure browser is one of the central fu nctions to obtain information about product data management relevant objects and their dependencies. You can use the product structure browser to graphically dis play and navigate through the links between SAP R/3 objects. The information is displayed in a graphical tree in a comprehensive way. It lets you trace these ob jects across different systems running SAP R/3 software. This enhancement simpli fies both navigation and object processing of product structure.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Batch information cockpit</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - Fast and comprehensive access to batch information You can select and display batches and call up additional information on a singl e screen. <br>- More flexible and quicker selection variants You can use tab pages to choose different selection variants (batch index, shelf -life list, and so on). You can use search terms to tailor the selection of batc hes for display to your company s requirements. This enables you to select batche s for all materials. <br>- Configurable views The selected batches are displayed in a list of results that you can configure b y using views. <br>- Possible subsequent functions You can call up additional details (batch master data, batch where-used list) fr om the list of results.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP software provides extensive evaluation and doc umentation tools in various applications. These tools allow you to access inform ation on the entire life cycle of a batch. You can use this information to react quickly to inquiries or problems and to meet legal requirements.<br><br>SAP is working closely with customers in a variety of industry sectors and organization s to develop an application-specific solution that groups these tools in the bat ch information cockpit. You use the batch information cockpit to select and disp lay the available information about individual batches.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Digital signature: electronic signature</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>With regard to the use of signatures in the pharmaceut ical environment, one of the main new features of the next release is that in cl osed software, the user now needs enter only the SAP R/3 user ID and login passw ord to identify himself or herself and does not require any additional external software. This is in compliance with the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requirements for an electronic signature.<br><br>Improvements and enhancements for the digital signature include the following:<br><br>- Display of the reason for the signature when it is executed<br>- Entry of signature comment and user i dentification in the same dialog box<br>- Signing in with the SAP R/3 user ID an d login password and without additional external software<br>- Central logging o f unsuccessful attempts in the SAP R/3 software<br>- Notification to the system administrator about unsuccessful attempts<br><br>An important aim of these enhan cements was to meet the FDA requirements issued in Title 21 of the Code of Feder al Regulations (21 CFR) Part 11.<br><br>The reason for the signature when it is executed can be displayed. The digital signature is used for various release and approval steps in the SAP R/3 software. In most cases, the digital signature is called by choosing a push button labeled with the actual activity to be perform eT dhe r te has ton isf ,or tht ehe res ai sg onat fu oreti hs e n so iw gnal ts uo red .isplayed directly in the dialog box i n which the user executes the signature. In this way, the user can see it while signing.<br><br>The signature comment and user identification can be entered in the same dialog box. The comment on a signature is now entered in the same dialo g box in which the user enters his or her identification details (user, password ) and on which the reason for the signature is displayed. This gives the user a clear overview of the general meaning of the signature he or she is supposed to execute.<br><br>The user can sign with the SAP R/3 user ID and login password an d without additional external software. The signature integrated with SAP R/3 re lease 4.0 was designed as a person-related signature that could not be falsified . For this reason, it was implemented as a digital signature to be executed thro ugh the secure store-and-forward (SSF) interface and additional software. The ai m was to integrate the public key infrastructure already in use in the company a nd to comply with the different legal restrictions in various countries.<br><br> Actual use of the signature and signature strategies, and enhancement requests m ade by SAP customers, have revealed that the digital signature was also used for approval processes in which the user-related documentation was the main focus,

rather than a legally binding signature. This resulted in the requirement for si gnatures without a person-related digital signature and, therefore, without any external software. In response to this, the internal signature in SAP R/3 will b e realized in the next release. The user identifies himself or herself to the SA P software by entering the SAP R/3 user ID and login password. This authorizes t he software to link the data to be signed to the identified user and to sign it with a digital signature. This solution was chosen to comply with the FDA requir ements on electronic signatures. Users identify themselves through two distinct characteristics: the SAP R/3 user ID and login password. The digital signature a llows data manipulation to be detected.<br><br>When an SAP R/3 user ID and login password are used to execute a signature, the signature activities are logged c entrally (see below), and the number of unsuccessful attempts is monitored. The user will even be locked if entering a defined number of signatures with the wro ng password. All signature activities are logged centrally, regardless of whethe r they are performed with or without external software. Evaluation functions ena ble this data to be analyzed. There are, for example, analyses according to user , local and global time, and reason for signature.<br><br>The system administrat or is notified about unsuccessful attempts to sign in. If a user enters the wron g password when signing, or if the user is locked, this fact is logged centrally and recorded in the security audit log of the SAP R/3 software. This log serves to centrally record all security-relevant errors and activities. The system adm inistrator is made aware of entries in this log by the alert monitor directly. I n addition, the distribution of this information can be triggered through e-mail . Depending on whether a wrong password was entered or a user was locked, this d istribution of information can be prioritized and controlled.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The digital signature has been implemented SAP R/3 rel ease 4.0. At that time, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) final rule o n electronic records and electronic signatures, Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations (21 CFR) Part 11 became effective. In the subsequent SAP R/3 release , the signature strategy was realized and released for use. The signature strate gy enabled the definition of a series of signings that consisted of several requ ired signatures to confirm an activity or operation.<br><br>The SAP Business Sui te strategy ties together several different applications and functions in the SA P NetWeaver Portal, the users central portal to the functions they need to fulfi ll their tasks. This results in new requirements for using the signature functio n:<br><br>- Technical requirements Users must be able to execute signatures without using external software. The us e of complicated technology for the digital signature is to be avoided unless ab solutely necessary.<br>- Security concept requirements The system security must still be guaranteed even if the systems have been opene d to the Internet. For this reason, centralized monitoring functions must collec t all security-relevant information centrally. With regard to signatures, unsucc essful attempts must be recorded and reported centrally.<br>- Legal requirements Because the software is integrated with the business processes, some of these sy stems become open to the Internet. The result is that systems that were previous ly closed are now considered open systems according to the FDA. In this case, FD A regulations require the execution of digital signatures. This enhancement allo ws compliance with those legal requirements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integrated life-cycle management through the use of co nfiguration management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized as follows: - Configuration folder: configuration management uses a meta-object, called a co nfiguration folder, to manage the product life cycle. You can define this folder at any time and then assign it a life-cycle profile, which you have defined pre viously in customizing. For a configuration folder, you can define as many versi

ons of a life-cycle phase as you like. You can choose the predecessor version of a new version. When the product moves to a new life-cycle phase, you can also d etermine the predecessor. As a result, there evolves a product folder network th at describes the history of a product. The configuration folder can be assigned a controlled object. This could be a material master, document, work breakdown s tructure (WBS) element, or project definition and any number of dependent object s that have relevant product, process, resource or project data. These objects c ould be material master records, documents, bills of material, installed bases, network activities, and activity elements. The user decides which objects are re levant. The number of objects involved can vary considerably during the product life cycle. <br><br>- Baselines The objects assigned to a folder are not originally fixed in relation to the cha nge status. When you need to freeze a consistent state of the controlled object or all the dependent objects, you can do so using a baseline. The baseline is a snapshot of the folder with parameters partially or completely defined for inst ance, the change date. <br> - Business processes By using configuration folders and a baseline, you can record the state of a pro duct in a consistent, complete, and reproducible manner at any stage of the life cycle. Consequently, configuration management supports the business processes d escribed as follows. These are the advantages of configuration management: <br> > Documentation Configuration management allows you to document all the relevant stages in the l ife cycle of a product configuration without gaps. This information can be repro duced at any time. You decide which data is of interest for each product and at what time. <br> > Distribution A baseline for a configuration folder is a closed logical unit that describes a consistent state as completely as necessary. As a result, this data packet is pa rticularly suited for distributing the product data. For instance, configuration management is to be used for the distribution of data in the collaborative engi neering and collaborative project management applications.<br> > Automatic upda te During the production and assembly of a product, the as built structure is forme d, parallel to the as planned or as designed structure. Because the parts used a re known in the SAP R/3 software, the as built structure can be determined autom atically, partially, or completely.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The SAP R/3 software supports all central logistic pro cesses from the design of a product through the sales process to its maintenance after it has been received. These processes correspond with various phases in t he product life cycle. The product structure develops from an as designed or an as sold structure through an as planned or an as built structure to an as mainta ined structure. A large number of departments and users are involved in the prod uct life cycle and work with the data associated with the product. Examples of s uch departments or functions include project management, development, design, en gineering, work scheduling, material requirements planning, purchasing, producti on, and service. <br><br>You can now use configuration management to administe r the product life cycle flexibly in all phases. All the users involved can acce ss the data quickly and in the same manner. <br><br>Configuration management pr ovides a complete solution for life-cycle management that provides the following benefits:<br><br>- It makes it possible for a company to freely define its own life-cycle phases.<br>- It enables you to administer all states of a product in all phases, and thus it makes the history of the product easily accessible. <br> - It enables you to summarizes all product, process, and resource data that is r elevant for the configuration, which guarantees the consistency of this data. <b r>- It can help you administer the product configuration data and project manage ment data from the project system.<br>- It automates the business process.</span ></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collaborative engineering</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The general process involved in collaborative engineer ing consists of the following steps: <br><br>1. Defining the product and project structure to export: a configuration folder is created in the configuration man agement workbench of SAP R/3. The controlled object for example, a material mas ter or document and all other relevant dependent objects are assigned to this f older. A baseline record of the folder is made, which fixes the state of the con tents. <br><br>2. Exporting the product and project structures: when the export function is accessed, the contents of the folder are included in an Extensible M arkup Language (XML) file. This file and all relevant original application files are stored in the project overview in the SAP R/3 software. The partners involv ed in the project are notified by e-mail that this information is available. Thi s e-mail message contains the relevant URL to the Web server where the project o verview can be accessed. <br><br>3. Logging on to the collaborative engineering/ project management server (Web server): each authorized person involved in the p roject can log on to the server through the URL provided, by using an individual user ID and password. Each user first sees an overview of all the projects that apply to him or her in the browser. The project overview always displays the cu rrent state of the project and informs the user which partner has made what chan ges.<br><br>4. Downloading and offline editing: after the user has selected a pr oject, he or she can download the XML file and the original document application files. The first time a user accesses the server, a plug-in for the browser is also downloaded. The following functions are available through the plug-in:<br> - Display of object structures and navigation in the structures <br> - Search functions for documents, materials, bills of material, and work breakdown struct ures (WBS) elements <br> - Display of detail information for documents, materia ls, bills of material, and WBS elements<br> - Integrated viewer for documents ( two-dimensional formats: BMP, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, DWF, DWG, HPGL, and PNG; three-di mensional format: Direct Model [JT], STL, WRL)<br> - Start of third-party viewi ng application<br> - Redlining of two-dimensional objects in the integrated vie wer<br> - Open original application files in registered local application softw are (for instance, Office, computer-aided design [CAD], and other viewers)<br> - Create, change, or delete documents, assign original application files<br><br> 5. Assigning documents to materials or WBS elements: if the documents have to be changed, they are exported and can be processed through other software, such as CAD software. Modified files or new original application files can be added to the XML file.<br><br>6. Uploading to the SAP R/3 software: the modified data is returned to the SAP R/3 software. A copy is made of the original folder. The use r can then notify all the partners about the changes by using e-mail. The new fo lder can then be downloaded and processed further by the partners. <br><br>7. Im port and reconciliation: whenever the project manager wants to use a new version of the product or project structure as the basis for further work in the SAP R /3 software, he or she can trigger an import to the software by using the config uration management workbench. The project manager can then decide how to incorpo rate the changes to documents or the project structure in the SAP R/3 software. Comparison mechanisms ensure that the data structure remains consistent in the s oftware.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The collaborative engineering application provides a c omprehensive Internet-based and open means of reporting and cross-company commun icating that secures and facilitates collaboration. All partners have access thr ough an Internet browser to the project information that is relevant to them. Th ey can change or display objects from the SAP R/3 software or make comments abou t these objects without affecting them in the software. In addition, they can ch ange documents or add new documents to the structure. In development and engineering projects, it is essential that all persons involv ed communicate with each other on a direct and informal basis, regardless of whe ther they are employees in your company, customers, vendors, or development part ners. All these people require access to the relevant data from the project, pro

duct, or documents. They must be able to make changes and add comments. Usual fo rms of communication such as fax or e-mail can be slow and, when a large number of people are involved, can be clumsy and prone to errors. For security reasons, companies do not want to give their partners access to their SAP R/3 software.< br><br>The project manager uses configuration management to select the data from the product or project structure that will be exported from the SAP R/3 softwar e, ensuring the consistency of the data. Authorized persons, such as members of the project team or employees from partner companies, are notified by e-mail tha t information is available to be collected. They can then log on to the Web serv er. Because these particular users do not have permanent access to the software, a plug-in (Active-X Control) is downloaded the first time they access the serve r so that the data can be displayed and processed offline. <br><br>The changed o bjects can be returned to the SAP R/3 software and can then be seen by all partn ers. The data in the productive SAP R/3 software is not changed at this stage. T hat is done in a further step, which includes a comparison mechanism.</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Digital mock-up viewing and redlining</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Digital mock-up viewing lets you display within the en gineering workbench a digital three-dimensional model of an assembly and its com ponents in the SAP R/3 software.<br><br>Data transfer is possible between the co mputer-aided design (CAD) software and the SAP R/3 software. Before you can use the viewer to display product data in the software, the following process takes place:<br><br>- The SAP R/3 software receives the product information from the C AD software (such as CATIA). In this CAD software, engineers create the design d rawings for the assembly to be manufactured, defining the spatial relations betw een the individual components, which are saved in the SAP R/3 software as transf ormation matrices. These transformation matrices enable digital mock-up viewing in SAP R/3, because the viewer needs to know, for example, exactly where to posi tion the lights before it can display a car.<br><br>- Data transfer to the SAP R /3 software is controlled by the SAP R/3 CAD interface. A three-dimensional file (for example, *.jt) is created for each CAD document and saved in the SAP R/3 so ftware as an original application file in the document management function, with a document information record to manage it. A conversion process automatically converts the CAD files to a visualizable three-dimensional format. The conversio n interface of the SAP R/3 software and external converters control the conversi on and extract the transformation matrices for converting original application f iles. For example, you can define settings in customizing to determine the docum ent status and the time of day that triggers the conversion. Alternatively, the transformation matrices can also be transferred directly to the SAP R/3 software through the SAP R/3 CAD interface. The converter has to be purchased separately. In the engineering workbench, you decide whether to display an assembly, or one or more components, depending on the current processing situation. <br><br>An e xample would be when you are processing the bill of material of a car, which con tains the bodywork and wheels. If you select several components at once (bodywor k and wheels), the SAP R/3 software calculates the geometric position of all the components and displays them accordingly. If a component (for example, the body work) is an assembly, you can also break this assembly down into its components (mudguards, doors, and so on).<br><br>In the three-dimensional model, you can pe rform the following actions: <br><br>- Display an entire assembly <br>- Display an individual component <br>- Display further components <br>- Hide individual c omponents <br>- Display a multi-level bill of material <br>- Highlight a specifi c component in color (if you select a material in the product structure, this ma terial is highlighted in color in the viewer; this also works the other way arou nd)<br><br>You can also use all the three-dimensional functions of the viewer to display original application files in, for example, the following ways:<br><br> - Rotate and move the three-dimensional model to see it from different perspecti

ves <br>- Use the zoom, zoom area, and pan views <br>- Use functions for improvi ng software performance, which are especially useful for large products (for exa mple, displaying a grid or selecting the number of frames per second)<br><br>Red lining functions let you enter annotations and comments in digital form, save th em, and make them accessible to authorized persons. You can use these functions if you use the integrated viewer. The redlining functions are available for all file formats that can be visualized with this viewer.<br><br>The integrated view er lets you display files with the following formats: <br><br>- Two-dimensional data: > Vector data <br> > Model (such as DXF)<br> > Picture (such as CGM)<br> > Plot (such as HPGL)<br> * Raster data (such as TIFF, BMP, and JPG)<br> * T ext data (such as ASCII, EPS, and PDF)<br>- Three-dimensional data: model data ( JT, WRL, and STL) <br><br>You write or draw your annotations and comments on the original file as if you were using a red pen. Of course, this does not mean tha t you change the original: your comments are saved in a "layer." Other employees create additional layers for their comments. The processing functions for layer s depend on whether you are using your viewer to display a file in two- or three -dimensional format:<br><br>- In two-dimensional files, layers are saved as tran sparent levels in a vector format (CGM). The number of layers for each original application file is not restricted. If you display an original file in the viewe r, you can superimpose several original files and several layers on top. This pr ocess is like superimposing several transparencies and projecting them on a scre en with an overhead projector. By assigning authorizations, you ensure that only authorized persons can create, change, or delete layers for a specified documen t type and status. The layer menu helps you keep track of processing of individu al layers, especially if an original application file has several layers. The mo st important layer functions in this menu are for navigating, creating a new lay er, and saving.<br>- In three-dimensional models, you can create the information in one layer, which is saved as a two-dimensional image. <br><br>You can use a range of graphical and text elements as markup functions. These are some of the graphical and text functions you can use:<br><br>- Freehand-line and line<br>- E llipse and rectangle<br>- Measuring functions for lines, angles, and radii<br>Raster linear/angular/radial<br>- Text<br>- Undo/redo<br><br>The following marku p settings are available:<br><br>- Line (width, style, and color)<br>- Text (col or, font style, font, and character size)<br>- Fill (color, shading, and style)< br>- Measuring procedure (activate/deactivate; raster oriented or vector oriente d)<br><br>Redlining functions are available in the following PDM applications:<b r><br>- Document management <br>- Collaborative engineering</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new functions in the digital mock-up environment a nd redlining make collaboration much easier between all persons involved in a de velopment project. Effective information transfer is required for the quantity of information, the complexity of decisions, and the large number of decision makers involved in the development process of a product. This information transfer is increasingly aff ected by the organizational and geographical distribution of engineers, producti on locations, and sales groups. For example, before a new car can roll off the p roduction line, a lot of data must be transferred between the working groups inv olved, to be monitored and approved. You can optimize your time, cost, and labor resources by using the following new integrated functions of SAP R/3:<br><br>Digital mock-up vewing lets you visualize new products as three-dimensional mode ls throughout the company while they are still being developed. In the past, typ ically only the engineering department could access this product information, in the form of drawings. Now, all interested parties can visualize the new product (such as a car) in the engineering workbench even before a prototype exists. Th is early visualization option lets you involve more employees in product analysi s. To visualize individual components of the product (such as bolts), you can al so use the product structure browser or the document management system.<br><br>The visualized three-dimensional model of your product can be integrated into y our other business processes. The integrated redlining function enables you to r

eplace old processes, which are often paper, based with more efficient digital p rocessing. You enter your annotations with graphical or text elements (markup). There is no time lapse before the new information is available to all persons in volved.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Web-based document management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can process documents by using your Web browser in the following ways:<br><br>- The search engine allows you to find documents by using the following types of data:<br> > Data from the document info record<br> > Characteristic values after successful classification<br> > Data from proje cts that are assigned to the document<br> > Content of the original application file (full text retrieval), if a third-party search engine is used<br><br>- The results of the search are presented in a hit list. From this list, you can then handle the documents in the following ways:<br> > Display the document informa tion record and original application file<br> > Create comments about the curre nt status of the original application file by using the redlining function with the integrated viewer of the SAP R/3 software<br> > Make changes to the origina l application file and then transfer the changes to the software R/3 software by using your Web browser<br> > Use your Web browser to create a new document in the SAP R/3 software<br><br>-You can optimize the user interface by using the fu nction customizing for document management.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This new functionality allows easy Web access to any d ocument that has been maintained in the document management function. <br> Customers and partners often need quick access to documents without direct acces s to SAP R/3. For example, if you as a customer would like to check the specific ations of a machine that you have ordered from a supplier, you can access the do cument you want over the Web.<br><br>The easy-to-use and open interface even mak es accessing documents simple for SAP R/3 software users who normally don t work with document management. A flexible search engine can be used to find documents quickly and easily even if you have very little data about the document, such a s the following information:<br><br>- Specification data from the original appli cation file <br>- The person responsible from the administrative data of the doc ument information record<br>- A project that is assigned to the document.<br><br >Once you have found the document, you can integrate it into any of your busines s processes by using the following functions:<br><br>- You can use the redlining function to edit the document online more quickly than on paper. You can create your notes and comments, either graphic or text, directly online in the digital original application file. The changes made do not, however, affect the actual file your comments are saved in a layer. Other processors can also add layers t o your comments as well.<br>- If you find it necessary to make changes to the or iginal application file, you can do so within the Web browser. When you save the changes, they are then transferred to the SAP R/3 software.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6C</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Web-based engineering change management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized as follows: - Change notifications can be entered directly through the Internet. This means that the information can be entered from where it originates. <br>- The change n otification consists of a title and a long text, which can be of any length. You can add an unlimited number of attachments (for example, Microsoft Excel or Wor d documents).<br>- Change notifications are incorporated in general status manag ement. <br>- Workflow can be used to support the further processing of change n otifications. The person responsible is determined and receives the change notif ication in his or her inbox to process. The work list can be filtered (dynamical

ly, as well) by means of various criteria. <br>- A change notification can be co nverted to a change request. This change request is then linked to a correspondi ng change notification. <br>- The responsible person can then assign the necessa ry objects to this change request. For subsequent processing, all engineering ch ange management functions are available.<br>- A status report informs the user a bout the state of his or her change notification. This report contains the follo wing information: <br> > Status of the change notification<br> > Reply text <b r> > Action log<br> > Link from the change notification to the change request< br> > Object assigned to the change request</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP is extending engineering change management to incl ude general change notifications, which are a type of general notification. An i nternal or external user can create a notification by using the Internet. The pe rson receiving the notification can then decide, according to the contents, whet her it should be processed as a change notification, a quality notification, a s ervice notification, or a claim.<br><br>In contrast to a change request, a user does not require any detailed knowledge or authorization to create a change noti fication. The change notification is processed by the relevant department in the company. It can be converted to a change request. The person who entered the ch ange notification can check the status of the notification.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations (21 CFR) P art 11 enhancement on electronic records</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Companies in the pharmaceutical industry must generate and keep records of changes made to Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) relevant d ata in electronic systems. The need for logged data can differ, depending on the requirement of a business process or project situation, mandates the individual customization of electronic records. With the Title 21 of the Code of Federal R egulations (21 CFR) Part 11 enhancement on electronic records, a set of new tool s is delivered to customize the logging status of objects and to analyze the rec orded changes as required by 21 CFR Part 11.<br><br>The customizing tool enables you to set the change document indicator for data elements, or the log data cha nges indicator for tables, in a manner similar to customizing within the impleme ntation guide. The changes to the log are without modification from a technical point of view, which does not mean that there are no influences on the business and technical processes of the standard SAP software. You must make sure that bu siness processes that you have implemented and used in the SAP software are thor oughly tested after logging changes are made. Therefore, the configured log can be easily restored after a release upgrade or correction by a support package. F urthermore, a 21 CFR Part 11 compliant electronic record is maintained for every change of the logging status executed by the customizing tool, if all the necess ary changes have been completed.<br><br>The reporting tool enables you to genera te complete copies of records in both human-readable and electronic form. The ch anges recorded by change document objects and table logging are extracted throug h a multilevel, detailed selection variant thereby providing enhanced flexibili ty and a display of audit trails. Therefore, electronic records can be queried a nd selected through a series of different criteria: for example, users, dates, a nd specific data such as materials.<br> <br>A navigation help tool is available to access the objects involved in the log or in the selection of the reporting t ool. This graphical navigation tool help can be used to access the objects step by step. You can navigate within the SAP standard menu tree or in a modifiable t ree that reflects only your company s business requirements.<br><br>Authorized us ers can adapt the logging status of tables and table fields to individual requir ement profiles in customizing, without conflicts with a current rework status of an object. This adaptation must be made by several industries to fulfill the re quirements of the 21 CFR Part 11 enhancement on electronic records of the U.S. F ood and Drug Administration (FDA).<br><br>A reporting tool enables an authorized person to generate audit trails concerning the recorded changes. The digital si

gnature data of the objects concerned by the changes can be displayed, and the p rocessed data can be printed or exported in files with a common format.</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Several industries (for example, pharmaceuticals) are helped to comply with the legal requirements of Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations (21 CFR) Part 11 enhancement on electronic records, regulations of t he U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA), and various other guidelines from go vernment agencies throughout the world.<br><br>The solution is flexible and free of modifications, which means that it enables you to adapt your SAP software to these requirements more quickly, with less paper documentation.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Customer-specific fields in business partner master da ta</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can now expand your customer or vendor master data to include additional information about your business partners. You can develop your own subscreens, to which you add the required fields. <br><br>You access t hese subscreens through additional options in the master records of your busines s partner; each of your subscreens appears on a separate tab page. You can assig n up to 32 tab pages or subscreens to each option. <br><br>You make the required settings for the subscreens in the implementation guide of the relevant compone nt. Your subscreens are integrated into the program flow by business add-ins (BA dIs).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Customer-specific fields in business partner master da ta have been enriched to add more business value. This enhancement enables you t o integrate your own tables without having to make any changes if you subsequent ly change your release, perform an upgrade, or import support packages.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Derivation of batch data</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can call up and use the derivation function in all areas of logistics at fixed times (for example, when you post goods movements, release process orders or manufacturing orders, or make a usage decision). <br>< br>Derivation works along the batch where-used list. This means that it can incl ude only component batches that have been used to make the product. Depending on how you use this function, it is advisable to start derivation from a component or product. The values, however, are always transferred from the component (sen der) to the product (receiver) that is, in the same direction as the quantity f low:<br><br>- Pull derivation (1 receiver, n senders) You start derivation from a transaction that affects the product. In this transa ction, you can collect, cumulate, and calculate data from different senders (exa mples of use are pick and pack activities and overall release).<br>- Push deriva tion (n receivers, 1 sender) You start derivation during a transaction that affects the component (for exampl e, making the usage decision for a bulk batch). The SAP software transfers data from a bulk batch to the batches of many materials that have come from this bulk batch (an example of use is filling). <br><br>The function for deriving batch d ata enables you to transfer batch master record data and classification data for the component batches that have been introduced into the product batches.</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>Derivation of batch data adds business value in the fo llowing ways:<br><br>- It reduces the time required to enter batch characteristi c values (batch specifications). For example, you do not need to reenter the ins pection characteristic values for the bulk batch manually for each container bat ch. Instead, these values are transferred to the container batches automatically

.<br>- It reduces the resources required for error processing and guarantees a h igh quality of data.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Management of collaborative projects</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized as follows: - It offers support for collaborative product development processes from the pla nning phase to product (or process) validation on the basis of stage-gate proces s methodology.<br>- It offers flexibility in sharing information with partners t hrough Microsoft Project integration and uploads, in creating project snapshots and simulation versions, and in assigning substitutes for tasks when someone is on vacation.<br>- It includes usability enhancements such as an easy-to-customiz e interface and the ability to perform mass maintenance of task lists and checkl ists.<br>- It allows sharing of information during bidding scenarios by setting up collaboration groups and linkage to single folders within a collaboration gro up.<br><br>To succeed with today s complex product development efforts, companies need powerful solutions that allow them to employ sophisticated project managem ent methods that drive speed and quality. They also need easy-to-use and easy-t o-implement tools that enable engineers to work together to innovate, share kno wledge, and track progress. <br><br>What they do not need, however, is the tradi tional stand-alone project management point solution, which tends to lead to isl ands of information and extensive integration efforts later on. In short, compan ies need a different approach: one that enables them to manage product developme nt projects more effectively today, without limiting their options for tomorrow. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It helps you develop more reliable products in less time at lower cost.<br>- I t reduces subsequent nonconformity costs.<br>- It enhances business integration. <br>- It provides one instance within enterprise core component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collaboration with partners and suppliers</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It supports sharing a variety of objects such as documents, bills of material (BOMs), technical assets, and custom-defined objects with the ability to view tw o- and three-dimensional objects.<br>- It ensures data confidentiality and integ rity of objects shared with external partners by providing secure collaboration through encrypted files.<br>- It is integrated with other functionalities (such as document management and BOM processing) and with collaboration tools such as WebEx online conferencing.<br>- It simplifies access for occasional users throug h integration with Windows Explorer.<br> SAP ERP contains a Web-based cooperation application from SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM), referred to as the Collaboration Folders (cFolders), which is dedicated to promoting collaboration and exchange of information on the basi s of a structured format between groups of people who need to work together but are regionally dispersed. For example, the collaboration functionality supports cooperation between all the internal and external people involved in product dev elopment in a single joint work area, whereas the competitive functionality supp orts setting up separate areas for rival suppliers taking part in a competitive bidding procedure.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It enables users to work collaboratively on product design and development dat

a in virtual teams with external partners.<br>- It reduces costs and time necess ary for traveling and meetings.<br>- It reduces number of errors as a result of improved communication.<br>- It increases capacity as a result of faster time to market.<br>- It secures information during external communication with external partners.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Trials in recipe management: new product and developme nt introduction process support</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides new product and developmen t introduction (NPDI) process support with recipes, specifications, formulas, ma terials, and production operations generated by the recipe development environme nt.<br><br>The new trial management function integrates the definition, planning , execution, and monitoring of trials during development in the laboratory, in p ilot plants, and in handover to production phases. It integrates access to all i nformation and objects required, including quality inspection definitions and st ability studies for the trials, directly in one work environment: the SAP Recipe Management application. Integration in pilot plants and production lines was en hanced to allow fully automated transformation to production planning process ins truction recipes and even creation of process orders to allow ease of use of pro cess management objects normally handled only by production. The new functionali ty enhances the existing recipe development scenario and implements a new trial management. The new function helps research and development staff in the followi ng ways:<br><br>- It enables managers to have control and an overview of ongoing product development and testing at product/recipe level.<br>- It enables develo pers to manage the trial and formulation process in an easier and more guided wa y, including the creation, variations and grouping of trials. Without exiting th e application environment, a developer can define a trial and the corresponding quality inspections and stability studies and can execute and review the trial r esults in the application.<br><br>The new enhancements address the development p rocess throughout the whole process industry for consumer products, chemicals, a nd pharmaceuticals.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It enhances usability by integrating product, formula, and quality definition and execution into one environment.<br>- It speeds up development process throug h user guidance and automation of development steps.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Trials in recipe management: recipe creation</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>The new recipe creation feature enables rapid access t o objects and functions, as well as providing support for faster calculations.</ span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This new function improves efficiency in recipe creati on.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Trials in recipe management: trial development</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>The new function improves control of the trial develop ment process through integration with SAP software for project management and wo rkflow.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This new function speeds up the trial development proc

ess.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Trials in recipe management: information access</span> </td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement simplifies access to information for trials in recipe management (including existing recipes and formulas).</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement simplifies the development process an d improves usability and productivity.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document management: simplified document management</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>The simplification of document management allows emplo yees to accomplish the following tasks:<br><br>- Manage personal and group docum ent structures and documents<br>- Check documents in from Microsoft Windows Expl orer through the drag-and-drop functionality<br>- Check documents in and out dir ectly from Microsoft Office applications<br>- Manage classification and object l inks<br><br>To work efficiently in all kinds of business processes, such as proj ect management, research and development, production, and service, comprehensive document management is a necessity. In many cases, it has turned out that tight integration between business documents and other business objects, such as mate rials, equipment, projects, customers, and production orders, is key for compani es using document management, and it ensures high-quality processes and saves a lot of time. Only a direct link allows the people who are involved in any kind o f document-based business process to directly find and access the relevant docum ents without leaving their usual software environment.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement simplifies the handling of documents in SAP software for document management and provides the following benefits:<br > <br>- It reduces the document maintenance time.<br>- It facilitates team and g roup work through group structures.<br>- It offers intuitive handling.<br>- Its use requires minimal training, even for occasional users.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document management: internal and external document ac cess</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The improvement of internal and external document acce ss accomplishes the following: <br><br>- It provides internal and external users with transparent, up-to-date documents such as design drawings, contracts, and original application files through enhanced document-sharing features in the doc ument management function.<br>- It facilitates searches for documents in separat e repositories by connecting document management and knowledge management functi ons through a knowledge management connector in the document management function .<br><br>This newly comprehensive, detailed information can be a profit-bringing production factor only if the information is available quickly and securely to the various decision makers. Electronic search techniques reduce labor costs whe n multiple or different storage software systems are involved. To reduce the tim e spent evaluating the documents, the documents need to be clearly presented. It should be possible to integrate the information determined into the editing pro cesses rapidly.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This enhancement provides Web-based help for engineeri ng and logistical processes, which secures and facilitates cross-system collabor ation. It provides the following benefits:<br><br>- It allows efficient document

retrieval across multiple repositories.<br>- It provides generic services for t he integration of documents into your business processes.<br>- It ensures higher quality because of data transparency.<br>- It reduces access times and labor co sts for routine tasks, which results in lower costs.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Handling documents made easy by improvements in the in terface</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows users to access and edit computer-aided design (CAD) document struct ures directly in CAD software or from within the SAP ERP application, enabling t he inclusion of new product information in business processes at an early stage. <br>- It offers enhanced viewing options, including tabbed pages for different v iews and the ability to view two- and three-dimensional files (such as drawings and CAD models) in a single view.<br>- It provides ease of use through automatic document structure, visual version control, and mass check-in/checkout.<br>- It supports a variety of industry-standard CAD software systems, including Pro/ENG INEER, CATIA, and Autodesk Inventor.<br><br>The CAD desktop is the CAD engineer s workplace on the SAP R/3 side when working with a direct CAD integration to man age CAD parts and assemblies. Information about new products is thereby introduc ed into other business processes at an early stage.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It provides a single access point to all computer-aided design (CAD) documents (multi-CAD back-end integration).<br>- It supports enterprise-wide collaboratio n with concurrent engineering and versioning.<br>- It enhances comfort and flexi bility in using the CAD documents.<br>- It reduces costs through an enhanced app lication process.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document management: product modeling for configurable products</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product modeling for configurable products accomplishe s the following: <br><br>- It eases maintenance of variant configuration models in SAP soft ware by means of an integrated user interface.<br>- It ensures tight integration with the existing logistics processes of variant configuration (planning, prici ng, order processing, availability checking, production, fulfillment, billing, a nd financial reporting) in SAP ERP.<br>- It offers ease of use through model tre e visualization, a dependency wizard, and drag-and-drop features.<br><br>Offerin g off-the-shelf products is no longer enough in many industry sectors. In order to meet all of the customers' needs, a company must be able to constantly expand its product offering. Variant configuration addresses this challenge and ensure s the necessary product data can be managed efficiently. Variant configuration i s fully integrated into planning, pricing, order processing, availability, produ ction, fulfillment, billing, and financial reporting. This ensures a consistent view of the product in sales orders, production plans, and profitability analysi s.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It makes it easy to define and maintain product nfiguration.<br>- It ensures a consistent view of roduction plans, and profitability analysis.<br>a maintenance.<br>- It enables faster ramp-up for models that require variant co the product in sales orders, p It reduces costs of master dat product modeling experts.</spa

n></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document management: guided procedures</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It allows the creation of customized electronic forms that have the same look and feel as traditional paper forms but can be completed and submitted online.<b r>- It supports flexible business processes by allowing employees to change the workflow dynamically, which ensures appropriate handling of exceptions.<br><br>C ompanies that want to optimize their workflows often face the same challenges:<b r><br>- Too much time and money is lost in inefficient, often paper-based proces s execution.<br>- Form-based paper processes are often distributed manually to o ne or more IT systems.<br>- Current business process workflows cannot be altered during running time by fully visualizing the ongoing workflow status through a generic Web user interface.<br>- Business process workflows are not enabled for ad hoc collaboration.<br>- Employees without specialized software skills lack a flexible tool to set up and execute business processes in their daily work.<br>< br>To eliminate these limitations, companies must provide their employees with f ar-reaching access to all information and processes that enable employees to tak e informed, timely, and appropriate actions and ultimately to meet the goals of the organization. Original workflow software has proved too static for these pur poses. It can be changed ad hoc during running time only with great effort, and it offers little transparency for users or process managers in collaborative sce narios.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It improves business processes by replacing inefficient, paper-based processes with automated business workflow processes.<br>- It enhances responsiveness by allowing workflows to be modified as needed. <br>- It reduces administrative bu rden.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Data import from external content providers</span></td > <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It provides an Extensible Markup Language (XML) based open interface for loadin g content to the SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S) application. <br>It enables a defined interface syntax and semantics to be made available to inte rested providers.<br>- It ensures seamless integration with third-party content providers through SAP content-provider certification.<br><br>Previously, SAP EH& S itself did not provide a standard interface for uploading content to the speci fication database. Third parties provided interfaces for proprietary purposes on ly.<br><br>The aim of the open content connector in SAP EH&S is to enable custom ers to import any SAP EH&S data (typically regulatory data, United Nations listed substances, physical/chemical data, and so on) from a content provider.<br><br> SAP EH&S addresses all industries with a demand for scientific and regulatory da ta on substances and chemicals. This means both producers and users of products relevant to the environment, health, and safety.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - The standardized interface avoids product-specific interfaces and related main tenance costs.<br>- The openness of the interface has a positive impact on conte nt pricing.<br>- Content creation is flexible and fast.<br>- Organizations from all types of industries are helped in better complying with regulations.</span><

/td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Development collaboration with partners and suppliers (Collaboration Folders)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized by the following: - Bill of material (BOM) comparisons (single level) and tracking of changes<br>Integration of product structure management with integrated product and process engineering (iPPE) by allowing the following functions:<br> > Export a filter or focus in iPPE to Collaboration Folders (cFolders)<br> > Change attributes of iPPE nodes and variants in cFolders<br> > Import changed data back to the SAP ERP application<br>- Export of computer-aided design (CAD) assemblies from CAD d esktop to cFolders<br>- Web distributed authoring and versioning (DAV) based conn ectivity between the knowledge management function and cFolders<br>- Easy access for occasional users through integration with Microsoft Windows Explorer<br>- W ork center for development collaboration<br>- Introduction of a business partner user type to restrict user information visibility based on organization members hip, such as supplier company, and the user administration for organizations by external users<br>- Support of manufacturer part numbers (MPN) and reference des ignators as objects in cFolders (both mainly used in the high-tech industry)<br> <br>cFolders is a vertical collaboration application that enables users to work on design and development projects in virtual teams with external business partn ers. cFolders supports the collaboration on product structure data (for example, BOM and product variant structures) and product-related documents (for example, technical drawings and CAD models). By the integration of cFolders in BOM manag ement, it is possible to publish product designer (product structure management with iPPE), document management, and CAD desktop product (structure) information from the SAP ERP application to cFolders so that external users can access this data. <br><br>After the collaboration is finished, processed results from cFold ers can be incorporated in a reconciliation process in the product structure in SAP ERP. The external users do not have direct access to the SAP ERP application during the collaboration. This makes the data in SAP ERP more secure, because e xternal data is transferred from cFolders to SAP ERP only once it has been check ed, and you can trigger this import only from the SAP ERP application.</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Better and more effective external collaboration for product development and e ngineering<br>- Increased ROI through an extended set of object types that can b e managed by Collaboration Folders (cFolders), such as improved collaboration on computer-aided design (CAD) and product structure data<br>- Support for high-te ch industry requirements<br>- Reduction in costs for training, user administrati on, and software integration</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Easy document management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the new release, SAP Easy Document Management is en hanced with the following developments:<br><br>- Extended authorization concept with authorizations on folder and document level<br>- Thumbnails<br>- Extendable user interface for customer-specific enhancements<br>- Mass change of document status by setting a common status to a list of documents<br>- Document localizat ion with ability to get a list of folders in which a document is referenced<br>Digital signature on reaching a certain document status<br>- Enhanced offline a ccess with ability to create documents and folders offline and availability of m ore metadata offline<br>- Enhanced search function<br>- Viewing and redlining wi

th the engineering client viewer<br><br>Product ideas are often collected in the form of drawings or descriptions. Functional specifications for a new product a re often compiled with customers in a specification catalog. In specifications, technicians describe how they want to implement the product. Additional document s are created with increasingly sophisticated information technologies, such as computer-aided technology (CAx) systems, digital mock-up, and the Internet, and models are integrated in the product design phase from the very start. This mass ive influx of information, which can take on enormous dimensions even in the des ign phase, has to be managed in a variety of formats throughout the complete lif e cycle of a document.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Easy-to-use, intuitive authorization handling<br>- Simplified and fast documen t management and maintenance<br>- Reduced access times and labor costs for routi ne tasks<br>- Better support for critical work areas through digital signatures< br>- More flexibility for customer-specific implementations</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Document management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the new release, SAP Easy Document Management is en hanced with the following developments:<br><br>- Extended authorization concept with authorizations on folder and document level<br>- Management of folder and d ocument structures<br>- Thumbnails with integration of thumbnail viewing within search function<br><br>Product ideas are often collected in the form of drawings or descriptions. Functional specifications for a new product are often compiled with customers in a specification catalog. In specifications, technicians descr ibe how they want to implement the product. Additional documents are created wit h increasingly sophisticated information technologies, such as computer-aided te chnology (CAx) software, digital mock-up, and the Internet, and models are integ rated in the product design phase from the very start. This massive influx of in formation, which can take on enormous dimensions even in the design phase, has t o be managed in a variety of formats throughout the complete life cycle of a doc ument.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Easy-to-use, intuitive authorization handling<br>- Simplified and fast documen t management and maintenance<br>- Reduced access times and labor costs for routi ne tasks</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Computer-aided design (CAD) integration (CAD desktop)< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new release enhances the computer-aided design (CA D) desktop with the following developments:<br><br>- Preview functionality (thum bnails)<br>- CAD data export to Collaboration Folders (cFolders), Microsoft Exce l, and Extensible Markup Language (XML) files<br>- Display of SAP Easy Document Management structures and CAD documents<br>- Support for working with folder str uctures, facilitating team and group work<br>- Delete assistant function to dele te a full work directory<br>- New replace component function in CAD view to repl ace one component with another component, which can be found through integrated search functionality<br><br>The key factor for successful product development is the integration of CAD and business software from a holistic, process-oriented standpoint. It means resolving technical and organizational stovepipes.<br><br>R esearch and development teams inside your organization need an environment that supports them in their daily task of designing products. Using CAD modeling func tions alone does not achieve overall product success. Companies must reduce the

time from the initial product idea to product shipment while meeting customer ex pectations of product quality. Even the very best product idea will not be a com mercial success if developed in an information silo, which causes it to reach th e market too late.<br><br>The traditional strategy for solving product data mana gement issues in a CAD design department was to establish CAD-centric product da ta management processes. However, this solved the problem only for processes foc used on extremely specialized CAD design tasks. It did not help CAD design depar tments support the complete product development process.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduced costs through an enhanced application process<br>- Simplified handling of computer-aided design (CAD) documents through a single point of access to al l CAD documents<br>- Reduced need for multiple interfaces by enabling viewing of files from different CAD software systems<br>- Increased user productivity with faster and more efficient access to CAD documents</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Engineering change management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new engineering change management features are as follows:<br><br>- Extended undo capability by including bills of material (BOMs) and variant configuration objects<br>- Increased flexibility for change process es engineering change requests and engineering change orders<br>- Support for n ew object creation for engineering change requests and engineering change orders <br>- Customer screens and customer extensions for the object management record< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Faster correction of errors<br>- Faster processing of change requests and chan ge orders<br>- More flexibility for customer-specific implementations</span></td > </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integrated product and process engineering</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Integrated product and process engineering (iPPE) brin gs new innovations, such as the following: <br><br>- Collaboration Folders (cFol ders) integration with export of product structures to cFolders and import of pr oduct structures from cFolders<br>- Project management software integration<br>Archiving of iPPE objects<br>- Improved reporting, variance scheme, and depende ncy editor, as well as filter and sorting functionality<br>- Use of release mana gement framework<br><br>Enhancements in the area of iPPE focus on integration an d reporting. New integration options to link data with cFolders and Microsoft Ex cel are offered. Also, extended services and archiving for engineering change ma nagement are available.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It makes it easy to define and maintain product models that require variant co nfiguration.<br>- It ensures a consistent view of the product in sales orders, p roduction plans, and profitability analyses.<br>- It reduces costs of master dat a maintenance.<br>- It enables faster ramp-up for product modeling experts.</spa n></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Product Development and Manufacturing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Variant configuration</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The enhancements in the product modeling engine for va

riant configuration enable a wizard-based definition of product variant for sale s.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The variant configuration enhancement provides more us ability.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Basic data and tools</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhanced Whirlwind I (WWI), a modified version of Micr osoft Word that is called from the SAP software to edit a document template, is provided for more flexible document creation and generation.<br><br>Because of t he integrated architecture of the basic data and tools of SAP Environment, Healt h & Safety (SAP EH&S), consistency of the data exchanged between all the SAP sof tware enabled business processes is ensured automatically. Redundant data mainten ance, therefore, is not necessary. Up-to-date data and documents are always avai lable when needed. SAP EH&S basic data and tools can be implemented by every org anization that handles chemical or nonchemical substances in any form, whether i t is in manufacturing, processing, storage, transportation, or end applications. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Reduction in administrative efforts for managing large basic data documents <b r>- Enhancement in the flexibility to specify the output content of the document s</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Dangerous goods management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables you to accomplish the follo wing tasks: - Release of packaged products during the product definition process<br>- Extend ed dangerous goods checks for packaging and product release in sales, shipping, and transportation processes<br><br>The dangerous good management functionality in SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S) supports all processes connected with the manufacturing and distribution of dangerous goods and also ensures comp liance with the valid national and international legislation.<br><br>To comply w ith the different packaging regulations worldwide, it is necessary to record the essential packaging information in the corresponding SAP EH&S master data and t o use this information within the dangerous goods checks in transactions in diff erent SAP software.<br><br>With SAP EH&S dangerous goods management, it is possi ble to record relevant legal packaging information in the specification manageme nt and the dangerous goods master, which mainly allows combinations of packaging codes, and the management of packing instructions and special packaging provisi ons.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It simplifies handling of the product release process.<br>- It supports compli ance with packaging regulations throughout the main business processes.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Waste management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality supports flexible data collection b ased on disposal data and facilitates the creation of variants in reports of cou ntry-specific waste life-cycle analysis, including error handling for unconsider

ed disposal documents.<br><br>SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S) waste management supports you in handling waste disposal processes, complying with nat ional and international regulations and laws that are relevant for generation, t ransport, and disposal, and in distributing costs proportionally among the depar tments within the enterprise that generated the waste.<br><br>The waste life-cyc le analysis is an analysis of type, quantity, and location of wastes recovered ( recycled) or disposed of. The results of the waste life-cycle analysis must be s ubmitted to the authorities on request. The analysis is often used for creating a waste management concept.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It reduces administrative efforts to comply with country-specific regulations by simplifying data collection for waste life-cycle analysis.<br>- It allows the user to adapt the layout of the report to his or her individual needs.</span></ td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Industrial hygiene and safety</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality allows the definition of customer-s pecific information fields to record all relevant data in measurements projects. <br><br>SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S) industrial hygiene and safet y supports industrial hygiene and safety professionals and occasional users of S AP software, enabling them to obtain and store information on work areas, any su bstance or material used or stored in the organization, exposure situation, stat us of safety measures, incidents and accidents, health and safety briefings plan ned and held, and technical equipment (functional location, equipment).</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables better and easier complianc e with national laws and customer-specific regulations concerning industrial hea lth and safety.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Occupational health management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following - It triggers the proposal of health surveillance protocols on the basis of mult iple parameters, extensible by customer-specific definitions.<br>- It enables fl exible adjustment of appointments between the organization s medical health cente r and employees by integrating the calendar in the SAP software in the schedulin g process.<br>- It speeds data entry for physicians (during diagnoses) and healt h center staff (during repetitive brief consultations and examinations) through several user interface enhancements.<br>- It enables assignment of any kind of d ocuments (physician letters, laboratory results, x-ray films, and so on) to empl oyees, medical services, or examinations, through the document management functi onality.<br>- It provides flexible and customer-specific documents that are base d on a new business add-in (BAdI) for document generation.<br><br>Occupational h ealth management in SAP Environment, Health & Safety (SAP EH&S) supports general employee occupational healthcare in an enterprise, as well as the planning and execution of special health surveillance protocols and the treatment of injuries . It is also smoothing the path for implementing a full-scale health-care manage ment process in the enterprise.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Organizations can use preventive medical management with less administrative e ffort and more transparency.<br>- Enhanced process flexibility facilitates legal compliance and enables a customer-specific health care engagement.</span></td>

</tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>LO</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Development collaboration</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This new role-based portal for development collaborati on is characterized as follows:<br><br>- It provides a work center for collabora tion in product development and design.<br>- It supports communication with exte rnal partners and suppliers, including data export and import to the Collaborati on Folders (cFolders) application and browsing of the product structure.<br>- It integrates cFolders notifications into the work center s universal work list.</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>This new role-based portal for development collaborati on improves productivity and collaboration with partners and suppliers and ensur es data consistency.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality management: defining inspection specifications by means of batch determination</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions are introduced in SAP R/3 rele ase 4.5B:<br><br>- You can control the inspection specifications (tolerance valu es and characteristic attributes) by using the general characteristics that form the basis of the batch determination function. <br>- You can supplement the ins pection specifications with additional inspection characteristics. - You can take the batch determination characteristics into account in an inspec tion for a delivery. In addition, specifications from batch determination take precedence over specif ications from quality planning (inspection plan or material specification).</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use characteristic specifications from the bat ch determination function (in addition to those in inspection plans and material specifications) as another source of inspection specifications in the inspectio n lot. This flexible determination of inspection specifications integrates the q uality planning functions (inspection planning and material specification) more closely in the processes and specifications of SAP batch determination.<br><br>I n the batch management function of sales and distribution, the specification val ues that are set when a sales order or delivery is processed are used as the def ault values for the inspection characteristics. You can therefore verify and doc ument individual customer requirements for the production stage or before delive ry in a quality inspection.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality management/plant maintenance/service managemen t: simplifying notification processing</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions have been added in SAP R/3 rel ease 4.5B: <br><br>- Simplified operation through the use of a configurable user interface You can deactivate individual objects in the notification, based on the notifica tion type. These objects do not then appear on the screen. This enables you to d efine a notification structure that is tailored to meet the needs of each of you r business transactions. For example, the following notification structure is re quired for a specific notification type: <br> > Notification header <br> > Not ification items <br> > Tasks for the notification items <br> > Appearance of n o other object types<br>You can freely define the data entry templates for the n otification header data to simplify the creation of a notification.<br><br>- Fol

low-up functions There are predefined functions readily available in an action box. You can choos e various types of functions to implement, and you can predefine these functions for each notification type: <br> > Create activities (for example, to document a telephone call) <br> > Create tasks (for example, to print a confirmation do cument) <br> > Create tasks and trigger a task in the SAP Business Workflow too l (for example, to generate a credit memo request) <br>In addition to the functi ons available in the action box, this software offers you a range of predefined activities. These include, for example, resetting the quality level and changing the quality information record. You can also amend other activities.<br><br>- S everal causes for each item You are no longer limited to entering one cause for each notification item.<br>< br>- Automatic partner determination Iif you assign an organizational unit (for example, work center or department) t o a notification, the software uses this information to determine all the assign ed employees and lists them for selection.<br><br>- Creation of follow-up notifi cations In complex business processes, it is sometimes necessary to divide a notificatio n into separate, independent notifications. This could happen, for example, duri ng the processing of an internal problem notification if the vendor caused the d efect. The notification must then be pursued as a complaint against the vendor.< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The notification function in the quality management, p lant maintenance, and service management functionalities plays an important role in the active processing of the following: <br><br>- Complaints <br>- Problem n otifications<br>- Malfunction reports <br>- Service notifications <br><br>The st ructure of the notification (for example, notification header, items, tasks, or activities) can be modified by the customer, as required.<br><br>This simplified notification process satisfies the demand for faster and more efficient process ing of notifications.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Object-oriented graphics in quality management</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the programming tools include new object-oriented graphics. The display function for quality management contr ol charts uses this new technology.<br><br>You can currently display a control c hart, histogram, and run chart as graphics in inspection processing, inspection data evaluation, and quality control. The software opens a separate graphic scre en for each diagram. The two tracks of an x/s control chart are displayed on sep arate, split screens.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Control charts with several tracks are combined on one screen.<br>- Control ch art graphics are integrated in the normal screens for recording inspection resul ts (object linking and embedding [OLE] control extension [OCX] technology). <br> - In the graphics function, the 32-bit PC architecture is used.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Application link enabling distribution of quality mana gement inspection data</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Data is exchanged between the various systems on the b asis of application link enabling (ALE) with the help of new interfaces in the B API programming interface as follows:<br><br>- Manual distribution (direct) To initialize the quality management inspection data in the target software, you can select existing data in your source software and manually trigger the distr

ibution of this data to the target software.<br>- Continuous distribution Any changes made to the quality management inspection data are logged in change documents. When the quality management inspection data is distributed continuous ly, the software evaluates these change documents, and the changes are distribut ed to the target software. For each field, you can specify which information or data change is relevant for distribution.<br><br>The distribution of the quality management inspection data can occur independently of the distribution of the m aterial master data.<br><br>You use the quality management inspection data in th e material master to make the material-specific settings for inspection processi ng at the plant level. In cases in which a company has several systems running S AP R/3 software, it is often desirable to maintain these settings centrally. The distribution of quality management inspection data now allows you to distribute the centrally maintained quality management inspection data to various function s in your SAP software.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides a single point of maintena nce for various systems running SAP R/3 software.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Electronic transmissionof quality certificates</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>It is possible to dispatch a certificate for a deliver y. In addition to printing or faxing a quality certificate for a delivery item, you can now also transmit a certificate electronically. The transmission include s the reference data for the delivery and the quality certificate as a file atta chment in the Adobe PDF file. The certificate contains the formatted reference d ata required for storage.<br><br>When a vendor receives a certificate, the softw are automatically performs the following tasks:<br><br>- It creates a certificat e record that contains the corresponding reference data for the purchase order n umber, purchase order item, and delivery.<br>- It stores the certificate for thi s certificate record in an optical archive.<br><br>The receipt of the certificat e is therefore automatically confirmed, and follow-up processes can be initiated (for example, releasing the goods receipt). Because the certificate record has a reference to an inspection lot in this case, you can display the certificate a t any time in the SAP R/3 software by using a corresponding viewer.<br><br>If a certificate record for the purchase order number, purchase order item, and deliv ery already exists at the vendor site, the software archives the certificate as an additional attachment for this certificate record.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This release contains functions that allow you to auto matically transmit incoming and outgoing quality certificates. The existing func tions for printing and faxing quality certificates have been expanded to include a variant for transmitting the certificates electronically.<br><br>As a vendor, you can now automatically transmit a certificate electronically to your custome r. Upon receiving the certificate, your customer can automatically transfer the certificate into his or her software.<br><br>When you receive a certificate now, you no longer have to use a scanner to import the certificate into the software .</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Inspection planning withthe engineering workbench</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality is characterized as follows: - Complex selection criteria Using various selection criteria, you can create a work list from which you can process and edit the task list data. For example, you can select your task lists on the basis of any desired field content in an inspection characteristic (that

is, it is possible to create a where-used list for master inspection characteri stics and maintain the characteristics in question). You can select a specific w ork area and maintain the data for various objects in a single step.<br>- Flexib le processing The objects you select in the work list (that is, the task list header, operatio ns, and inspection characteristics) are displayed in flexible views. You can cre ate, copy, change, or delete objects in all views. Because all overview screens contain table controls, you can configure the structure and content of these ove rview screens yourself.<br>- Processing several revision levels You call up the engineering workbench by specifying a selection period. The syst em displays all revision levels contained in this selection period. This gives y ou more transparency over your revision level history. You can make changes dire ctly within the engineering workbench with reference to a change number or key d ate.<br>- GUI The GUI displays the structure of the task list. Using this interface, you can n avigate through the task list objects.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The engineering workbench is a new maintenance tool th at makes it considerably easier to manage inspection plans or maintain the inspe ction characteristics in routings (among other tasks).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Simplifiedrecording of inspection records</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following measures have been implemented to simpli fy the procedure for recording results:<br><br>- Recording single values on the characteristic overview screen If you want to record single values for an inspection characteristic, you can no w record these values directly on the characteristic overview screen. You can re cord as many single values as you want for a single characteristic.<br><br>- Sim plified navigation within the results recording and work list functions The work list for unprocessed inspections is displayed as a tree control. The tr ee control allows you to navigate freely while you record inspection results.<br ><br>- Integrated confirmation of order activities and inspection results When you make confirmations for an order in the production planning function, yo u can now branch directly to results recording in quality management. The follow ing scenarios are supported:<br> > Confirming characteristic results (with and without inspection points)<br> > Confirming defects for an inspection lot<br> > Creating a quality notification<br><br>- Integrated object-oriented graphic You can display a run chart or histogram directly in the screen for recording in spection results.<br><br>- Calculated characteristics These are also supported for process-optimized results recording.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Recording inspection results is a central task for man y end users during inspection processing. Simplifying the process for recording inspection results is therefore a very important objective.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.6B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability in quality management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>In the new user interface for maintaining selected set s, you can now create a selected set and assign code groups and codes to the sel ected set in a single step.<br><br>Uniform navigation for master data objects is now possible. Previously, you could branch only to master data objects (for exa mple, material, customer, or vendor) or their assigned documents by using the me nu or by means of push buttons. You can now branch out to these objects by doubl e-clicking the objects.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Usability is improved through the following:<br><br>The implementation of table controls in the overview screens<br>- Tab indexes th at can be used to process objects (for example, for inspection lots)<br>- More e

ffective input help, as a result of improved uniformity in the search help</span ></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Stability study</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Stability studies are performed to examine the effects of different conditions (such as temperature, humidity, brightness) on a produc t and on its properties over a predefined period of time. To perform a stability study, you must create physical samples of the product and store these samples under controlled conditions (storage conditions). Then parts of these physical s amples must be removed at planned or unplanned times during the stability study and tested according to predefined or flexible inspection specifications.<br> The stability study is integrated in the quality management processes (quality n otification, sample management, inspection planning, and inspection processing) and also entails the use of plant maintenance functions (for example, maintenanc e planning and scheduling).<br> Because some existing SAP objects have been used in the development of this new solution, some new terms have been created (see glossary):<br> - Stability study Quality notification with particular notification type<br>- Testing schedule Maintenance plan with particular maintenance plan type<br>- Strategy Maintenance strategy<br> The stability study has its own node in the customizing function under quality m anagement. The delivery of several customizing settings for the stability study allows you to use the functions immediately. You can adapt the process to suit a ny additional requirements you may have by changing or enhancing the default set tings.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Stability study adds business value in the following w ays: <br><br>- It enables you to continuously improve products and processes in the areas of research, development, and marketing (particularly relevant in, but not restricted to, the chemical, pharmaceutical, cosmetics, and food industries ).<br>- It helps you comply with Good Manufacturing Practices and other U.S. Foo d and Drug Administration (FDA) requirements.<br>- It implements part of a labor atory information system.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Input processing for measured values</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>If you have planned the input processing for measured values in advance during inspection planning (in the master inspection character istic, inspection characteristic, and inspection plan), the SAP software process es the input value at the time of the results recording. <br><br>In standard res ults recording (QE01, QE11, and so on), the entered measured value is saved befo re running input processing, and displayed in the "original value" field. You ca n therefore access the original measured value at any time for documentation pur poses. <br><br>For measured value recording by the inspection data interface and by new interfaces in the BAPI programming interface, the SAP software notes whe ther input processing has already been run. This ensures that the measured value s are converted only once. If you record an inspection result that has a number of decimal places that deviates from the number of decimal places specified in t he inspection plan, the software also notes the deviant number of decimal places . This ensures that the correct number of decimal places is produced when the in spection results are produced. The values determined are transferred directly in to the SAP software when you save by using the quality management inspection dat a interface or BAPI.<br><br>For process-optimized results recording, input proce ssing runs immediately after the measured values are entered. If you set the ind icator, the SAP software prevents the input processing from running again when y

ou save.<br><br>Input processing for measured values enables you to continue pro cessing measured values after they have been entered. You can , for example, mak e the following decisions: <br><br>- That a measured value is to be multiplied b y a certain factor automatically or rounded off after entry<br>- That the measur ed value entered (original value) is produced independently of the decimal place s specified in the plan or the master inspection characteristic (produced as ent ry)<br>- That the rounding off of the measured value can be controlled through a significance category, in which the dependency of the number of significant pla ces in the actual measured size of the measured value is considered.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Input processing for measured values adds business val ue in the following ways:<br><br>- It processes the measured value entered autom atically, avoiding time-consuming manual reworking of the data.<br>- It excludes inaccuracies by significantly rounding off the measured values recorded, by usi ng the connected measurement instruments. <br>- It enables you to produce the or iginal value of an entered measured value again, regardless of how many decimal places you had planned during inspection planning, so that you can reference the measured original value in your inspection documents at any time.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 Enterprise</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mobile notification and defects recording</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can now record notifications and defects when you detect a problem, even when you do not have a PC with an online connection to th e SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) application. You can use a mobile d evice, such as a pocket PC, to access the set of functions needed for recording. You download your forms with your personal settings to your mobile device, reco rd data offline, and upload the recorded data to the online SAP PLM application. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mobile notification and defects recording adds busines s value in the following ways:<br><br>- It enables you to record SAP Product Lif ecycle Management (SAP PLM) relevant data wherever you are.<br>- It avoids costs created by both recording data on paper and entering it into the SAP software as a second step.<br>- It automatically notifies the persons responsible through a workflow, after the data has been uploaded.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Trial-specific stability studies</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>An essential part of product development in process in dustries especially in the food and beverage industry is the planning, executi on, and evaluation of laboratory trials. Closely linked with this process is the need to conduct stability studies with samples that originate from the differen t trials, including quality inspections. The given solution performs the followi ng tasks:<br> - It handles inspection characteristics, trials, and trial-specific stability st udies.<br>- It allows direct access to trial-related quality inspection data fro m the recipe management workbench.<br>- It ensures more efficient initiation of stability studies by using building blocks with fixed planning parameters such a s time intervals, storage conditions, and testing plans.<br><br>This new process enables the integration of stability studies into recipe management and trial m anagement and includes the use of building blocks during stability planning.</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It simplifies and accelerates the planning of stability studies through the us e of reusable building blocks, user guidance, and automation of planning steps.< br>- It integrates quality-relevant information into the product development pro cess.<br>- It supports Goods Manufacturing Practices requirements of the U.S. Fo

od and Drug Administration.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality assurance and control: sample management</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>Enhancements in sample management are as follows:<br> - Users can archive the physical samples related to inspection lots with their s ample drawing information.<br>- Samples can be flexibly selected for archiving, as can various display functions for archived samples.<br>- The sample master re cord is extended with new fields.<br>- Sample-oriented work lists can be created .<br><br>The new development enables the archiving of physical samples and compl etes the sample management capabilities of the quality management application. T his function is of special importance in the process industries, in which the qu ality management application is used as a laboratory information management syst em and a huge number of samples and sample drawings are handled every day. The s ame applies to service laboratories, which provide sample analysis on customer r equest.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It improves usability and user acceptance.<br>- It enables better software per formance by removing mass data from the software, which results in less real-tim e data.<br>- It supports Goods Manufacturing Practices requirements of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality improvement</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables the maintenance of quality manuals with the SAP Easy Document Management application.<br> The SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence component is used to analyze stability s tudies.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality helps businesses address the ongoin g challenge of quality improvement.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality assurance and control: multiple specifications </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The enablement of multiple specifications within the q uality management functionality in SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) su pports the entire inspection process, from planning and testing through batch cl assification and determination to certificate processing. The business demand ar ises from the fact that individual specifications may exist for different custom ers or countries, whereas production follows a make-to-stock protocol (non custom er-specific). Thus, the resulting batch could be within the internal organizatio n specification but may not be suitable for a specific customer or country becau se of individual specifications. For example, exporting a drug to Japan instead of Europe may require two tolerances for a specific characteristic because of di fferent legal requirements.<br> As part of the laboratory information management system offerings within the qua lity management function of SAP PLM, the functionality provides the following:<b r>- Different inspection specifications for an inspection characteristic, such a s customer-specific requirements or requirements specified by pharmacopoeia, aut horities, or country-specific legal requirements<br>- Determination of the suita bility or admissibility of a batch on the basis of multiple specifications</span ></td>

<td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - t improves operational efficiency in industry scenarios requiring quality insp ections that are based on multiple specifications.<br>- It facilitates the alloc ation of production batches to customer orders, through integration with invento ry and batch management.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality assurance and control: operation completion</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>In order to offer an additional control mechanism and provide status information on inspections, an operation completion is required. After processing the characteristics in an inspection lot, an authorized user mu st be able to complete the operation that is, to set some kind of a status on o peration level (for example, if all inspections for this particular operation ar e completed). This information is often required in making a usage decision, in order to check preceding steps.<br> Functions for the following tasks are provided:<br> - Planning and executing a decision to complete an inspection operation by labor atory personnel<br>- Assigning textual information and a valuation to an inspect ion lot<br>- Triggering follow-up actions after operation completion<br>- Making operation completion information available for usage decisions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Increased visibility into the inspection process throughout the organization<b r>- Increased efficiency in the laboratory <br>- Improved control mechanism, whi ch covers Good Manufacturing Practices and other U.S. Food and Drug Administrati on (FDA) regulations (especially important for companies with commercial and ind ustrial laboratories for example, those in regulated industries such as pharmac euticals or consumer products)</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Flexible reporting functionalities</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new tool allows the creation of analytical reports on quality data combined with meaningful graphical representation, which can be adjusted individually in the following ways:<br> - Selection of inspection lots, inspection characteristics, and inspection resul ts<br>- Evaluation of actual and archived data<br>- Comparison of results for se veral characteristics<br>- Representation of results in table view or as graphic s, including the option to view several tables or graphics in one screen<br>- De finition of table and graphical layouts for customization<br>- Determination and display of key figures (customer-specific)<br>- Control charts without detailed planning<br>- Export of selected data and integrated visualization of external statistical results (for example, from a statistical subsystem)<br><br>Extended reporting functionalities for quality management results are necessary for simpl ifying the evaluation process. The integration aspect also plays an important ro le: the functionalities are available within the operational system with online and also with archived data. A business warehousing function cannot always fulfi ll this requirement.<br><br>The new flexible reporting tool enables you to creat e reports and analytics on quality management data in combination with meaningfu l graphical representation. These graphics can be adjusted according to the cust omer s and user s needs. The tool also offers the capability to export the selecte d data through the quality management statistical interface.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It increases visibility of quality data throughout the organization.<br>- It e

nables implementation of improved quality control mechanisms.<br>- It decreases total cost of ownership (TCO) by providing relevant information without the nee d to export quality management data to other components such as SAP NetWeaver Bu siness Intelligence.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Audit management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The audit management functionality is versatile in are as such as quality management, environment management, safety and security manag ement, financial revision, and risk management. Completely self-contained, it do es not require any other software and has been transferred from SAP Customer Rel ationship Management (SAP CRM) to SAP NetWeaver and enhanced with additional fun ctions (such as links to the former SAP Business Information Warehouse [whose fu nctionality is now part of SAP NetWeaver] and SAP ERP quality notifications).<br ><br>The audit management functionality supports the entire audit process for al l types of audits. It is now available as part of SAP NetWeaver for all SAP comp onents and offers integration with the former SAP Business Information Warehouse . New features include the following:<br>- Creation of quality notifications out of audit tasks<br>- Archiving of audits<br>- Object links to other SAP componen ts</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It decreases total cost of ownership (TCO) by providing the relevant functiona lity as part of the SAP NetWeaver technology platform, which is included in the license for SAP ERP.<br>- It is a flexible and easy-to-use tool that assists in compliance with legal requirements universally.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>QM</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Quality inspector role</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following: - It offers work lists for inspection lots, notifications, tasks, and production orders, including technical object details.<br>- It allows recording of results , defects, notifications, and confirmations.<br>- It provides easy access to ana lyses and reporting.<br><br>This role addresses quality inspectors in different industries and processes. A quality inspector is usually responsible for the fol lowing tasks:<br><br>- Processing of inspection lot - Drawing of samples<br>- Recording of results and defects (values of inspection characteristics, nonconformity data)<br>- Running of quality control charts<br> - Recording of problem notifications<br>- Usage of calibrated test devices<br>Usage decision making for in-process inspection lots (optional)<br><br>These tas ks entail highly repetitive steps and time pressure, which requires fast data en try. Personalized work lists for inspection lots, notifications, and tasks (for exceptions) are expected. A simple user interface also helps fulfill the tasks.< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It minimizes cost of defects and product recalls.<br>- It reduces cost of qual ity compliance.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Project and portfolio management with SAP software</sp an></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP software helps companies with all aspects of proje

ct and portfolio management. With Collaboration Projects (cProjects), the projec t system function, and SAP Resource and Portfolio Management (SAP RPM), the cust omer is empowered to set up comprehensive project and portfolio management. This solution can be leveraged in various industry scenarios and software, such as n ew product development and introduction (NPDI), enterprise IT portfolio manageme nt, or SAP for Professional Services. <br><br>cProjects, which is an integral pa rt of SAP ERP, is a powerful and easy-to-use application that enables operationa l project management with a phase-based approach focusing on resources and proje ct roles, documents, and collaboration. <br><br>SAP RPM provides the foundation for strategic portfolio management by combining financial, strategic, and operat ional aspects of the entire portfolio (projects, products, assets, services, and so on).</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The customer benefits from software that includes all aspects of integration into SAP ERP (logistics, human resources, and financials) , collaboration with internal and external partners, and promoting project visib ility at all stages. Scalability and an open, extendable framework are also prov ided.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Project planning: management of Collaborative Projects </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collaborative Projects (cProjects) is a Web-based appl ication that supports collaborative phase-based project management processes, es pecially in IT, research and development, and professional services with a focus on deliverables, roles, and commitments. It provides the following:<br> - Flexible project structuring by phases, with gates, tasks, checklists<br>- Pro cess standardization through the use of templates<br>- Creation of tasks and che cklists directly below project definition level, which enhances flexibility in p roject planning<br>- Java-based Gantt chart, which offers additional features su ch as printing<br>- Bottom-up scheduling functionalities that include all types of relationships, such as cross-phase relationships, and the setting of constrai nt dates<br>- Project versioning, simulation, and status reports<br>- Integratio n of business processes with the project system function, SAP ERP Financials sol ution, document management functionality, and quality management functionality<b r><br>You use this application to plan and structure a project. By using project management methods, you obtain a better overview of the activities to be carrie d out and the effect they have on the schedule. Moreover, project planning helps you to estimate the amount of work required to carry out the project.</span></t d> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved communication with international or external partners through a secur ed Web-based application<br>- More efficient and reliable projects from improved project modeling, scheduling, and visualization for example, faster time-to-ma rket in product development<br>- Support for industry processes such as new prod uct development and introduction (NPDI)</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Project planning with project system function</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>The following tasks are accomplished: - Transfer of material components from the product structure of integrated produ ct and process engineering (iPPE) to the project system function<br>- Usage of t he progress analysis workbench as a single point of entry in order to analyze th e progress of your projects and input their earned value percent complete<br>- O

pen project system ability to upload and download customer-specific fields on wo rk breakdown structure (WBS) elements and activities, prevent download of networ ks that are marked for deletion, and transfer networks only (without WBS element s)<br>- New functions in the easy cost planning function: aggregation of items b y summarizing the values of items at lower levels and archiving ad hoc cost esti mates<br><br>A new project structure overview (transaction CN41N) is available i n the project information system. This overview is a user-friendly alternative to CN41 that provides you with the most important functions for viewing your pro ject information. You can perform the following tasks: <br> - Navigate to detail screens for the project objects, where you can edit the mas ter data<br>- Select a number of projects and then release them simultaneously; you can adopt the budget or plan values in these releases, either with their ful l amounts or by using a release percentage to weight the values, or you can limi t the adoption of the values to one fiscal year</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Prototyping and production are based on flexible and configurable integrated p roduct and process engineering (iPPE) structures. <br>- The progress analysis wo rkbench improves performance and data accuracy.<br>- The project structure overv iew is very user friendly.<br>- The budgeting and cost planning process is optim ized.<br><br>These enhancements increase the flexibility and integration of the project system function, thereby leveraging existing investments.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Resource and time management with Collaboration Projec ts</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Collaboration Projects (cProjects) is a Web-based appl ication that supports resource management processes as follows:<br> - Assignment of multiple resources to one role, even in overlapping time interva ls, which allows more than one employee to be responsible per project element<br >- Optimization of the resource planning process by reconciling resource demands between the strategic layer (SAP Resource and Portfolio Management) and cProjec ts<br>- Ability to allocate resources to projects on the basis of their availabi lity<br>- Procurement of external services and material for projects, using SAP Supplier Relationship Management<br>- Integration with time recording (cross-app lication time sheet)<br>- Integration with the SAP Travel Management application , which facilitates the settlement of travel expenses for a project element<br>< br>You use this application to plan the necessary quantitative and qualitative r esources for a project and allocate project roles to suitable employees from you r company. The employees you have chosen can record hours worked on the project afterwards.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved resource planning and allocation<br>- Better support for service and consulting projects as a result of integrated functionalities for external servi ce procurement</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Project execution with Collaboration Projects</span></ td> <td align=left valign=top>Collaboration Projects (cProjects) is a Web-based appl ication that supports project management execution processes, based on a project planning, as follows:<br> - Project dashboard, which enables a quick overview on my projects, my tasks, an d my checklist items to be confirmed, as well as relevant key figures<br>- New s tandard object links for example, to production orders<br>- Issue lists to faci

litate tracking and delegating of issues that arise during a project<br>- Flexib ility to share information with partners through cFolders integration and improv ed internal collaboration through virtual room integration<br><br>You use this b usiness process to carry out a planned project. You can monitor and control how the project is executed by using a number of different mechanisms that enable yo u to react quickly to any variations from the project plan.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables more effective and transpar ent project execution as a result of integration with other business processes, such as time confirmation, and improved communication between project members.</ span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Project accounting with Collaboration Projects</span>< /td> <td align=left valign=top>Collaboration Projects (cProjects) is a Web-based appl ication that supports project accounting processes:<br> - New multilevel controlling by means of work breakdown structure (WBS) hierarch ies from project system for flexible accounting of projects in cProjects, which enables the following:<br> > Bottom-up planning and top-down budgeting, billing , and results analysis, aggregating values and quantities along the hierarchy<br > > Either manual creation of WBS hierarchies in the project system function an d assignment of WBS elements to tasks, phases, or roles, or automatic creation o f WBS hierarchies and assignments based on cProjects structures; alternatively, assignment of internal orders as accounting objects<br> > Calculation services that create cost estimates based on the assigned cProjects structure (while cost s are stored on WBS elements)<br><br>- Settlement of costs originating from vari ous sources:<br> > Actual costs derived from recorded and confirmed time on cPr ojects tasks through cross-application time sheet integration<br> > Costs deriv ed from procured services<br> > Costs derived from project-related travel<br><b r>You use this business process to plan, budget, and monitor the costs and reven ues of a project. cProjects provides accounting integration in SAP ERP so that a ll costs and revenues for a project can be collected.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Ability to leverage existing project system function investments<br>- Better t ransparency and insight, with more flexible capabilities to control project-rela ted costs<br>- Increased efficiency through simplification of the settlement of project-related costs as a result of enhanced integration</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP ERP 6.0</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>End-User Service Delivery</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>PS</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Project self-service only for Collaboration Projects< /span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality accomplishes the following:<br> - It provides quick access to all project-related information and tasks.<br>- It offers work lists for projects, tasks, checklist items, and issues and enables triggering of relevant self-services from those work lists.<br>- It covers most common Collaboration Projects processes with self-servic</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - It increases transparency of project performance and issues.<br>- It pushes ta sks to the user through configurable work lists.<br>- It speeds up administrativ e work.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>mySAP ERP 2004</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Corporate Services</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>FI-TV</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Available Web-based environments (Web Dynpro developme nt environment)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new Web-based employee self-service software for t ravel management includes redesigned and easy-to-use functions for the following :<br> - Travel requests<br>- Travel plans (online bookings)<br>- Travel expense report s<br>- Non travel-related expense reports <br>- Imports from corporate credit car d programs<br>- Traveler profiles<br> In addition, the functions can also be used by travel arrangers and team assista nts, handling the application on behalf of their team members. </span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved user adoption across end-to-end processes<br>- Reduced training effor ts</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New functions in the internet applications of training and event management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The following functions have been added to the calenda r of events function and the book attendance function in the training and event management Internet software: <br><br>- Prebook attendance <br>- Search for busi ness event <br><br>You make a prebooking for an event if the dates scheduled for it do not suit you or if there no events of this type are currently offered. <b r><br>In addition to browsing through the calendar of events to locate an event, you can now also initiate a text search to locate the event of your choice.<br> <br>The Internet function book attendance offers you the option of making a preb ooking for an event. This push-button function is available from the list of bus iness event types.<br><br>When you display a company's business event offer, you can perform a text search to locate an event by entering a search string. As se arch criteria, you can specify the event name, the event abbreviation, the exten ded event text, or any of the categories included in the event description.</spa n></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality facilitates use.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Spain: enhancements in seniority</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Existing seniority features have been enhanced in SAP R/3 release 4.5B as follows: <br><br>- You can define the periods used for senio rity accrual as any number of days or years. <br>- You can configure seniority a ccrual to be dependent on personnel events and absences that is, you can determ ine whether these periods are taken into account. <br>- You can also take former seniority periods into account and enter this information as a number of senior ity periods or as an additional time interval. <br>- You can exclude individual employees from seniority processing. <br>- You have several options for accruing seniority periods, depending on the relationship between the accrual evaluation date and the real completion date of the period. <br>- You now have enhanced va luation possibilities for the seniority payment.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>As of SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the country version of the human resources management function for Spain includes enhanced seniority funct ionality. Master data and payroll accounting have been enhanced to offer more fl exible seniority accrual.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Singapore: functional enhancements</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>The functional enhancements in human resources personn el administration and payroll accounting functions let you process the following information for Singapore: <br><br>- Enhanced reports <br>- National reservist service (NRS) makeup pay<br>- Cross-month service periods <br>- Form IR8A ("Retu rnas , ofpe Er mpS lt oa yt eu eto sr y ReB mo ua nr ed rar te iv oi ns "i )ons for 1998 <br>- Form IR8S ("Details of Employe r s , asap ne drES mt pa lt ou yt eo ers y B Co Pa Frd [Cr ee nv ti rs ai lon Ps rof vo ir de1 n9 t98 Fu< nb dr ]>CoF no trm ibI uR t2 i1 on( s"N )otification by Em pla , os yep rer ofSt aa ntu Et mo pr ly oyB eo ear sdCr ee sv si as tionsofor Em1 p9 l9 o8 ym< eb nr t> "< )br>A midmonth advance process a llows you to issue part of the employee s salary and allowances in the middle of the month. <br><br>Creation of new tables allows users to define union fee contr ibution rates and amounts on the basis of the employee s grouping in the company. <br><br>There are three personnel actions in the termination process: <br><br>Notification of termination (new) entails the following: <br> > Other terminat ion-related information types, such as the following, are updated:<br> * Obje cts on loan<br> * Leave balance<br> * Monetary loans<br> > A checklist/cl earance report is printed.<br>- Termination (existing): employment status is set to inactive.<br>- The payroll is run, and the legal report (Form IR21) can be p rinted.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>On the basis of the business and legal requirements express ed by our customers, this country version of the human resources management func tionality for Singapore now includes enhancements for many business processes sp ecific to Singapore.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Portugal: new country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The country version of the human resources management function for Portugal allows customers to store and process employee information specific to Portuguese common requirements (personnel administration and person nel time management), the computation of payroll according to Portuguese legal r equirements (payroll accounting), and the generation of evaluations (printed for ms) to be provided to the Portuguese authorities (payroll evaluations).<br><br> The most relevant functions are as follows:<br><br>- Personnel administration<br > > Fiscal data<br> > Social security data <br> > Disability data <br> > Emp loyee professional classifications <br><br>- Payroll accounting<br> > Deducting taxes ("IRS" and stamp tax) <br> > Income ("IRS") and stamp tax deductions <br > > Social security deductions <br> > Meal allowance <br> > Holiday allowance <br> > Christmas allowance <br> > Shortfall allowance <br> > Seniority plans <br> > Leave compensation <br> > Winter holidays processing <br><br>- Legal r eports<br> > Social report (balano social) <br> > Personnel summary (quadro de pessoal) <br> > Income declarations <br> > Overtime record <br> > Remuneratio n sheet <br> > Leave summary (mapa de frias) <br><br>- Other statistical reports : the country version of the human resources management function for Portugal is integrated into the international human resources management function component s.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved legal compliance<br>- Improved support of local requirements<br><br>T he country versions of the human resources management function are extensions to the standard, international functions of that function in the SAP R/3 software. <br><br>The new country version for Portugal, included in SAP R/3 release 4.5B, offers all the standard functions of human resources management for personnel ad ministration, personnel time management, and payroll accounting, extended with a dditional functions, and it complies with the legal requirements and specific bu siness procedures that apply to Portugal.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>Philippines: new country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new functionalities in the personnel administratio n and payroll accounting functions in human resources allow you to store and pro cess the following information for the Philippines:<br><br>- Taxation <br>- Soci al Security contributions <br>- Sickness and maternity benefits <br>- Home devel opment management funding <br>- End-of-year tax statement (Bureau of Internal Re venue Form 2316)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves legal compliance.<br><br>T he country version of the human resources management function for the Philippine s is an extension of the SAP international human resources management function. <br><br>The personnel administration and payroll accounting functionalities in t he Philippine country version conform to the major requirements stipulated by th e Philippine authorities.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Germany: payroll accounting official statement of soc ial insurance contributions</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables simple calculation of total contributions for the statement of contributions. Previously, the total contrib utions for the statement of contributions were calculated in an additional evalu ation run performed by the payroll driver. The total contributions were calculat ed according to personnel calculation rules in personnel calculation schema D500 (evaluation schema for RPCALCD0). In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, this evaluation run is no longer necessary. The total contributions are now calculated in the view H R: Cumulation Wage Type Calculation (V_T596I). The calculation of total contribu tions is now a much simpler procedure.<br><br>A statement of contributions can b e created through the use of SAPscript. The statement of contributions is create d with normal SAPscript form technology. In addition to an improved printout, th is enhancement allows you to easily modify the statement of contributions. <br>< br>Sample forms for the statement of contributions and individual statements are included in the standard system. These forms meet the specifications set by the German health insurance association AOK. Both forms can be copied and then modi fied to meet your requirements.<br><br>This functionality also enables sorting. You can define a sort sequence when creating the statement of contributions and individual statements. For example, the statement of contributions can be sorted according to payroll office and health insurance fund, and the individual state ments can be sorted according to employee name and personnel number.<br><br>Dist ributed reporting allows you to run reports in several software programs. You mu st run the report using report RPMREP00 ("HR: Scheduler for Distributed and Para llel Reporting"). You can use distributed reporting to run report RPCSVBD0, prov ided your software meets the general requirements for a distributed reporting sy stem.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>The official statement of social insurance contributions (i n short, statement of contributions) is a notification of total statutory social insurance contributions paid. Each payroll office notifies each health insuranc e fund of the total contributions paid. Report RPCSVBD0 ("SI Contribution Statem ent for Compulsory Contributions") is used to create the statement of contributi ons. The report can perform the following functions:<br><br>- Create an official statement of earnings in accordance with the guidelines issued by the German he alth insurance association AOK <br>- Create individual statements for archiving <br><br>Report RPCSVBD0 has been considerably revised for SAP R/3 release 4.5B: <br><br>- The total contributions are no longer calculated during an evaluation run performed by the payroll driver. The payroll results are now read directly; therefore, it is no longer necessary to perform a separate payroll run in evalua ting payroll results. <br>- The layout of the statement of contributions, which is based on the SAP word processing program SAPscript, has been modified to corr espond to current formatting standards. <br>- You can now specify a sort sequenc

e when creating the statement of contributions and individual statements. <br>Report RPCSVBD0 can be started in several software programs (distributed reporti ng).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Germany: payroll accounting company pension scheme</s pan></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality addresses several issues: - Entitlement administration Entitlement administration comprises a set of rules for all employees and an emp loyee-specific entitlement assignment.<br><br>- Set of rules In the set of rules for company pension schemes (CPSs), you define the pension r ules applicable in your company, on the basis of entitlements and entitlement gr oups. You also define the valuation methods used to valuate the entitlements.<br ><br>- Assignment of entitlements You assign an entitlement to an employee in employee master data by using two ad ditional new information types. You use these information types to store employe e-specific entitlement data:<br> > CPS entitlement groups information type (032 3): you use this information type to assign an employee to an entitlement group. <br> > CPS entitlements information type (0202): you use this information type to confirm final entitlements for an employee. You can confirm entitlements only in an entitlement group if the employee is assigned to this specific entitlemen t group in the CPS entitlement groups information type (0323).<br><br>- Valuatio n of entitlements As of SAP R/3 release 4.5B, you can automatically valuate company pension scheme entitlements that have been confirmed for an employee. The entitlements can be valuated on the basis of an employee's length of service, contributions, or inco me. The entitlements are valuated by report program RPCWVSD0 ("Calculation of Pe nsions"). This report valuates the entitlements by using a wage type and amount. This data is stored in the basic pension payments information type (0201) for e ach employee. The basic pension payments information type (0201) is processed in payroll accounting.<br><br>- Pension adjustments Pensions are adjusted at specific times. These times are stored for each entitle ment. Each entitlement determines the period in which the resulting pension paym ents are checked and, if necessary, adjusted. As of SAP R/3 4.5B, pensions can b e adjusted automatically by means of report RPCWIRD0 ("Pension Adjustments for C ompany Pension Schemes"). The pension payments to be adjusted are selected start ing at the date of the next adjustment. The report also calculates the increase amount and next adjustment date.<br><br>- Statements As of SAP R/3 4.5B, you can generate company pension scheme statements by using report RPBWDRD0 ("Print Report for Company Pension Scheme Payments"). The SAP fo rm technology, SAPscript, is used to print the statements. You can create the fo llowing statements:<br> > Private pension <br> > Surviving dependents' pension <br> > Pension eligibility <br> > Pension equalization <br> > Nonforfeitable eligibility <br> > Reimbursements<br> > Invalidity pension</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>SAP R/3 release 4.0B was the first SAP R/3 software release to include functions that enabled you to enter pension payments in a specific i nformation type, assign the pension payments to a pension institute, and calcula te the payments in payroll accounting.<br><br>SAP R/3 4.5B includes a number of additional functions that allow complete processing of company pension scheme (C PS) data.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Norway: new country version</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>The new functions in the Norwegian personnel administr ation and payroll accounting functions of the human resources management functio nality allow you to store and process the following information: <br><br>- Tax c alculations and deductions <br>- Calculation and deduction of union fees and gar nishments (pleggstrekk, bidragstrekk, and inkassotrekk) <br>- Employer contributi on calculations <br>- Vacation handling and holiday allowance <br>- Reports ever y two months <br>- Employer contributions and tax <br>- Garnishments (pleggstrekk ) <br>- Reporting to the arbeidstakerregisteret (Register of Employers and Emplo yees [of the National Insurance Service]) <br>- Annual tax report (lnns- og trekk oppgaver) <br>- Statistical reports (rikstrygdeverkets fravrsrapport, Confederati on of Norwegian Business and Industry [NHO] funksjonrstatistikk, NHO lnnsstatistik k, Federation of Norwegian Manufacturing Industries [TBL] funksjonrstatistikk, St atistics Norway [SSB] lnnsstatistikk) <br>- Reimbursement requests for sick pay a nd maternity pay</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>The country version of the human resources management funct ionality for Norway is an extension of the SAP standard, which is based on inter national human resources management functions. This country version takes into a ccount Norwegian legal requirements and business practices for personnel adminis tration and payroll accounting.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>New reporting functions in human resources</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides the following tools: - Ad hoc query evaluation of cumulated payroll results<br>You can evaluate your employees' gross pay in monthly, quarterly, and yearly cumulations.<br><br>- Ad hoc query selection along organizational structure Until this release, to request reports for a set of personnel numbers or employe es, you specified selection fields (for example, City ) and values for those sele ction fields (for example, Berlin ). This method of selection allowed you to spec ify any set of personnel numbers and then to request a variety of reports. Howev er, users frequently need to request reports for personnel numbers belonging to one or many organizational units. Until now, these users had to define the group of employees by first selecting the organizational assignment information type (or functional area) and then selecting the organizational unit field and enteri ng the organizational unit (or units) concerned. This selection procedure is sim plified in SAP R/3 release 4.5B. A new function, select along organizational str ucture, is available in the ad hoc query function. This tool accesses a tree str ucture from which users can select all the employees in one or more organization al units. This tool is used if only some employees in the selected organizationa l unit are to be evaluated. You make the selection by using the organizational s tructure and remove the personnel numbers for which no data is to be evaluated. This new function simplifies and speeds up the selection process, thus increasin g the efficiency of the ad hoc query reporting tool. The new function facilitate s the following selection methods:<br> > Selection of all personnel numbers in an organizational unit <br> > Selection of all personnel numbers in a number of organizational units<br> > Selection of all personnel numbers in a branch of t he organizational structure <br> > Combined selection along the organizational structure and use of selection fields and values <br><br>- Human resources data extractor for the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component (whose fun ctionality is now part of SAP NetWeaver) Data extractors are available for use with human resources master data, time man agement data, and payroll accounting results. These allow you to use the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component to evaluate different human resourc es data. For example, you can use a cross-component reporting tool to analyze th e personnel structure, employee turnover, overtime payments, or personnel costs in your company. You can restrict the number of employees with access to this da

ta by assigning authorizations. Personnel time data can be retrieved from the fo llowing:<br> > Absences and attendances information types <br> > Time balance and time wage types evaluation results <br> > External employee (EE) remunerati on information type <br> > Personal work schedule <br><br>- Absence quotas and attendance quotas information types Information on these personnel times is included in the former SAP Business Info rmation Warehouse component. You can combine the data in evaluations. For exampl e, you can generate overtime statistics irrespective of whether overtime for dif ferent employee groups is entered in time information types or remuneration stat ements, or determined automatically by the time evaluation process. You can also extract account assignment information from activity allocation, together with the personnel times, and combine this with accounting data in the SAP Business I nformation Warehouse component. In payroll accounting, you can extract all the w age types in the results table and the accompanying organizational assignment at the time of the payroll run. As a result, the following information is availabl e in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse:<br> > Wage type-related eva luations sorted and summarized according to different organizational features <b r> > Gross salary evaluations based on the employee s age or time wage type eval uations based on different absence types with features (for example, when payrol l results are linked with time and master data) <br> > Evaluations of personnel costs based on origin and on future development</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality improves and simplifies reporting.< br><br>In SAP R/3 release 4.5B, the reporting functions in the human resources f unctionality are simplified and enhanced in the following ways:<br><br>- You can evaluate cumulated payroll results by using the query and ad hoc query tools. < br>- You can use the organizational structure for direct selection in an ad hoc query. <br>- You can use a data extractor to evaluate different human resources data in the former SAP Business Information Warehouse component.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Mexico: new country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new country version for Mexico allows customers to store and process country-specific data in the personnel administration functio n. Customers can process time data and calculate employee-related payments (pers onnel time management and payroll accounting functions).<br><br>The new country version for Mexico includes development for legal requirements and country-speci fic business processes. Functions to meet legal requirements and country-specifi c business processes include the following:<br><br>- Social insurance data proce ssing <br>- Tax data processing <br><br>Other functions facilitate the following : <br><br>- Garnishments (rdenes jurdicas) <br>- FONACOT and INFONAVIT loans <br>Christmas bonus (aguinaldo), and profit-sharing payments <br>- Savings funds (f ondo de ahorro) <br>- Calculation and processing of special overtime rules (hora s extras dobles, horas extras triples) <br>- Evaluation programs let the custome r process stored information to create legally required reports. <br><br>This co untry version is integrated with other components in the SAP R/3 software.</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.0A provided the personnel administra tion function to the Mexican market. This software provides a country version of the personnel administration, personnel time management, and payroll accounting functions for Mexico. This functionality provides the following benefits: - Improved legal compliance<br>- Improved support of local requirements<br><br>T he personnel administration function stores and administers employee data. The p ersonnel time management function manages time data. The payroll accounting func tion processes this data to make legally required payments and to perform other payroll activities. <br><br>Country versions are extensions of the standard, int ernational functions of these functionalities. Country versions are designed to provide customers with functions for the specific legal requirements and busines

s procedures of the country. They perform country-specific payroll accounting. O ther human resources management functions are available for other processing req uirements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Venezuela: new country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new country version for Venezuela allows customers to store and process country-specific data in the personnel administration func tion. Customers can process time data and calculate employee-related payments (p ersonnel time management and payroll accounting functions).<br><br>The new count ry version for Venezuela includes development for legal requirements and country -specific business processes. Functions to meet legal requirements and country-s pecific business processes include the following:<br><br>- Social insurance data processing <br>- Tax data processing. <br><br>Other functions facilitate the fo llowing: <br><br>- Advanced vacation payments <br>- Instituto Nacional de Cooper acion Educativa (INCE) <br>- Profit-sharing payments <br>- Administration and pa yment of severances <br><br>Evaluation programs let the customer process stored information to create legally required reports. <br><br>This country version is integrated with other components in the SAP R/3 software.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 release 4.5B provides a country version of the personnel administration, personnel time management, and payroll accounting fun ctions for Venezuela. This functionality enables the following: - Improved legal compliance<br>- Improved support of local requirements<br><br>T he personnel administration function stores and administers employee data. The p ersonnel time management function manages time data. The payroll accounting func tion processes this data to make legally required payments and to perform other payroll activities. <br><br>Country versions are extensions of the standard, int ernational functions of these components. Country versions are designed to provi de customers with functions for the specific legal requirements and business pro cedures of the country. They perform country-specific payroll accounting. Other human resources management functions are available for other processing requirem ents.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Venezuela: benefits administration</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality addresses several issues: - Health plan The health plan category keeps track of company-specific health care costs, such as the hospitalization, surgery, and maternity (HCM) costs and dental costs.<br >- Insurance plan The insurance plan category allows for the deduction of insurance cost during pa yroll run, such as life insurance and accident insurance.<br>- Saving plan The saving plan category allows for the deduction of employee and employer contr ibutions during payroll run, such as contributions to regular saving and retirem ent saving.<br>- Stock plan The stock plan category enables the administration of the employee participation in stock purchase plans. This category allows for the definition of periodic am ounts to be deducted for purchasing company stock.<br>- Miscellaneous plans The miscellaneous plan category enables the user to define plans that vary in su ch aspects as employee and employer contributions or calculation formulas from o ther standard plan categories. This plan category supports the administration of food tickets. <br>- Integration into the Venezuelan payroll version The benefits administration functions will be integrated into the country versio n for Venezuela. This enables the deduction of contributions or cost during the

payroll run.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality enables the following: - Improved legal compliance<br>- Improved support of local requirements<br><br>T he following plan categories of the benefits function are available for the Vene zuelan market:<br><br>- Health plan <br>- Insurance plan <br>- Saving plan<br>Stock plan <br>- Miscellaneous plan <br><br>The benefits function is integrated into the Venezuelan payroll process.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>United States: Business Software Inc. decoupled databa se</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>SAP provides instructions for moving data from the cur rent Business Software Inc. (BSI) tables to the decoupled BSI tables. Applicatio n programming interfaces (APIs) synchronize the data (tax authorities, tax types ) between the BSI and SAP R/3 software.<br><br>The BSI tax calculation database has been decoupled from the SAP R/3 software in this release. This decoupling of fers the following benefits for U.S. payroll customers:<br><br>- SAP R/3 users c an access the BSI GUI. <br>- SAP R/3 users can access online help documentation provided by BSI. <br>- BSI provides tax updates directly to customers. This tax update facility includes a history of previously performed tax updates. <br>- SA P R/3 users can use the BSI what if tool to simulate tax calculation situations. This feature provides a quick and easy way to ensure accurate tax calculation o n the basis of the situations you create. <br>- The human resources payroll func tion is compatible with the latest BSI releases available (currently 5.0).</span ></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Thailand: new country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The new functions in the personnel administration and payroll accounting functions in the human resources functionality allow you to s tore and process the following information for Thailand: <br><br>- Withholding t ax deduction<br> > Calculate-in-advance method (CAM)<br> > Accumulative method (ACM)<br>- Absorbing tax (gross-up) <br> > Full absorbing<br> > One-cycle abs orbing<br>- Social Security Fund <br>- Provident Fund <br>- Bonus payments throu gh off-cycle payroll <br>- Deduction priorities <br>- Legal reports <br> > Mont hly income tax (Form 1)<br> > Annual income tax (Form 1A)<br> > Certificate of tax deduction (Form 50 bis)<br> > Social Security (Form 1-10)</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>The country version of the human resources management funct ionality for Thailand is an extension of the SAP international human resources m anagement functionality. <br><br>The personnel administration and payroll accoun ting functions in the Thai country version conform to the major requirements sti pulated by the Thai authorities.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Taiwan: country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The country version of the human resources management functionality for Taiwan is an extension of the SAP international human resource s management functionality.<br><br>The personnel administration and payroll acco unting functions in the Taiwanese country version conform to the major business requirements stipulated by the Taiwanese authorities.</span></td>

<td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Switzerland: withholding tax statement for the cantons of Geneva, Waadt, and St. Gallen</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The official form for the respective canton is created for all persons subject to withholding tax and for whom income subject to withh olding tax has been calculated within an evaluation period. This notification se rves as official confirmation of the withholding tax deductions retained by the employer and sent to the tax administration authorities for the canton.<br><br>T he information required for the withholding tax statement includes the following :<br><br>- Length of service, workdays, and unpaid workdays<br>- Date of birth a nd Social Insurance number <br>- Salary breakdown according to payment period, s plit into the net and gross amounts with withholding tax rate, and family data < br>- Breakdown of total amount into child benefit, per diem sickness indemnity r ate, tips, gifts presented when a particular seniority level is reached, or bonu ses for marriages or births</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>The withholding tax offices in the cantons of Geneva, Waadt , and St. Gallen require a withholding tax statement to indicate tax paid by per sons subject to withholding tax, instead of the wage statement. Because of the d ifferent graphical layout of this statement, the statement is created through th e use of SAPscript.</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#c0c0c0;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Switzerland: voluntary insurance</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>You can use the new function to define table-based pay scale levels for which separate deductions for the employee and employer can be calculated during payroll accounting. You can calculate the contribution by usi ng a percentage rate either for the total wage amount or for the portion of the wage exceeding the previous pay scale.</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>This functionality provides improved support of local requirements.<br><br>Voluntary insurance represents an enhancement in or alterna tive to statutory accident insurance. The purpose of voluntary insurance is to c over the portion of wages that exceeds the maximum limit of the Swiss Federal La w on Accident Insurance (UVG).</span></td> </tr><tr style='font-family:arial;font-size:12px;background-color:#FFFFFF;'><td align=left valign=top>SAP R/3 4.5B</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Human Capital Management</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>HR</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>Sweden: new country version</span></td> <td align=left valign=top>The